JP7570657B2 - Gaming Machines - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

Pachinko machines and slot machines are known as types of gaming machines. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a specific lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery.

Specifically, in slot machines, when the start lever is operated with medals as gaming media bets, an internal lottery is conducted and the reels begin to spin. If the stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop in response to the results of the internal lottery, a bonus according to the result is awarded (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2008-295707 A

Here, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the gaming machines mentioned above, and there is still room for improvement in this regard.

The present invention was made in consideration of the circumstances exemplified above, and aims to provide a gaming machine that can increase the enjoyment of gaming.

The present invention relates to
A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, as a lottery result by the lottery means;
a means for executing notification of an operation mode of the stop operation means,
The game state includes a first state and a second state in which the mode notification is more likely to be executed than in the first state,
a means for executing a specific determination for enabling a transition to the second state in a specific game in the first state ;
a means for transitioning to the second state based on a determination result of the specific determination being a result corresponding to enabling transition to the second state;
a means for making the specific game a later game when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in a predetermined game among games in which the execution of the specific determination in the first state is restricted, compared with when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the predetermined game;
a means for enabling the bonus given by the bonus giving means to be greater when the player operates in the second operation mode in the predetermined game than when the player operates in the first operation mode;
The present invention is characterized in that it is provided with:

The present invention makes it possible to increase the enjoyment of games.

1 is a front view of a slot machine according to an embodiment. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door closed. 1 is an oblique view of the slot machine with the front door open. FIG. FIG. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. 1 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the symbols visible through the display window and the pay lines. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning modes and the benefits provided. FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the main control device. 2 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device; 13 is a flowchart showing timer interrupt processing by the main control device. 4 is a flowchart showing normal processing by the main control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery process. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for a normal gaming state. 13 is a flowchart showing a reel control process. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 11 is an explanatory diagram for explaining reel stop control. 13 is a flowchart showing RT state processing. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the first RT state. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the second RT state. A figure showing an example of a lottery table for the third RT state. 13 is a flowchart showing bonus state processing. 13 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the operation sequence of the stop switches and the winning patterns that are achieved. FIG. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a lottery table for the RB state. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing the transition relationship between states. FIG. 2 is an explanatory diagram showing an overview of a display mode. 13 is a flowchart showing a lottery result handling process. 13 is a flowchart showing the lottery process for transition to advantageous zones. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT lottery process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for adding AT. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of various transition lottery tables. A figure showing an example of an additional lottery table and an additional game number lottery table. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between the actual number of remaining games in the advantageous zone and the displayed number of remaining games. FIG. 2 is a diagram for explaining an overview of an indication monitor and a section display. An explanatory diagram showing an overview of the push order notification presentation performed on the auxiliary display unit. A flowchart showing the push order function processing. 13 is a flowchart showing a winning result response process. 13 is a flowchart showing a game number management process. 13 is a flowchart showing a first section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing an MY update process. A diagram to explain the relationship between the start game and end game of the advantageous zone and the display of the zone indicator. 13 is a flowchart showing a performance setting process by a sub-side display control device. 13 is a flowchart showing a start-up performance setting process. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. A flowchart showing the setting process for the added effects. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects at the time of each stop operation. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for setting effects when all stops are performed. A diagram showing the relationship between notification timing and additional performance. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of a lottery information storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number shifting process. A diagram to explain the AT counter values associated with each role in the AT mode transition lottery table. A diagram for explaining an overview of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter and the game lottery results. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. 13 is a flowchart showing the end-time AT lottery processing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of winning roles during the RB state. A diagram to explain the AT counter associated with a winning role during the RB state. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for displaying a hold. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift. 13A is a flowchart showing a process for updating a game scheduled to be completed, and FIG. 13B is a diagram for explaining an overview of a scheduled completion display. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. This is a diagram to explain the outline of the AT lottery at the end of RB. 13 is a flowchart showing the hold display process in variant example 1. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift. A figure showing an example of a pending display lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing the pending display process in variant example 2. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift. A flowchart showing the pending display process in variant example 3. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of winning roles during the RB state in the modified example 4. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of winning roles during the RB state in variant example 5. In the sixth modified example, (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the benefit to be awarded, and (b) to (d) are diagrams showing a part of the lottery table for each mode. 13 is a flowchart showing an end determination process. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the progress of the game during the RB state. 13 is a flowchart showing an AT lottery process in the second embodiment. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an outline of a lottery table for each state. A diagram for explaining the outline of the first specific role and the second specific role. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an overview of a lottery information storage area. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number acquisition process. 13 is a flowchart showing a random number shifting process. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for displaying a hold. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a specific notification. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a specific notification. 13 is a flowchart showing the hold display process in variant example 1. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of a specific notification. 13 is a flowchart showing a second section display process in the second modified example. 13A is a flowchart showing the processing for setting the effect when the first stop is turned off during a fall replay, and FIG. 13B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the winning mode and the bonus awarded. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the end pattern avoidance notification. FIG. 13 is a diagram for explaining an overview of the notification for stopping the ending pattern. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift in the third modified example. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing an example of a specific notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing a process for a hold shift in the fourth modified example. 13A is a flowchart showing a specific notification lottery process, and FIG. 13B is a diagram showing an example of a specific notification lottery table. 13 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the order of pressing. This is a diagram to explain the relationship between specific notifications and notifications when the push order bell is won.

First Embodiment
An embodiment of the present invention, which is applied to a reel type gaming machine, specifically a slot machine, will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings. Fig. 1 is a front view of a slot machine 10, Fig. 2 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with a front door 12 closed, Fig. 3 is a perspective view of the slot machine 10 with the front door 12 open, Fig. 4 is a rear view of the front door 12, and Fig. 5 is a front view of a cabinet 11.

As shown in Figures 1 to 5, the slot machine 10 has a housing 11 that forms its outer shell. The housing 11 is generally formed in a box shape with an open front, and is attached to the so-called island equipment by nailing it when installing it in an amusement hall.

A front door 12 is attached to the front side of the housing 11 so as to be openable and closable. That is, the housing 11 is provided with a pair of upper and lower support shafts 13a, 13b on the left side when viewed from the front, and the front door 12 is provided with bearings 14a, 14b at positions corresponding to the support shafts 13a, 13b. When the support shafts 13a, 13b are inserted into the bearings 14a, 14b, the front door 12 is supported rotatably around an opening and closing axis extending in the vertical direction connecting the support shafts 13a, 13b with respect to the housing 11, and the front open side of the housing 11 can be opened or closed by rotating the front door 12. The front door 12 is locked and cannot be opened by a locking device 20 provided on its back side. A key cylinder 21 integrated with the locking device 20 is provided at the upper right end side of the front door 12, and the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21.

A game panel 25 that notifies the player of the game status is provided at the upper center of the front door 12. The game panel 25 has three vertically long display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R arranged side by side, and the inside of the slot machine 10 can be seen through each of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R may be combined into one common display window.

As shown in FIG. 3, the inside of the housing 11 is divided into two parts, an upper part and a lower part, by a partition plate 30, and a reel unit 31 constituting a variable display means is attached to the upper part of the partition plate 30. The reel unit 31 is provided with a left reel 32L, a center reel 32M, and a right reel 32R each formed in a cylindrical (annular) shape. Each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is supported so that it can rotate with its central axis being the axis of rotation of the reel. The axes of rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R are arranged on the same axis extending in a substantially horizontal direction, and each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R corresponds one-to-one to each display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Therefore, a part of the surface of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R is visible through the corresponding display window 26L, 26M, and 26R. Furthermore, when reels 32L, 32M, and 32R rotate forward, the surfaces of reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are displayed through display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R as if they are moving from top to bottom.

Here, we will briefly explain the configuration of the reel unit 31.

Each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is connected to a stepping motor, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be rotated individually, i.e., independently, by driving each stepping motor. The stepping motor is set to rotate once by giving a drive signal (hereinafter also referred to as an excitation pulse) of, for example, 504 pulses, and the rotational position of the stepping motor, i.e., the rotational position of the reel, is controlled by this excitation pulse. In addition, reel index sensors for detecting that the reel has rotated once are installed on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R in the reel unit 31. When the reel index sensor detects that the reel has rotated once, it outputs a detection signal to the main control device 101, which will be described later, each time it detects that the reel has rotated once. Therefore, the main control device 101 can check and correct the angular position of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R for each rotation based on the detection signal of the reel index sensor and the number of excitation pulses output before the detection signal is input.

On the outer periphery of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R, multiple symbols are drawn in the long side direction (rotation direction) as identification information. More specifically, 21 symbols are drawn at equal intervals. Therefore, to switch from one symbol to the next symbol at a specified position, it is necessary to output 24 excitation pulses (= 504 pulses ÷ 21 symbols). Furthermore, the main control device 101 can determine which symbols are visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R and stop a specified symbol at a position visible from the display windows 26L, 26M, 26R based on the number of excitation pulses output after the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input.

Next, we will explain the symbols depicted on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Figure 6 shows the arrangement of symbols on the left reel 32L, center reel 32M, and right reel 32R. As shown in the figure, 21 symbols are arranged in a row on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Numbers from 0 to 20 are also assigned to each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, but these numbers are numbers used by the main control device 101 to identify the symbols that are visible through the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, and are not actually assigned to the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. However, these numbers will be used in the following explanation.

There are 11 types of symbols: "Red Bell" symbol (e.g., the 7th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White Bell" symbol (e.g., the 20th symbol on the left reel 32L), "First Replay" symbol (e.g., the 19th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Second Replay" symbol (e.g., the 6th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Red 7" symbol (e.g., the 10th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Watermelon" symbol (e.g., the 8th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Cherry" symbol (e.g., the 4th symbol on the left reel 32L), "Black BAR" symbol (e.g., the 18th symbol on the left reel 32L), "White BAR" symbol (e.g., the 17th symbol on the left reel 32L), "LUCKY" symbol (e.g., the 5th symbol on the left reel 32L), and "Youth" symbol (e.g., the 0th symbol on the left reel 32L). As shown in FIG. 6, the number and arrangement of the various symbols are completely different on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

Each display window 26L, 26M, 26R is formed so that of the 21 symbols on the corresponding reel, only three symbols are visible in their entirety. Therefore, when each reel 32L, 32M, 32R is stopped, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible through the display window 26L, 26M, 26R.

In the slot machine 10, the game results of each game are announced using a total of three combinations of symbols, one for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, among the symbols that can be seen. As described above, 3 x 3 = 9 symbols are visible, and as combinations of these three symbols, for example, as shown in FIG. 7, there are combinations of symbols that stop on the upper line L1 connecting the upper symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, combinations of symbols that stop on the middle line L2 connecting the middle symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on the lower line L3 connecting the lower symbols of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a downward-right line L4 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the lower pattern of the right reel 32R, and combinations of symbols that stop on an upward-right line L5 that connects the lower pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the upper pattern of the right reel 32R. There are also combinations of symbols that stop on a curved line L6 that connects the upper pattern of the left reel 32L, the middle pattern of the middle reel 32M, and the middle pattern of the right reel 32R. The above lines L1 to L5 are lines that form a straight line when the symbols are lined up, and the curved line L6 is a line that bends when the symbols are lined up. There are other combinations of symbols that stop on lines that bend, other than the curved line L6, but we will not explain them here.

Of these lines L1 to L6, some are activated and some are not, depending on the number of medals bet. When symbols stop in a specified combination on an activated line, i.e., an activated line, a win is achieved and a bonus is awarded in which a specified number of medals, which serve as gaming media, are paid out, or a bonus is awarded in which the gaming state is changed. On the other hand, when symbols stop in a specified combination on an inactivated line, a win is not achieved and the bonus is not awarded.

In this slot machine 10, there are cases where only the downward-right line L4 is the active line as shown in FIG. 8(a), cases where the two combination lines of the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines as shown in FIG. 8(b), and cases where only the bent line L6 is the active line as shown in FIG. 8(c). More specifically, when three medals are bet and the game is started, only the downward-right line L4 is the active line, and when two medals are bet and the game is started, the lower line L3 and the downward-right line L4 are the active lines. Also, when one medal is bet and the game is started, only the bent line L6 is the active line. The three combination lines of the upper line L1, the middle line L2, and the upward-right line L5 are not the active lines. Hereinafter, a game started with three medals bet is also called a 3-bet game, a game started with two medals bet is also called a 2-bet game, and a game started with one medal bet is also called a 1-bet game.

Figures 9 to 11 show the correspondence between winning combinations of symbols and the benefits that will be awarded if a winning combination is achieved.

The small prize winnings that result in medal payouts include the 1st small prize winning to the 41st small prize winning.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the first small win is achieved. When the first small win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

Although the winning symbol combinations for the 2nd small prize winning to the 26th small prize winning are different, in a 3-bet game, the winning pattern is that the "red bell" symbol or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR" symbol, "red 7" symbol, "cherry" symbol, "white bell" symbol or "LUCKY" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "white BAR" symbol, "youth" symbol, "white bell" symbol, "red 7" symbol or "second replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the top line L1, in other words, the "bell" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M and 32R stop on the top line L1. For example, if the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top row, the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M stops on the middle row, and the "white BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stops on the bottom row, the eighth small win is achieved. As shown in Fig. 6, the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the middle reel 32M in a position (number 12) adjacent to the "cherry" symbol (number 11) on the upstream side, and the "red bell" symbol is arranged on the right reel 32R in a position (number 20) one symbol away from the "white BAR" symbol (number 18) on the upstream side. Therefore, when the 8th small win occurs on the downward-right line L4, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R will stop on the upper line L1. When the 2nd to 26th small wins occur, 3 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 27th minor prize is determined by the stopping pattern of the left reel 32L as a specified reel among the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Specifically, the 27th minor prize is won when the "cherry" pattern of the left reel 32L stops in the upper or lower row. In this case, the stopping patterns of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R do not affect the winning judgment. In other words, regardless of the stopping patterns of the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R, the 27th minor prize is won when the "cherry" pattern of the left reel 32L stops in the upper row or stops, that is, when the "cherry" pattern or the "second replay" pattern stops on the winning line. When the 27th minor prize is won, 2 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L stops on the top or bottom row, and the "cherry" symbols stop all together on the downward-right line L4. More specifically, the 28th minor win occurs when the "cherry" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol or the "cherry" symbol stops on the middle reel 32M, and the "cherry" symbol, the "first replay" symbol or the "second replay" symbol stops on the right reel 32R. When the 28th minor win occurs, 2 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

To further explain the relationship between the 27th and 28th small wins, when the "cherry" or "second replay" symbols on the left reel 32L stop, the 27th small win is achieved regardless of the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, but depending on the symbols stopped on the middle reel 32M and right reel 32R, the 28th small win may be achieved instead of the 27th small win. In other words, although the winning patterns that result in the 27th small win include the winning patterns that result in the 28th small win, the 27th and 28th small wins are clearly distinguished when making the winning judgment.

The 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R all stop on an active line. In other words, if the sloping right line L4 is the active line, the 29th minor win occurs when the "watermelon" symbols all stop sloping right. When the 29th minor win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "watermelon" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on the top line L1. More specifically, the 30th small win occurs when the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. When the 30th small win occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Black BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 31st minor win is achieved. When the 31st minor win is achieved, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

For the 32nd to 35th small prizes, if they are achieved in a 3 bet game, 2 medals will be paid out, and in a 2 bet game, 14 medals will be paid out.

The 36th minor prize occurs when, for example, the player operates the stop switches 42-44 aiming for the "watermelon" symbol on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and the "watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and center reel 32M, or the left reel 32L and right reel 32R, stop on an active line, while the "watermelon" symbols on the remaining reels do not stop on an active line, resulting in a so-called "watermelon tenpai miss" winning outcome. When the 36th minor prize occurs, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Black BAR", "Watermelon" and "Cherry" symbols on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell", "White Bell" and "Youth" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 37th minor win is achieved. As shown in FIG. 6, the left reel 32L has the "Red Bell" symbol (No. 7) and the "Second Replay" symbol located adjacent to it (No. 6) downstream, and the "First Replay" symbols located adjacent to the main "White Bell" symbols (No. 3, No. 12, No. 15 and No. 20) and the downstream positions (No. 2, No. 11, No. 14 and No. 19). On the right reel 32R, the "1st replay" or "2nd replay" symbols are arranged in adjacent positions (3, 6, 16, 0) to the main "red bell" symbols (2, 5, 12, 20), and the "1st replay" symbol is arranged in adjacent position (11) to the upstream side of the "white bell" symbol (10). Therefore, when the 37th small win is established on the right-downward line L4, the "bell" and "replay" symbols are mainly in tenpai on the left reel 32L and the right reel 32R, while the "bell" and "replay" symbols on the center reel 32M do not stop, resulting in a so-called double tenpai stop result. When the 37th small win is established, 9 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "White BAR", "Young Man", "Watermelon" and "First Replay" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "First Replay", "Watermelon" and "Black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 38th small win is achieved. In a 3-bet game, if the player operates the left stop switch when the No. 4 "Cherry" symbol on the left reel 32L reaches the top to bottom row, the 38th small win is achieved, and the "Red Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on the middle line L2. If the 38th minor win is achieved, 9 medals will be paid out in a 3-bet game, and 15 medals will be paid out in a 2-bet game.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 39th small win is achieved. The 39th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 2-bet game. When the 39th small win is achieved, 15 medals are paid out.

When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red 7" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 40th small win is won. The 40th small win is a winning mode that can only be achieved in a 2-bet game. When the 40th small win is achieved, 15 medals are paid out.

When the "watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "black BAR" symbol or the "cherry" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the 41st minor win is achieved. When the 41st minor win is achieved, 5 medals are paid out in a 3-bet game, and 14 medals are paid out in a 2-bet game.

The winning combinations that grant the replay privilege, which allows the player to play the next game without inserting a medal, include the 1st replay winning combination to the 12th replay winning combination. If the 2nd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 1st RT state, if the 3rd replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 2nd RT state, and if the 4th or 5th replay winning combination is achieved, the game state transitions to the 3rd RT state.

State transition winnings that only result in a transition of the game state include the 1st RB winning, the 2nd RB winning, and the CB winning.

When the "red 7" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on a winning line, a first RB win occurs, and the game state transitions to the first RB state. When the "white BAR" symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R stop on a winning line, a second RB win occurs, and the game state transitions to the second RB state. When the "red bell" or "white bell" symbols on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon", "first replay", and "black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on a winning line, a CB win occurs. When a CB win occurs, the game state transitions to the CB state.

In addition, although not a winning combination, there are some winning combinations that, when stopped, will transition to the first RT state, provided that the game state is in the normal game state. Specifically, when the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "white BAR", "LUCKY", "red 7", "white bell" or "cherry" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state transitions to the first RT state. In addition, if the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "White BAR", "Youth", "White Bell", "Red 7", and "Second Replay" symbols on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, the game state will also transition to the first RT state. Hereinafter, the combination of the above symbols will be referred to as the transition result.

A start lever 41 is provided on the lower left side of the game panel 25, which is operated to start the rotation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. The start lever 41 constitutes a start operation means or a start operation means that is operated to start the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, i.e., to start the variable display of the patterns. When the start lever 41 is operated with a predetermined number of medals inserted, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts to rotate.

Button-shaped stop switches 42-44 are provided to the right of the start lever 41 and are operated to individually stop each of the spinning reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. Each stop switch 42-44 is located directly below the display window 26L, 26M, and 26R that corresponds to the reel 32L, 32M, and 32R to be stopped.

Stop detection sensors 42a to 44a (FIG. 12) are connected to the stop switches 42 to 44, respectively, and the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a are connected to the main control device 101, which will be described later. The main control device 101 then determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated based on the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a. Specifically, when the stop switches 42 to 44 are not operated, the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a output a detection signal of a LOW signal, and when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, the detection signal switches from a LOW signal to a HIGH signal. The main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated by determining this signal switch. When the main control device 101 determines that the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, it controls the reel corresponding to the operated switch to stop spinning.

That is, when the left stop switch 42 is operated, the left reel 32L stops spinning, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated, the middle reel 32M stops spinning, and when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the right reel 32R stops spinning. The stop switches 42 to 44 constitute a stop operation means that is operated to stop the variable display of the symbols based on the rotation of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

A medal insertion port 45 for inserting medals is provided below and to the right of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R. The medal insertion port 45 constitutes an input means for inputting game media. In addition, considering that the medal insertion port 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, it can also be said to constitute a direct input means for directly inputting game media.

The medals inserted through the medal insertion port 45 are guided to either the storage passage 47 or the discharge passage 48 by a selector 46 as a passage switching means provided on the back of the front door 12. More specifically, the selector 46 is provided with a medal passage switching solenoid 46a, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is not energized, the medals are guided to the discharge passage 48 side, and when the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is energized, the medals are guided to the storage passage 47 side. The medals guided to the storage passage 47 are guided to a hopper device 51 stored inside the housing 11. On the other hand, the medals guided to the discharge passage 48 are guided to a medal tray 50 from a medal discharge port 49 provided on the lower front surface of the front door 12, and are returned to the player.

The hopper device 51 is composed of a storage tank 52 that stores medals, and a payout device 53 that pays out medals to players. The payout device 53 rotates a medal payout rotating plate (not shown) to discharge medals to an opening 48a provided in the discharge passage 48, and pays out the medals to a medal receiving tray 50 through the discharge passage 48. In addition, a reserve tank 54 is provided to the right of the hopper device 51 to prevent medals from being stored in the storage tank 52 by more than a predetermined amount. Inside the storage tank 52 of the hopper device 51, a guide plate 52a is provided to discharge medals from the storage tank 52 to the reserve tank 54. Therefore, if medals are stored above the height at which the guide plate 52a is provided, the medals will be stored in the reserve tank 54.

A button-shaped return switch 55 is provided below the medal insertion port 45. If the return switch 55 is operated when a medal inserted into the medal insertion port 45 becomes stuck in the selector 46, the selector 46 is mechanically linked and operated, and the medal stuck in the selector 46 is returned from the medal ejection port 49.

On the lower left side of the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R, a first credit insertion switch 56 is provided for inserting three credited virtual medals as game media at a time. A second credit insertion switch 57 is provided to the right of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a third credit insertion switch 58 is provided to the left of the first credit insertion switch 56. The second credit insertion switch 57 is for inserting one virtual medal, and the third credit insertion switch 58 is for inserting two virtual medals at a time. The credit insertion switches 56 to 58, together with the medal insertion slot 45, constitute an input means for inputting game media. In addition, while the medal insertion slot 45 involves the action of the player directly inserting medals, the credit insertion switches 56 to 58 only involve the action of inserting virtual medals based on the stored memory. Considering this, it can also be said that they constitute an indirect input means for indirectly inputting game media.

Between the first credit input switch 56 and the second credit input switch 57, there is provided an effect switch 66 that is operated when an effect occurs. In other words, to the left of the effect switch 66, there are the first credit input switch 56 and the third credit input switch 58, and to the right of the effect switch 66, there is the second credit input switch 57.

A settlement switch 59 is provided to the left of the start lever 41. In other words, this slot machine 10 has a credit function that stores and stores as virtual medals any surplus inserted medals up to a predetermined maximum value (equivalent to 50 medals) or medals paid out when a prize is won, and when the settlement switch 59 is operated while virtual medals are stored and stored, the virtual medals are paid out from the medal outlet 49 as real medals. In this case, when focusing on the function of paying out credited virtual medals as real medals, the settlement switch 59 can also be said to constitute a settlement operation means for actually paying out the stored and stored game media.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R of the game panel 25 are a credit display section 60 that displays the number of credited virtual medals, a remaining payout number display section 61 that displays the number of medals remaining to be paid out until the bonus state ends, and a payout number display section 62 that displays the number of medals paid out when a win occurs. These display sections 60 to 62 are made up of seven-segment displays, but can of course be replaced with liquid crystal displays or the like.

Below the display windows 26L, 26M, and 26R on the game panel 25 and to the right of the payout number display unit 62, there is provided an instruction monitor 68 having a push order indicator that notifies the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and a zone indicator that indicates an advantageous zone in which the player can play in an advantageous situation by changing the winning rate of minor roles by notifying the operation order. The instruction monitor 68 will be described in detail later.

At the top of the front door 12, there are provided an upper lamp 63 that lights up or flashes as the game progresses, a pair of left and right speakers 64 that play various sound effects as the game progresses and notify the player of the game status, and an auxiliary display unit 65 that gives the player various information. The auxiliary display unit 65 is for executing various display effects as the game progresses, and since the game using each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R can be considered to be performed by the main display unit, it is referred to as the auxiliary display unit 65 in this embodiment. At the back of the auxiliary display unit 65, there is provided a display control device 81 for driving the upper lamp 63, the speaker 64, and the auxiliary display unit 65.

Inside the housing 11, a power supply box 70 is provided to the left of the hopper device 51. The power supply box 70 houses the power supply device 91 inside and is equipped with a power switch 71, a reset switch 72, a setting key insertion hole 73, and the like. The power switch 71 is an activation switch for supplying power to each part including the main control device 101. The reset switch 72 is a switch for resetting an error state of the slot machine 10. The setting key insertion hole 73 is for the hall manager or the like to adjust the medal output. In other words, the hall manager or the like can set the winning probability (setting value) of the slot machine 10 by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turning it ON. The reset switch 72 is operated not only when resetting an error state but also when changing the winning probability of the slot machine 10.

Above the reel unit 31, a main control device 101 that controls the game is attached to the cabinet 11.

The main control device 101 is provided with a hand ratio monitor 77 for indicating the ratio between advantageous and unfavorable game states for the player. The hand ratio monitor 77 is installed on the side of the main control device 101 facing the front of the gaming machine so that it is visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in an open state, and is not visible from the front of the gaming machine when the front door 12 is in a closed state. More specifically, it is housed in a board box in which the main control device 101 is housed so that the display surface of the hand ratio monitor 77 is visible through the board box. Incidentally, when the front door 12 is in a closed state, the hand ratio monitor 77 is not visible through the gaps of the display windows 26L to 26R, and the hand ratio monitor 77 cannot be checked unless the locked state is released by a predetermined key operation on the key cylinder 21 and the front door 12 is in an open state. The hand ratio monitor 77 will be described in detail later.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be explained based on the block diagrams in Figures 12 and 13.

The main control device 101 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around the CPU 102, which is a calculation processing means. In addition to the power supply device 91, the CPU 102 is connected to a clock circuit 103 that outputs a rectangular wave of a predetermined frequency, an input/output port 104, and the like via an internal bus. The main control device 101 functions as the main board built into the slot machine 10.

On the input side of the main control device 101, there are the reel unit 31 (more specifically, a reel index sensor that individually detects when each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has made one rotation), a start detection sensor 41a that detects the operation of the start lever 41, stop detection sensors 42a to 44a that individually detect the operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44, an inserted medal detection sensor 45a that detects medals inserted through the medal insertion slot 45, a payout detection sensor 51a that detects medals paid out from the hopper device 51, a first credit insertion detection sensor 52a that individually detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56, and a second credit insertion detection sensor 53a that detects the operation of the first credit insertion switch 56. 6a, a second credit insertion detection sensor 57a that individually detects the operation of the second credit insertion switch 57, a third credit insertion detection sensor 58a that individually detects the operation of the third credit insertion switch 58, a settlement detection sensor 59a that detects the operation of the settlement switch 59, a reset detection sensor 72a that detects the operation of the reset switch 72, a setting key detection sensor 73a that detects when a setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole 73 and turned ON, and other sensors are connected, and signals from these various sensors are output to the CPU 102 via the input/output port 104.

The power supply unit 91 is connected to the input side of the main control unit 101 via the input/output port 104. The power supply unit 91 is equipped with a power supply unit 91a that supplies driving power to the main control unit 101 and each electronic device of the slot machine 10, a power outage monitoring circuit 91b, and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the power supply cut-off state and generates a power failure signal not only during a power failure but also when the power supply is cut off by the power switch 71. For this reason, the power failure monitoring circuit 91b monitors the stabilized drive voltage of 12 volts DC in this example output from the power supply unit 91a, and is configured to determine that the power supply has been cut off and output a power failure signal when this drive voltage drops to less than 10 volts, for example. The power failure signal is supplied to both the CPU 102 and the input/output port 104, and the CPU 102 recognizes this power failure signal and executes the power failure processing described below. The power failure signal is also configured to be supplied to the display control device 81.

The power supply unit 91a is configured to output a stabilized voltage of 5 volts to be used as a drive voltage in control systems such as the main control unit 101, even if the output voltage drops below 10 volts. The time for which this stabilized voltage is output is sufficient to allow the main control unit 101 to execute power outage processing.

The output side of the main control device 101 is connected via an input/output port 104 to the reel unit 31 (more specifically, the stepping motor for rotating each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R), the medal passage switching solenoid 46a provided on the selector 46, the hopper device 51, the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid out display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid out display unit 62, the instruction monitor 68, the role ratio monitor 77, the display control device 81, and an external centralized terminal board 121 that can transmit information to a hall management device (not shown), etc.

The above-mentioned CPU 102 includes a ROM 105 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 102, a RAM 106 that secures a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 105, and various counters, such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data transmission/reception circuit, and other processing circuits required for the slot machine 10, as well known in the art (not shown). The ROM 105 and RAM 106 form a main memory as a storage means, and the programs for executing various processes are stored in the above-mentioned ROM 105 as part of the control programs.

The RAM 106 is configured so that it can retain (back up) data by receiving backup voltage from the power supply device 91 even after the power supply to the slot machine 10 is cut off. The RAM 106 is provided with a backup area in addition to memory for temporarily storing various data, a winning flag storage area 106a for storing the lottery results of winning combinations, a stop information storage area 106b for storing stop information used when controlling the stop of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and a status information storage area 106c for storing the game status such as the RB status.

The backup area is an area for storing the value of the stack pointer at the time of power interruption (including power interruption by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below) in the event that power is interrupted due to a power outage or the like, and when the power outage is resolved (including power on by operating the power switch 71; the same applies below), the state of the slot machine 10 can be restored to the state before power was interrupted based on the information in the backup area. Writing to the backup area is performed when power is interrupted by the power outage processing (see Figure 14), and the restoration of each value written to the backup area is performed during main processing when power is turned on.

The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the CPU 102 is configured to receive a power outage signal from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b when the power is cut off due to a power outage or the like. When the power is cut off, an NMI interrupt process is immediately executed as a power outage flag generation process.

As shown in FIG. 13, the display control device 81 is equipped with a microcomputer centered around a CPU 181, which is a calculation processing means. The CPU 181 includes a ROM 182 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the CPU 181, and a RAM 183 for securing a working area for temporarily storing various data when executing the control programs stored in the ROM 182.

The display control device 81 is provided with input/output ports (not shown), with the main control device 101 connected to the input side and the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 connected to the output side. The display control device 81 drives and controls the upper lamps 63, speaker 64, and auxiliary display unit 65 based on various commands input from the main control device 101. In other words, the display control device 81 is a sub-board that performs auxiliary control in relation to the main control device 101, which is the main board that manages the overall game. In other words, by providing a sub-board for sounds, lamps, and displays that are indirectly related to the game, the burden on the main board is reduced.

The display control device 81 is connected to an input side of the display control device 81 with a performance switch 66 (more specifically, a performance switch detection sensor that detects the operation of the performance switch 66). The display control device 81 may also be configured to drive and control the various display units 60 to 62, 68.

Next, the control processes executed by the CPU 102 of the main control device 101 will be described. The processes of the CPU 102 can be broadly divided into main processes that are started when the power is turned on, timer interrupt processes that are started periodically (every 1.49 msec in this embodiment), and NMI interrupt processes that are started when a power outage signal is input to the NMI terminal. Below, we will explain the processes related to the progress of the game among these processes, i.e., timer interrupt processes, and normal processes performed in the main processes.

Figure 14 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process that is periodically executed by the main control unit 101, and a timer interrupt is generated by the CPU 102 of the main control unit 101, for example, every 1.49 msec.

First, in the register save process shown in step S101, the values of all registers in the CPU 102 that are used in normal processing, which will be described later, are saved to a backup area in the RAM 106. In step S102, it is confirmed whether the power outage flag is set, and if the power outage flag is set, the process proceeds to step S103, where power outage processing is executed.

Here is an overview of how power outages are handled.

When the power supply is cut off due to a power outage or the like, a power outage signal is output from the power outage monitoring circuit 91b of the power supply device 91, and the power outage signal is input to the main control device 101 via the NMI terminal. When the power outage signal is input, the main control device 101 immediately executes an NMI interrupt process and sets a power outage flag in a power outage flag storage area provided in the RAM 106.

In the power failure process, first, it is determined whether the transmission of the command has been completed, and if the transmission has not been completed, this process is terminated and the process returns to the timer interrupt process, and the transmission of the command is terminated. If the transmission of the command has been completed, the value of the stack pointer of the CPU 102 is saved in the backup area of the RAM 106. After that, the output state of the output port in the input/output port 104 is cleared, and all actuators (not shown) are turned off. Then, a RAM judgment value for judging whether the data in the RAM 106 is normal or not when the power failure is resolved is calculated and saved in the backup area, thereby prohibiting subsequent access to the RAM. After the above process is performed, an infinite loop is entered in preparation for the power being completely cut off and processing being unable to be executed. Note that, in consideration of the case where the power failure flag is erroneously set due to noise, for example, a check is made as to whether a power failure signal is being output until the infinite loop is entered. If the power failure signal is not being output, it means that the power failure state has been recovered, so writing to the RAM 106 is permitted, the power failure flag is reset, and the process returns to the timer interrupt process. If the power failure signal continues to be output, the infinite loop is entered as it is. Incidentally, even in an infinite loop, it checks whether the power outage signal is being output, and if the power outage signal is no longer being output, it transitions to the main process.

Returning to the explanation of the timer interrupt process, if the power outage flag is not set in step S102, various processes from step S104 onwards are carried out.

That is, in step S104, a watchdog timer clear process is performed to initialize the value of the watchdog timer for monitoring the occurrence of a malfunction. In step S105, an interrupt end declaration process is performed to enable the CPU 102 itself to set the next timer interrupt. In step S106, a stepping motor control process is performed to drive the stepping motors that are the reel drive motors for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R to rotate. In step S107, a sensor monitoring process is performed to read the status of various sensors such as the stop detection sensors 42a to 44a, the inserted medal detection sensor 45a, and the payout detection sensor 51a connected to the input/output port 104 (see FIG. 12), and to monitor whether the read results are normal or not. In step S108, a timer calculation process is performed to subtract the values of each counter and timer. In step S109, a counter process is performed to output the results of counting the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out to the external centralized terminal board 121.

In step S110, a command output process is performed to send various commands, such as a lottery result command, to the display control device 81. In step S111, a segment data setting process is performed to set the segment data to be displayed on the credit display unit 60, the remaining number of coins to be paid display unit 61, the number of coins to be paid display unit 62, and the instruction monitor 68. In step S112, a segment data display process is performed to supply the segment data set in the segment data setting process to each display unit 60 to 62, 68 and display the corresponding numbers, symbols, etc. In step S113, a port output process is performed to output data corresponding to the I/O device from the input/output port 104. In step S114, the values of each register saved in the backup area in the previous step S101 are restored to the corresponding register in the CPU 102. Thereafter, in step S115, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt, and this series of timer interrupt processes is terminated.

Next, the normal processing that performs the main control related to the game will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 15.

First, in step S201, an interrupt permission process is performed to permit the next timer interrupt. In step S202, a pre-start process is performed to enable play. In the pre-start process, the system waits until the display control device 81 and other devices have finished initializing. When the initialization of the display control device 81 and other devices has finished, the system performs the game management process shown in steps S203 to S214.

As part of the game management process, in step S203, various game information and other data (e.g., random number values used in the previous game) stored in the RAM 106 are cleared. Then, in step S204, a start wait process is performed.

In the start waiting process, it is determined whether any replay winning was achieved in the previous game. If any replay winning was achieved, an automatic insertion process is performed to automatically insert virtual medals in the same number as the previous bet number, and the start waiting process is terminated. Specifically, for example, if a replay winning is achieved in a 3-bet game, a process to automatically insert three virtual medals is performed, and if a replay winning is achieved in a 1-bet game, a process to automatically insert one virtual medal is performed.

In the automatic insertion process, virtual medals are inserted without reducing the number of virtual medals displayed on the credit display unit 60. In other words, if any replay winning was achieved in the previous game, the player can play the current game without reducing the number of medals he owns and without inserting medals. If no replay winning was achieved, a sensor abnormality confirmation process is performed to check whether there is an abnormality in the sensor reading result performed in the sensor monitoring process step S107 of the timer interrupt process. If an abnormality is detected, an abnormality occurrence process is performed to put the slot machine 10 into an error state and notify the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated. If the sensor reading result is normal, it is determined whether the settlement switch 59 has been operated, and if the settlement switch 59 has been operated, a medal return process is performed to pay out the same number of medals as the credited virtual medals.

After the medal return process is completed or if the settlement switch 59 has not been operated, it is determined whether medals have been inserted or the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, and if either has been done, a medal insertion process is carried out to change the number of bets, etc., and the start waiting process ends. Also, if neither medals have been inserted nor the credit insertion switches 56-58 have been operated between the previous start waiting process and the current start waiting process, the start waiting process ends as is.

After the start waiting process is completed, in step S205, it is determined whether the number of medals bet has reached the specified number. In this slot machine 10, the specified number in the RB state and the CB state is set to "2", and the specified numbers in the game states other than the RB state and the CB state (specifically, the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, and the third RT state) are set to "1" and "3". In other words, in the RB state and the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals is "2", and in the game states other than the RB state and the CB state, a positive determination is made in step S205 on the condition that the number of medals is "1" or "3". In other words, in the game states other than the RB state and the CB state, if medals have not been bet, or if medals have been bet but the number of medals is "2", a negative determination is made in step S205. If the number of medals has not reached the specified number, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

If the number of bets has reached the specified number, the process proceeds to step S206. In step S206, a bet command including information on the number of bets that was determined to be positive in step S205 is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which serves as a sub-control device. The command set here is output to the display control device 81 in step S110 in the timer interrupt process. The process of the display control device 81 that has received the bet command will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S206, it is determined in step S207 whether the start lever 41 has been operated. If the start lever 41 has not been operated, the process returns to the start waiting process of step S204, and the process from the sensor abnormality confirmation process onwards is performed.

On the other hand, when the start lever 41 is operated, it means that a start command has been issued to start the game, since the game can be started when the start lever 41 is operated under the condition that a prescribed number of medals have been bet. In such a case, in step S208, an effective line setting process is performed to set the combination line corresponding to the number of bets as an effective line. That is, in a 3-bet game, only the right-downward line L4 is set as an effective line, and in a 2-bet game, the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 are set as effective lines. Also, in a 1-bet game, the bent line L6 is set as an effective line. In step S209, the medal passage switching solenoid 46a is switched to a non-excited state to prohibit bet acceptance. After that, the lottery process in step S210, the reel control process in step S211, the medal payout process in step S212, the RT state process in step S213, and the bonus state process in step S214 are executed in order, and then the process returns to step S203.

Next, the lottery process in step S210 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG.

In step S301, a random number is obtained to be used when determining whether a winning combination has been achieved. In this slot machine 10, when the start lever 41 is operated, the hardware circuitry latches the value of the free-run counter at that time. The free-run counter generates random numbers between 0 and 65535, and the CPU 102 stores the value latched by the hardware circuitry in the RAM 106 after confirming the operation of the start lever 41. With this configuration, it is possible to quickly obtain a random number when the start lever 41 is operated, and it is possible to avoid problems such as synchronization. The hardware circuitry of this slot machine 10 is configured to latch the value of the free-run counter each time the start lever 41 is operated.

After obtaining the random number, in step S302, a lottery table is selected to determine whether the winning combination has been achieved. The slot machine 10 has six game states, broadly categorized as a normal game state, a first RT state, a second RT state, a third RT state, a RB state, and a CB state, and a lottery table is set for each game state.

That is, in step S302, the current gaming state of the slot machine 10 is determined based on the number of bets and the setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table corresponding to the number of bets and the gaming state is selected. For example, if the number of bets is "3" and the setting flag is not set in the state information storage area 106c, it is determined that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state, and a lottery table for the normal gaming state is selected. In addition, in this slot machine 10, six winning probabilities from "Setting 1" to "Setting 6" are prepared in advance, and it is possible to set which winning probability is used to execute the internal processing by inserting the setting key into the setting key insertion hole and turning it on, and performing a predetermined operation. In step S302, when the setting state is "Setting 1", a lottery table with the lowest expected value of medal payout is selected, and when the setting state is "Setting 6", a lottery table with the highest expected value of medal payout is selected.

Here we provide additional explanation on the process for setting the winning probability.

The winning probability setting process is executed in the main process that is started by the main control device 101 when the power is turned on. More specifically, the winning probability setting process is started after the initialization process when the power is turned on in a state where the setting key detection sensor 73a detects that the setting key is inserted into the setting key insertion hole and is turned ON. In the winning probability setting process, the setting value is updated by one each time the start lever 41 is operated as a predetermined operation, and for example, the setting value is updated so that "setting 1" → "setting 2" → "setting 3" → "setting 4" → "setting 5" → "setting 6" → "setting 1" each time the start lever 41 is operated once. Note that each setting value is displayed, for example, on the credit display unit 60, and the display is updated each time the setting value is updated. Then, the operation of the start lever 41 with the setting key detection sensor 73a turned OFF is regarded as a setting value confirmation operation, and the setting value at that time is regarded as the current setting value, and the winning probability setting process is terminated. Based on the end of the winning probability setting process, the display of the credit display unit 60 is also terminated. The setting value set in the winning probability setting process is stored in RAM 106 until the next winning probability setting process is started. In step S302, a lottery table selection process is performed based on this stored setting value.

The lottery table will be briefly explained. Figure 17 is a lottery table for the normal game mode selected in the normal game mode of "Setting 3". The lottery table has index values IV set, and each index value IV is uniquely associated with a winning combination and has a point value PV set.

After the lottery table is selected, in step S303, the index value IV is set to 1, and in the following step S304, a judgment value DV is set to be used when judging whether the hand is a hit or a miss. In this judgment value setting process, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the current judgment value DV to set a new judgment value DV. Note that in the initial judgment value setting process, the random number value acquired in step S301 is set as the current judgment value DV, and the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV (1) is added to this random number value to set the new judgment value DV.

After that, in step S305, the winning combination corresponding to the index value IV is judged. In the winning combination judgment, it is judged whether the judgment value DV exceeds 65535. If it exceeds 65535, it is judged in step S306 whether the first RB, the second RB, or the CB has been won. Specifically, it is judged whether the index value IV (IV = 34 to 54) including any of the first RB, the second RB, or the CB has been judged positive in step S305. If the judgment is positive in step S306, a process is performed in which the corresponding bonus winning flag (first RB winning flag, second RB winning flag, CB winning flag) is set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S307. If the judgment is negative in step S306 or after the processing of step S307 is performed, a process is performed in step S308 in which the winning flag of each small winning combination corresponding to the index value IV judged positive in step S305 is set in the winning flag storage area 106a. For example, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=34, the 1st RB winning flag is set in step S307, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set in step S308. Also, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when IV=17, winning flags indicating that the 30th and 41st small wins have been won are set in the winning flag storage area 106a in step S308.

Incidentally, if the winning flag that has been set is not a winning flag indicating that the first RB has been won (first RB winning flag) or a winning flag indicating that the second RB has been won (second RB winning flag), the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a is reset after the game in which the corresponding selection flag is set ends (see S203 in normal processing). On the other hand, if the winning flag is the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag, these winning flags are reset on the condition that the corresponding winning is achieved. In other words, the first RB winning flag and the second RB winning flag may be valid over multiple games.

In addition, in steps S306 to S308 when the 1st RB winning flag or the 2nd RB winning flag is carried over, if a combination other than the 1st RB, 2nd RB, or CB is won, the corresponding winning flag is set, and if a combination other than the 1st RB, 2nd RB, or CB is not won, the corresponding winning flag is not set.

That is, for example, in a state where the 1st RB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 34, the 1st RB winning flag is not set, and the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set. Also, in a state where the 1st RB winning flag is carried over, if the judgment value DV exceeds 65535 when the index value IV = 35, for example, the 28th small win flag, the 33rd small win flag, and the 35th small win flag are set.

It is also possible to prepare a separate lottery table for when the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag is carried over, and perform lottery processing using the separately prepared lottery table when the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag is carried over. In this case, it is preferable to set each index value IV and point value PV in the separately prepared lottery table so that the first RB, second RB, and CB are not won.

If the judgment value DV does not exceed 65535 in step S305, it means that the hand corresponding to the index value IV has not been won. In such a case, the index value IV is incremented by 1 in step S309, and in the following step S310, it is determined whether or not there is a hand corresponding to the index value IV, that is, whether or not there is a judgment target for which a win/loss judgment should be made. Specifically, it is determined whether or not the index value IV incremented by 1 exceeds the maximum value of the index value IV set in the lottery table. If there is a judgment target for which a win/loss judgment should be made, the process returns to step S304, and the judgment of the hand is continued. At this time, in step S304, the point value PV corresponding to the current index value IV is added to the judgment value DV used to judge the win/loss of the previous hand (i.e., the current judgment value DV) to obtain a new judgment value DV, and in step S305, the hand is judged to be a win/loss based on the judgment value DV. Incidentally, when the winning combination is judged using the lottery table shown in Fig. 17, the probability of winning a normal replay (probability of winning when IV = 1) is about 1 in 7.3, the probability of winning a strong cherry (probability of winning when IV = 15) is about 1 in 300, and the probability of winning a weak cherry (probability of winning when IV = 16) is about 1 in 183. The probability of winning a strong watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 17) is about 1 in 300, the probability of winning a weak watermelon (probability of winning when IV = 18) is about 1 in 218, the probability of winning Chance A (probability of winning when IV = 19) is about 1 in 252, and the probability of winning Chance B (probability of winning when IV = 20) is about 1 in 252. The probability of winning the middle bell (probability of winning when IV = 21) is approximately 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning the no-question bell (probability of winning when IV = 22) is approximately 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning the forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, and pinch push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 23 to 26) is approximately 1 in 37.4, and the probability of winning the middle push bell 1, middle push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (probability of winning when IV = 27 to 30) is approximately 1 in 18.7. The probability of winning a strong cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 34) is about 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a strong cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 35) is about 1 in 21,800, the probability of winning a weak cherry overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 36) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a weak cherry overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 37) is about 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a strong watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 38) is about 1 in 32,800, and the probability of winning a strong watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 39) is about 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning a weak watermelon overlap 1 (probability of winning when IV = 40) is about 1 in 65,500, and the probability of winning a weak watermelon overlap 2 (probability of winning when IV = 41) is about 1 in 65,500. The probability of winning Chance A Duplicate 1, Chance A Duplicate 2, Chance B Duplicate 1, and Chance B Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 42 to 45) is approximately 1 in 32,800. The probability of winning Middle Bell Duplicate 1 and Middle Bell Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 46, 47) is approximately 1 in 21,800. The probability of winning Special Lip A Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 48) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Lip A Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 49) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning Special Lip AB Duplicate 1 (probability of winning when IV = 50) is approximately 1 in 1,010, and the probability of winning Special Lip AB Duplicate 2 (probability of winning when IV = 51) is approximately 1 in 1,310. The probability of winning the first RB alone (probability of winning when IV = 52) is approximately 1 in 328. The probability of winning the second RB alone (probability of winning when IV=53) is approximately 1 in 262 to approximately 1 in 437, and the probability of winning varies depending on the setting value that is set. More specifically, the probability of winning the second RB alone is highest at setting 6 and lowest at setting 1, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win. The probability of winning the CB (probability of winning when IV=54) is approximately 1 in 19.9. Also, the probability of not winning any role is approximately 1 in 3.25 to approximately 1 in 3.27.

In addition, in the lottery table for the normal game mode, 0 is set for the point values PV of IV = 2 to 14, 31 to 33, and 55 to 58. Therefore, in the normal game mode, these index values IV do not result in a win.

After the winning flag is set in step S308, or if it is determined in step S310 that there are no targets to be judged, this means that the judgment of the winning or losing role has been completed. In such a case, the process proceeds to step S311, where a freeze lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to execute a freeze effect that disables the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 for a specified period of time.

In the next step S312, a lottery result response process is performed. In the lottery result response process, a process is performed to determine whether or not to change the game state depending on the results of the lottery in steps S301 to S311, and a process is performed to notify the player of the push order role. The lottery result response process will be described in detail later.

After executing the process of step S312, a lottery result command is set in step S313. Here, the lottery result command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the result of the hand win/loss judgment. However, in normal processing, various commands such as the lottery result command are simply set in the ring buffer, and no command is sent to the display control device 81. The command is sent to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process described above.

Then, in step S314, a stop information setting process is executed to set symbols that can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R based on the lottery results of the current game. In the stop information setting process, stop symbol information corresponding to the winning combination is set based on the winning flags set in steps S306 to S308. For example, if a strong cherry is won (winning when IV=15) and the 28th small combination winning flag and the 32nd small combination winning flag to the 35th small combination winning flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small combination and the 32nd small combination to the 35th small combination winning can be stopped on each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R. In addition, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won (won when IV=34) and the 28th small win flag, 33rd small win flag, 35th small win flag, and 1st RB win flag are set, the stop symbol information is set so that symbols corresponding to the 28th small win, 33rd small win, 35th small win, and 1st RB win can be stopped on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the following step S315, if multiple stoppable symbol information was set in step S314, a priority setting process is executed to set the priority order. For example, if multiple roles out of small win, replay, and bonus have been won, the following priority order is set. If a small win and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that a small win takes priority, and if a small win cannot be won, a bonus win takes priority. If a replay and a bonus have been won, the priority order is set so that a replay win takes priority.

For example, if Strong Cherry Duplicate 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 28th, 33rd, 35th, and 1st RB wins is set, the priority is set so that the 28th, 33rd, and 35th small wins take precedence over the 1st RB win. Also, if Special Replay A Duplicate 1 is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 9th replay and 1st RB wins is set, the priority is set so that the 9th replay win takes precedence over the 1st RB win. And, for example, if the 1st RB win is carried over and a normal replay is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 1st RB win and 1st replay win is set, the priority is set so that the 1st replay win takes precedence over the 1st RB win.

Here, if a replay is won, the winning symbol combination is set so that one of the winning replays is guaranteed to win. In other words, if a replay is won, a replay win is guaranteed and there will be no missed wins. Therefore, if the stop symbol information for replays and bonuses is set, one of the set replays will always win and a bonus win will never be achieved.

In addition, when multiple small wins or multiple replays overlap to win, which symbol corresponding to the small win or replay will stop on the active line depends on the timing of the stop operation. For example, if a strong watermelon is won and the stop symbol information corresponding to the 30th and 41st small wins is set, as described above, the target symbol on the left reel 32L is the same as the "watermelon" symbol for the 30th and 41st small wins. Therefore, depending on the timing of the stop operation of the left reel 32L, it is not determined which small win will be established. On the other hand, the target symbols on the middle reel 32M and the right reel 32R are both "red bell" symbols for the 30th small win, and "cherry" and "black BAR" symbols for the middle reel 32M and "watermelon" symbols for the 41st small win. For example, in a 3-bet game, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop on the middle reel 32M when the 4th "watermelon" symbol to the 7th "red bell" symbol reach the middle row, it is possible to stop both the 7th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "black BAR" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, in the middle row on the active line. In this case, in this embodiment, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips is stopped first. As a result, in the above case, the stop drive control is performed so that the "red bell" symbol stops in the middle row, the 41st minor win is not achieved, and the 30th minor win is possible.

On the other hand, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated to stop when the 8th "black BAR" symbol to the 12th "red bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M reach the middle row, it is possible to stop the 8th "black BAR" symbol and the 11th "cherry" symbol, which are the target symbols for the 41st minor win, and the 12th "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, in the middle row. In this case, the stop symbol information is set to prioritize stopping the symbols with the fewest slips, so the 8th "black BAR" symbol or the 11th "cherry" symbol stops in the middle row, the 30th minor win is not achieved, and the 41st minor win is possible.

The same is true for the right reel 32R, and depending on the timing of the right stop switch 44 stop operation, the stop symbol information is set so that the symbol with the least number of slips between the "red bell" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 30th minor win, and the "watermelon" symbol, which is the target symbol for the 41st minor win, stops on the lower row, which is the active line. Note that, if the right stop switch 44 is stopped at the timing when the 6th "first replay" symbol and the 7th "black BAR" symbol reach the active position on the right reel 32R, neither the "watermelon" symbol nor the "red bell" symbol can be stopped, and in this case, neither of the minor wins are achieved, resulting in a so-called missed win.

After executing the process of step S315, the first section display process is executed in step S316, and then the lottery process is terminated. The first section display process is a process related to the display control of the indication monitor 68 and the role ratio monitor 77, and this process will be described in detail later.

Next, the reel control process in step S211 will be explained based on the flowchart in FIG. 18.

In the reel control process, first, in step S401, a spin effect process is performed. The spin effect process is a process for performing an effect using reel control during an invalid period, based on the result of the freeze lottery process performed in step S311. In the following step S402, a spin start process is performed to start the spinning of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In the spin start process, it is checked whether a predetermined wait time (for example, 4.1 seconds) has elapsed since the reels started spinning in the previous game, and if not, it waits until the wait time has elapsed. If the wait time has elapsed, the wait time for the next game is reset, and a motor control initialization process is performed to set spin start information in the motor control storage area provided in the RAM 106. By performing this process, the stepping motor acceleration process is started in the stepping motor control process (step S106) of the timer interrupt process, and each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R starts spinning. For this reason, even if the player bets a specified number of medals and operates the start lever 41, each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R may not start spinning immediately. After that, it waits until each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R spins at a constant speed at a predetermined speed, and the spin start process is terminated. In addition, when the rotation speed of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R reaches a constant speed, the CPU 102 lights up the lamps (not shown) of each stop switch 42-44 to notify the player that it is possible to issue a stop command.

Following the spin start process, in step S403, it is determined whether any of the stop switches 42 to 44 has been operated. If none of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If it is determined that any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated, the process proceeds to step S404, where it is determined whether the stop switch corresponding to the spinning reel has been operated, i.e., whether a stop command has been generated. If a stop command has not been generated, the process returns to step S403, where it waits until any of the stop switches 42 to 44 have been operated. If a stop command has been generated, a stop command command is set in step S405. Here, the stop command command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the display control device 81 to know which stop switch has been operated to generate the stop command. If a stop command command has been set, the stop control process shown in steps S406 to S412 is performed to stop the spinning reel.

In step S406, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position (lower in this embodiment) at the timing when the stop switch is operated is confirmed. Specifically, the symbol number of the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is confirmed by the number of excitation pulses output from the time when the detection signal of the reel index sensor is input. In the following step S407, the number of slips of the reel to be stopped this time is calculated based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. In this slot machine 10, five stop modes are prepared as stop modes for stopping each reel 32L, 32M, 32R when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated: a stop mode in which the reaching symbol that has reached the base position is stopped as it is, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for one symbol, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for two symbols, a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for three symbols, and a stop mode in which the corresponding reel is stopped after sliding for four symbols. Therefore, in step S407, a value between 0 and 4 is calculated as the slip number based on the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b. After that, in step S408, the calculated slip number is added to the symbol number of the reached symbol to determine the symbol number of the stop symbol that will actually stop at the base position. In step S409, it is determined whether the symbol number of the reached symbol of the reel to be stopped this time and the symbol number of the stop symbol are equal, and if they are equal, a reel stop process is performed in step S410 to stop the rotation of the reel. After that, in step S411, it is determined whether all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped. If all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have not stopped, a second stop information setting process is performed in step S412, and the process returns to step S403.

The second stop information setting process is a process for changing the stop information stored in the stop information storage area 106b of the RAM 106 after the reels have stopped. In the second stop information setting process, the stop information is changed based on the winning flag that has been set and the stop results of the stopped reels. In this slot machine 10, for example, when a win occurs when IV=23 to 30, that is, when a win occurs on forward push bell 1, forward push bell 2, pinch push bell 1, pinch push bell 2, center push bell 1, center push bell 2, right push bell 1, and right push bell 2 (hereinafter, these are also collectively referred to as "push order bells") (see FIG. 17), the second stop information setting process is performed to change the winning mode established by the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 19 is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. For example, if the center push bell 1 is won, the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the stop information is set so that the first small role win is achieved when the center stop switch 43 is operated first, and the stop information is set so that the second, seventh, or ninth small role win is achieved when the right stop switch 44 is operated first. However, even if the stop information is set in this way, the corresponding win may not be achieved depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

The arrangement of symbols on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R will be briefly described. In this slot machine 10, in a game state other than the CB state, the reels 32L, 32M, 32R can be stopped after sliding a maximum of four symbols from the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated, and only the right-downward line L4 is set as an active line. Therefore, when the same symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, 32R with an interval of four symbols or less, when a winning symbol is formed, the winning symbol can be stopped on the active line regardless of the timing of the operation of the stop switch 43. On the other hand, for symbols arranged so that a section of five symbols or more is formed, the player needs to operate the stop switches 42 to 44 while aiming at the symbol in order to stop it on the active line.

As an example, a case will be described in which the center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42, the center stop switch 43, and the right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the second small win, the seventh small win, or the ninth small win.

The second minor winning symbols on the left reel 32L are the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol. The "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol also function as the seventh minor winning symbol and the ninth minor winning symbol. The second minor winning symbols (the seventh minor winning symbols and the ninth minor winning symbols) are arranged on the left reel 32L so that the interval between them is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation. For example, if the left stop switch 42 is operated when the "cherry" symbol number 4 on the left reel 32L has reached the middle row, the "red bell" symbol number 7 stops on the top row as shown in FIG. 20(a). As a result, there is still room for the second, seventh, or ninth small win to occur on the downward-sloping right line L4.

The second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "white BAR" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "white BAR" symbol is only located at the 18th position. The seventh small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "red 7" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "red 7" symbol is only located at the 14th position. And the ninth small win symbol on the middle reel 32M is a "cherry" symbol. On the middle reel 32M, the "cherry" symbol is only located at the 11th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the middle stop switch 43, the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line, or none of the second small win symbol, the seventh small win symbol, or the ninth small win symbol may stop on an active line.

Specifically, if the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 17) has reached the bottom row, the "White BAR" symbol, which is the second small win symbol, stops in the middle row. As a result, there is room for the second small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "Second Replay" symbols (No. 9) to the "First Replay" symbols (No. 13) has reached the bottom row, the "Red 7" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, stops in the middle row, as shown in FIG. 20(b). As a result, there is room for the seventh small win symbol to be established on the right-downward line L4. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated when any one of the "White Bell" symbols (No. 6) to the "Youth" symbols (No. 10) has reached the bottom row, the "Cherry" symbol, which is the ninth small win symbol, stops in the middle row. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at any other time, the second, seventh, and ninth minor win symbols cannot be stopped in the middle row even if the middle reel 32M is stopped after sliding four symbols. If the middle stop switch 43 is operated at such a time, the number 2 "LUCKY" symbol or the number 6 "white bell" symbol will stop in the middle row.

When the 7th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 7th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The seventh small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white bell" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white bell" symbol is only located at the number 10 position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the seventh small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "first replay" symbol (number 6) to the "white bell" symbol (number 10) has reached the bottom row, the "white bell" symbol, which is the seventh small win symbol, stops at the bottom row, as shown in FIG. 20(c). As a result, the seventh small win is established on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a bonus corresponding to the seventh small win in the three-bet game. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. For example, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when the "Second Replay" symbol No. 3 has reached the bottom row, the "Watermelon" symbol No. 4 will stop at the bottom row as shown in FIG. 20(d). The combination of the "Red Bell" symbol, the "Red 7" symbol, and the "Watermelon" symbol from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11. However, since the transition result does not correspond to a winning combination, when the transition result stops, none of the corresponding minor combinations will win a winning combination. In this case, the corresponding bonus is not awarded, so no medals are paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the 9th minor winning symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the 9th minor winning symbol can be achieved.

The 9th minor symbol on the right reel 32R is a "Youth" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "Youth" symbol is located at the 15th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the 9th minor symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "First Replay" symbol (No. 11) to the "Youth" symbol (No. 15) has reached the bottom row, the "Youth" symbol, which is the 9th minor symbol, stops at the bottom row. As a result, the 9th minor symbol wins on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a bonus corresponding to the 9th minor symbol win in the 3-bet game. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "Watermelon" symbol or the "First Replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. As shown in FIG. 11, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "cherry" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result. However, as mentioned above, the transition result does not correspond to a winning combination, so if the transition result stops, none of the corresponding minor combinations will result in a winning combination. In this case, the corresponding bonus is not awarded, so no medals are paid out (0 medals are paid out).

When the second small win symbol on the middle reel 32M stops in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the second small win can be achieved.

The second small win symbol on the right reel 32R is a "white BAR" symbol. On the right reel 32R, the "white BAR" symbol is located at the 18th position. Therefore, depending on the operation timing of the right stop switch 44, the second small win symbol may or may not stop on the active line. Specifically, if the right stop switch 44 is operated at the timing when any of the "watermelon" symbol at 14th to the "white BAR" symbol at 18th has reached the bottom row, the "white BAR" symbol as the second small win symbol stops at the bottom row. As a result, the second small win is established on the right downward line L4. In this case, three medals are paid out as a bonus corresponding to the second small win in the 3-bet game. If the right stop switch 44 is operated at any other timing, the "watermelon" symbol or the "first replay" symbol stops at the bottom row. As shown in FIG. 11, the combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "white BAR" symbol, and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result. However, as mentioned above, the transition result does not correspond to a winning combination, so if the transition result stops, none of the corresponding minor combinations will result in a winning combination. In this case, the corresponding bonus is not awarded, so no medals are paid out (0 medals are paid out).

If the second, seventh and ninth minor win symbols on the middle reel 32M do not stop in the middle row, i.e. if the "LUCKY" or "white bell" symbols on the middle reel 32M stop in the middle row, the second stop information setting process changes the stop information so that the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops in the lower row.

On the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols are arranged so that the interval between each of the "watermelon" and "first replay" symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated, the "watermelon" or "first replay" symbol stops on the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation. The combination of the "white bell" symbol ("red bell" symbol), "LUCKY" symbol ("white bell" symbol), and "watermelon" symbol ("first replay" symbol) from the left is a transition result as shown in FIG. 11. However, as described above, the transition result does not correspond to a winning combination, so when the transition result stops, none of the corresponding minor combinations will win a winning combination. In this case, the corresponding bonus is not awarded, so no medals are paid out (0 medals are paid out).

In this way, if center push bell 1 is won and the left stop switch 42 → center stop switch 43 → right stop switch 44 are operated in this order, the second small prize will be won, the seventh small prize will be won, the ninth small prize will be won, or the transition result will stop and no small prize will be won, resulting in a missed opportunity.

Next, we will explain an example in which the center push bell 1 is won and the center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order. In such a case, the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are controlled to stop in order to achieve the first small win.

On the middle reel 32M, the "red bell" symbols, which are the first minor symbol, are arranged so that the distance between each "red bell" symbol is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the middle stop switch 43 is operated first, the "red bell" symbols will stop in the middle row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the left reel 32L, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between the first minor winning symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the left stop switch 42 is operated second, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the top row regardless of the timing of the operation.

On the right reel 32R, the first minor winning symbols, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol, are arranged so that the distance between the first minor winning symbols is four symbols or less. Therefore, when the right stop switch 44 is operated third, the "red bell" symbol or the "white bell" symbol stops on the lower row regardless of the timing of the operation.

As described above, if center push bell 1 is won and center stop switch 43, left stop switch 42, and right stop switch 44 are operated in that order, the first small win is achieved regardless of the timing of operation. In this case, nine medals are paid out as a bonus corresponding to the first small win in the three-bet game.

If the push order bell is won, and the stop switches 42-44 are operated in one or two pre-defined operating sequences, the first small prize will be won regardless of the timing of the operation, and if the stop switches 42-44 are operated in any other operating sequence, depending on the timing of the operation, a small prize will be won or the transition result will stop on the active line and a miss will occur. Incidentally, if the middle bell is won, the 38th small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing, and if the no-question bell is won, the first small prize will be won regardless of the operating sequence and timing.

Returning to the description of the reel control process, if it is determined in step S411 that all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are stopped, a payout determination process is performed in step S413. The payout determination process is a process for setting the number of medals to be paid out, with one of the conditions being that the winning combination is lined up on an active line. In the payout determination process, a combination of symbols formed on an active line is derived from the symbol numbers of the symbols stopped on the lower row of each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R, and it is determined whether or not a winning combination is established on the active line. If a winning combination is established, it is further determined whether or not the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag set in the winning flag storage area 106a. If the winning combination corresponds to the winning flag, the winning combination and the payout number corresponding to the winning combination are set in the payout information storage area provided in the RAM 106. On the other hand, if the winning combination does not correspond to the winning flag, the slot machine 10 is put into an error state and an error occurrence process is performed to notify the user of the occurrence of the error. This error state is maintained until the reset switch 72 is operated.

After the payout determination process is performed, a winning result response process is performed in step S414. In the winning result response process, a process for shifting the game state based on the winning result is performed. The winning result response process will be described in detail later.

After the winning result corresponding process is performed, the second section display process is executed in step S415. The second section display process is a process related to the display control of the instruction monitor 68, and this process will be described in detail later. In the following step S416, a random number acquisition process is executed to acquire a random number for use in the display mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition seed process will also be described in detail later. After that, in step S417, a winning result command is set so that the display control device 81 knows the winning combination in the current game, and the reel control process is terminated.

Next, we will provide an overview of the medal payout process in step S212.

In the medal payout process, it is determined whether the payout number set in the payout information storage area is 0. If the payout number is 0, it means that the previous payout determination process determined that no small winning combination was achieved. In such a case, it is determined whether any of the first replay winning combination to the eighth replay winning combination was achieved, based on the winning combination set in the payout determination process. If none of the replay winning combinations was achieved, the medal payout process is terminated as is, and if any of the replay winning combinations was achieved, a replay setting process is performed to set the game state to a replay state, and the medal payout process is terminated. Note that in the start waiting process (step S204) described above, if it is determined that the current game state is a replay state, an automatic insertion process is performed.

On the other hand, if the payout number set in the payout information storage area is not 0, the same number of medals as the payout number is paid out, and the medal payout process is terminated. Specifically, when the credit counter count value has not reached the upper limit (the number of medals stored is 50), the payout number is added to the credit counter count value, and the added value is displayed on the credit display unit 60. When the credit counter count value has reached the upper limit, or when the count value reaches the upper limit during the addition of the payout number, the medal payout rotating plate is driven, and medals are paid out from the hopper device 51 to the medal receiving tray 50 via the medal discharge port 49. Note that the medal payout process also performs a process of changing the payout number displayed on the payout number display unit 62 in accordance with the medal payout. When the current game state is a bonus state of RB state or CB state, the payout number is subtracted from the value of the remaining payout number counter described later, and the remaining payout number displayed on the remaining payout number display unit 61 is subtracted.

Next, the RT state processing in step S213 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 21.

In step S501, it is determined whether the transition roll has stopped on an active line. If the transition roll has stopped, the process proceeds to step S502, where it is determined whether the current gaming state is a normal gaming state. If the current gaming state is a normal gaming state, a first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c of the RAM 106 in step S503. This process then ends. If it is determined in step S502 that the gaming state in which the transition roll has stopped is not a normal gaming state, the RT state ends as is. In this case, even if the transition roll has stopped, no transition of gaming state occurs.

If it is determined in step S501 that the transition result is not on a winning line, the process proceeds to step S504, where it is determined whether or not a second replay win has been made, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a second replay win has been made, the RT setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is cleared in step S505, and the first RT setting flag is set in step S503. This process then ends.

If the first RT setting flag is set in step S503, the game state transitions to the first RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the first RT state based on the fact that the first RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the first RT state is selected.

Figure 22 is a lottery table for the first RT state selected in the first RT state of "setting 3". When compared to the lottery table for the normal game state (see Figure 17), the lottery table for the first RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 5, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when using this lottery table to determine whether a combination is a win or lose, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 58 is equal to the respective winning probabilities in the normal game state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is approximately 1 in 67.0, and the probability of winning when IV = 2 to 5 is approximately 1 in 32.8. The probability of not winning any combination is approximately 1 in 2.14.

Here, as shown in FIG. 22, if a win occurs when IV=1, a normal replay is won, if a win occurs when IV=2, a first promotion replay 1 is won, if a win occurs when IV=3, a first promotion replay 2 is won, if a win occurs when IV=4, a first promotion replay 3 is won, and if a win occurs when IV=5, a first promotion replay 4 is won. The probability of winning when IV=1 to 5 is about 1 in 7.30. The probability of winning a normal replay under normal gaming conditions is also about 1 in 7.30. In other words, when the gaming state transitions to the first RT state, the odds of winning small roles, replays, and bonuses are the same as in the normal gaming state, while the winning mode in which the replay privilege is awarded changes to one different from that in the normal gaming state. More specifically, in the normal game state, only the first replay win, which does not transition the game state, is achieved, and in the first RT state, in addition to the first replay win, the third replay win, which transitions to the second RT state, is achieved.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned case where the push order bell is won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even if the first promotion replay 1 to the first promotion replay 4 are won.

Figure 23(a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning form that is achieved. Unlike when the push order bell is won, when the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the first replay win or the third replay win is always achieved regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. For the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4, one of the six operation sequences is associated with the third replay, and the other operation sequences are associated with the first replay.

In addition, in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the sixth replay, seventh replay, and eighth replay are also allocated as winning roles. However, these sixth replay to eighth replay are not associated with any of the six operation sequences described above. Therefore, even if the sixth replay to eighth replay are winning in the first promotion replays 2 to 4, they will not win regardless of the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44.

More specifically, for each of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the first promotion replay 1 is assigned the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 2 is assigned the sixth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, the first promotion replay 3 is assigned the seventh replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, and the first promotion replay 4 is assigned the eighth replay in addition to the first replay and the third replay, but for any of the first promotion replays 1 to 4, the winning replay is either the first replay or the third replay. This is to make it difficult to understand the operation sequence that results in a third replay winning. That is, for example, if there is only one type of first promotion replay, then there will also be only one type of operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win, and when the first promotion replay is won, it may be possible to intentionally achieve the third replay win. Note that this relationship is not limited to the relationship between the first promotion replays 1 to 4, and the same can be said for other overlapping roles.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S504 that the second replay winning combination has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S506, where it is determined whether or not the third replay winning combination has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the third replay winning combination has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S507, and the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, and this process ends.

If the second RT setting flag is set in step S508, the game state transitions to the second RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the second RT state based on the fact that the second RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the second RT state is selected.

Figure 24 is a lottery table for the second RT state selected in the second RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the first RT state (see Figure 22), the lottery table for the second RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1 to 10, and the same point values PV are set for the other index values IV. For this reason, when such a lottery table is used to determine whether a role is a winner or loser, the probability of winning when IV = 11 to 58 is equal to each winning probability in the first RT state, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is about 1 in 26.2, the probability of not winning when IV = 2 to 5, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1 in 32.8, and the probability of winning when IV = 9 and 10 is about 1 in 18.2. And the probability of not winning any role is about 1 in 4.88 to 1 in 4.92. In other words, when the game transitions to the second RT state, the probability of losing is lower than in the normal game state and the first RT state, which is advantageous to the player. In addition, in the second RT state, in addition to the first replay win that does not transition the game state, the second replay win that transitions to the first RT state, and the fourth and fifth replay wins that transition to the third RT state are possible.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), in addition to the above-mentioned cases where the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 are won, the stop information is set so as to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command, even when the fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, or second promotion replay 2 is won.

Figure 23(b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning patterns that are achieved. If Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 1 is won, the first replay win, the fourth replay win, or the fifth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. If Second Promotion Replay 2 is won, the first replay win or the fourth replay win will always be achieved, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth replay win and the first replay win, or when the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence corresponding to the fifth replay win and the first replay win, basically, stop control is performed to establish the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win, and when the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win cannot be established, stop control is performed to establish the first replay win.

Returning to the explanation of the RT state processing, if it is determined in step S506 that the third re-play winning combination has not been achieved, the process proceeds to step S509, where it is determined whether the fourth re-play winning combination or the fifth re-play winning combination has been achieved, based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If the fourth re-play winning combination or the fifth re-play winning combination has been achieved, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S510, and the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, and this process ends. Also, if it is determined in step S509 that neither the fourth re-play winning combination nor the fifth re-play winning combination has been achieved, this process ends as is.

If the third RT setting flag is set in step S511, the game state transitions to the third RT state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the third RT state based on the fact that the third RT setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the third RT state is selected.

Figure 25 is a lottery table for the third RT state selected in the third RT state of "setting 3". When compared with the lottery table for the second RT state (see Figure 24), the lottery table for the third RT state has different point values PV for IV = 1, 6 to 14, and the same point value PV is set for the other index values IV. Therefore, when the lottery table is used to determine whether a winning combination is a winning combination, the probability of winning when IV = 1 is about 1 in 5.48, the probability of winning when IV = 6 to 8 is about 1 in 12.0, and the probability of not winning when IV = 9 and 10 is about 1 in 1060 when IV = 11 and 12. Also, in the third RT state, it becomes possible to win a specific replay 1 and a specific replay 2 when IV = 14 and 15, and the probability of winning when IV = 14 and 15 is about 1 in 238. The probability of a miss, i.e., not winning any of the roles, is about 1 in 4.94 to about 1 in 4.97. In other words, when the game state transitions to the third RT state, the probability of a miss is lower than in the normal game state, the first RT state, and even the second RT state, which is advantageous to the player. Also, when the game state transitions to the third RT state, the winning mode in which the replay privilege is granted changes to one different from that in the second RT state. More specifically, in the third RT state, in addition to the first replay winning that does not transition the game state and the second replay winning that transitions to the first RT state, the sixth replay winning, the seventh replay winning, and the eighth replay winning that does not transition the game state, the third replay winning that transitions to the second RT state, the eleventh replay winning that is a cherry replay, and the twelfth replay winning that is a sweet replay are established.

In the second stop information setting process (step S409), even if BAR Replay 1, BAR Replay 2, Specific Replay 1, or Specific Replay 2 is won, the stop information is set to change the winning pattern that is established depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 that generated the stop command.

Figure 23(c) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42-44, and the winning mode that is achieved. If BAR Replay 1 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, either the 1st replay winning, the 7th replay winning, or the 8th replay winning will always be achieved. If BAR Replay 2 is won, regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42-44, either the 1st replay winning, the 6th replay winning, or the 8th replay winning will always be achieved.

Figure 23 (d) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. When specific replay 1 and specific replay 2 are won, regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, either the first replay win, the eleventh replay win, or the twelfth replay win is always established for each specific replay. Note that in this embodiment, the third replay win, for which the win flag is set when specific replay 2 is won, is not associated with the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and when specific replay 2 is won, the third replay win is not established regardless of the operation sequence. More specifically, when a specific replay 1 is won, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, an 11th replay win, which is a cherry replay, is made, if the center stop switch 43 is operated first, a 12th replay win, which is a sweet replay, is made, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated first, a 1st replay win is made. On the other hand, when a specific replay 2 is won, the operation sequence associated with the 11th replay win and the 12th replay win is the opposite to that of the specific replay 1, and if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, a 12th replay win is made, if the center stop switch 43 is operated first, an 11th replay win is made, and if the right stop switch 44 is operated first, a 1st replay win is made.

Next, the bonus state processing in step S214 will be explained based on the flowchart in Figure 26.

First, in step S601, it is determined whether the current gaming state is a bonus state, i.e., whether the current gaming state is an RB state or a CB state. If it is not a bonus state, the bonus determination process shown in steps S602 to S617 is performed.

In the bonus determination process, in step S602, it is determined whether any of the first RB winning flag, the second RB winning flag, and the CB winning flag are set. If any of the winning flags are set, the process proceeds to step S603, and it is determined whether a CB winning has occurred based on the winning combination set in the previous payout determination process. If a CB winning has occurred, in step S604, a CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c. In step S605, a remaining payout counter for counting the number of medals remaining that can be paid out during the bonus state, which is provided in the state information storage area 106c, is set to 15. By performing the processes of steps S604 to S605, the game state transitions to the CB state.

Here is a brief explanation of CB and CB states.

When the "Red Bell" or "White Bell" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "Red Bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "Watermelon", "First Replay" or "Black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a CB win occurs. The CB symbols are arranged on each reel 32L, 32M, and 32R so that there is a gap of 4 symbols or less between each CB symbol. Therefore, when a CB win occurs, the CB win occurs regardless of the order and timing of operation of the stop switches 42 to 44.

When the CB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, the main control device 101 determines that the game state is in the CB state. Then, in step S205 of the normal processing, it determines whether the number of medals bet has reached "2" instead of "3", and in the active line setting process (step S209), it sets the lower line L3 and the right-downward line L4 as active lines.

In step S302 of the lottery process, a lottery table for the CB state is selected. Although the illustration of the lottery table for the CB state is omitted, in the lottery table for the CB state, the point value PV for IV=1 to 54 is set to "0", and the point value for IV=55 to 58 is set to "16384" (see FIG. 17 for the correspondence between IV and winning roles). Therefore, in the CB state, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 1 (probability of winning when IV=55) is about 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 2 (probability of winning when IV=56) is about 1 in 4.00, the probability of winning CB small/medium role 3 (probability of winning when IV=57) is about 1 in 4.00, and the probability of winning CB small/medium role 4 (probability of winning when IV=58) is about 1 in 4.00. No events of losing occur.

Figure 27 (a) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is established. Although detailed explanation is omitted, even if any of CB small/medium roles 1 to CB small/medium roles 4 is won, some small role winning is always established regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Since the CB state is a two-bet game, when the 1st small role winning, the 27th small role winning to the 28th small role winning, and the 31st small role winning to the 40th small role winning are established, 15 medals are paid out, and when the 2nd small role winning to the 26th small role winning, the 29th small role winning to the 30th small role winning, and the 41st small role winning are established, 14 medals are paid out. In other words, when the state transitions to the CB state, 14 or 15 medals are always paid out.

In addition to or in addition to CB as a winning combination and the CB state as a game state, a single bonus (SB) that allows one game (JAC game) to be played as a winning combination, and an SB state to which a transition occurs based on the winning of the single bonus (winning) may be provided.

Returning to the explanation of the bonus state processing, if it is determined in step S603 that a CB win has not been achieved, this means that a bonus win flag other than CB has been set. In such a case, the RT setting flag set in the state information storage area 106c is cleared in step S608, and it is determined in step S609 whether or not a first RB win has been achieved.

If the first RB win is achieved, the first RB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S610, and the first RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S611. After that, in step S612, the remaining payout counter is set to 110, and the remaining payout display unit 61 is caused to display 110. The number set in step S612 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the first RB state, and the first RB state is ended on the condition that medals equal to or more than this number have been paid out in the first RB state.

If it is determined in step S609 that the first RB win has not been achieved, it is determined in step S613 whether or not the second RB win has been achieved. If the second RB win has been achieved, the second RB win flag set in the win flag storage area 106a of the RAM 106 is cleared in step S614, and the second RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c in step S615. Then, in step S616, the remaining payout counter is set to 110, and the remaining payout number display unit 61 is caused to display 110. The value set in step S616 corresponds to the upper limit payout number in the second RB state, and the second RB state is ended on the condition that the number of medals paid out in the second RB state or more has been equal to or more than that value.

By performing the processing of steps S610 to S616, the game state transitions to the first RB state or the second RB state. Then, in step S302 of the lottery process, it is determined that the current game state is the first RB state or the second RB state based on whether the first RB setting flag or the second RB setting flag is set in the state information storage area 106c, and a lottery table for the corresponding RB state is selected.

Figure 28 shows a lottery table for the first RB state selected in the first RB state to which a player transitions upon winning the first RB, and a lottery table for the second RB state selected in the second RB state to which a player transitions upon winning the second RB. In the lottery table for the first RB state and the lottery table for the second RB state, the point value PV for IV = 1 to 14, 16 to 30, 34 to 58 is set to "0". Therefore, in either the first RB state or the second RB state, these IV = 1 to 14, 16 to 30, 34 to 58 do not result in a win. In addition, in the lottery table for the first RB state and the lottery table for the second RB state, the point values for IV=32 to 33 are set to the same point values in both lottery tables, and in both the first RB state and the second RB state, the probability of winning the second role in RB with IV=32 and the probability of winning the third role in IV=RB are both approximately 1 in 6.55.

Meanwhile, in the lottery table for the first RB state and the lottery table for the second RB state, different point values are set for IV=15 and 31, and the probability of winning a strong cherry with IV=15 is 1/2 in the first RB state, but is 1/2 to 1/3 in the second RB state, making it easier to win a strong cherry in the first RB state than in the second RB state. Also, the probability of winning the first role in the RB with IV=31 is approximately 1 in 5.13 in the first RB state, but is approximately 1 in 2.77 to 1 in 5.13 in the second RB state. In these second RB states, the probability of winning a strong cherry with IV=15 or the first role in RB with IV=31 varies depending on the setting value, with setting 6 being the easiest to win a strong cherry and the hardest to win the first role in RB, setting 1 being the hardest to win a strong cherry and the easiest to win the first role in RB, and the higher the setting value, the easier it is to win a strong cherry and the harder it is to win the first role in RB.

In other words, in the first RB state and the second RB state, the probability of winning a strong cherry with IV=15 is higher than in the normal game state and other states such as the first RT state to the third RT state. Also, when comparing the first RB state and the second RB state, the probability of winning a strong cherry in the first RB state is the same regardless of the setting value (the winning probability is the same), but in the second RB state, the probability of winning a strong cherry or the first role in RB differs depending on the setting value. As already explained, the specified number of bets in the RB state is a 2-bet game, so if you win a strong cherry or the first role in RB to the third role in RB in the RB state, 15 medals will be paid out.

Even in a two-bet game, strong cherries are won depending on the timing of the operation of stop switches 42-44, and if they are operated at a timing that does not correspond to a win, the win will not be won and the prize will be missed. In other words, if a strong cherry is won during a RB state, either 15 medals will be paid out, or it will be missed and no medals will be paid out.

In the following explanation, to make it easier to compare strong cherries with IV=15 in the first RB state or the second RB state with strong cherries with IV=15 in other states, those in the first RB state or the second RB state will also be referred to as RB mid-strong cherries, and those in other states will simply be referred to as strong cherries.

Figure 27 (b) is an explanatory diagram showing the correspondence between winning roles, the operation sequence of stop switches 42 to 44, and the winning mode that is achieved. As described above, the first small role winning is a winning mode that can be achieved regardless of the operation timing of stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, if the first role in RB is won, the first small role winning will always be achieved regardless of the operation sequence and operation timing of stop switches 42 to 44. In contrast, for the second role in RB and the third role in RB, the first small role is associated with four of the six operation sequences, and the first small role, the 39th small role, and the 40th small role are associated with two operation sequences. In other words, if the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 matches the first small win, the second or third role in RB will result in the first small win, and if the operation sequence matches the first, 39th or 40th small win, the first, 39th or 40th small win will result. In a two-bet game in RB state, 15 medals will be paid out if the first, 39th or 40th small win is achieved.

9 and 10, the 39th and 40th small wins are different from the 1st small win only in the symbols associated with the right reel 32R, and the symbols associated with the left reel 32L and the middle reel 32M are common to the 1st, 39th, and 40th small wins. The symbols associated with the right reel 32R are also different from the 39th and 40th small wins. When the 2nd or 3rd role in RB is won, if the right reel 32R is stopped at a timing that allows the symbols corresponding to the 39th or 40th small win (the "black BAR" symbol and the "red 7" symbol) to be stopped at an effective position, the 39th or 40th small win is won, and if the symbols corresponding to the 39th or 40th small win are stopped at a timing that does not allow them to be stopped at an effective position, the 1st small win is won. Therefore, it is possible to know whether the 1st, 39th, or 40th small win has been achieved from the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R. More specifically, it is possible to determine whether the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd RB win has been achieved from the stopped symbols on the right reel 32R. If the 1st, 2nd, or 3rd RB win is achieved, 15 medals will be paid out regardless of the operation sequence or operation timing.

If the result of step S613 is negative and no RB win has been achieved, a carryover command is set in step S617. The carryover command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to inform the display control device 81 that a bonus win has not been achieved in the bonus winning game and that a so-called carryover state has occurred. This carryover command is output to the display control device 81 in the command output process (step S110) of the timer interrupt process.

As already explained, in games played in the carryover state, the ability to win other bonuses is restricted. More specifically, in the lottery table for the normal game state (Figure 17), if an overlapping role with a bonus (first RB, second RB, CB) with IV = 34 to 51 is won, the winning flags corresponding to these bonuses are not set. Therefore, for example, if an overlapping role with each of the minor roles with IV = 34 to 51 or a replay is won, the winning flags for these minor roles and the replay are set, but the winning flags corresponding to the bonuses are not set, and only the winning of the minor role is valid. In other words, the carryover state can be said to be a state in which the selection of bonuses is restricted.

If the game state has transitioned to the CB state or the RB state, a positive determination is made in step S601, and an end determination process is performed in step S618. In the end determination process, it is determined whether the value of the remaining payout counter has reached 0, and if it has reached 0, a process is performed to clear the CB setting flag or the RB setting flag. Furthermore, in the end determination process, if the RB setting flag is cleared, an end flag is set to indicate that the RB state has ended in this game. The end determination process will be explained in detail later.

As shown in steps S602 to S618, when the CB is won and the CB winning is established, the CB setting flag is set without clearing the RT setting flag. Therefore, when the CB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the CB state ends, the game state when the CB winning is established will be returned to. For example, when the CB winning is established under the normal game state, the game state will be returned to the normal game state after the CB state ends, and when the CB winning is established under the third RT state, the game state will be returned to the third RT state after the CB state ends. On the other hand, when the first RB or the second RB is won, the RT setting flag is cleared in step S608 regardless of whether the corresponding RB winning is established or not. Therefore, when the RB setting flag is cleared, that is, when the first RB state or the second RB state ends, even if the first RB winning is established under the second RT state, the game state will be transitioned to the normal game state. When the game transitions to the CB state, the player can expect to receive an increase of 13 (=15-2) or 25 (=14-2+15-2) medals until the CB state ends. When the game transitions to the RB state, the player can expect to receive an increase of up to 104 (=15x8-2x8) medals until the RB state ends.

As described above, if a strong cherry is won in the RB state, depending on the timing of the operation of the stop switches 42-44, the winning may not be achieved, and if the winning is not achieved, no medals will be paid out in that game. In other words, if the upper limit payout number is set in the RB state (110) and 15 medals are paid out per game, a maximum of 104 medals can be expected to increase as described above, and the RB state ends after 8 games, but depending on the lottery results of each game in the RB state and the timing and order of operation of the stop switches 42-44 for that game, the number of medals increased when the upper limit payout number is reached may be less than the maximum number, or the number of games until the upper limit payout number is reached may be increased.

When none of the first RB winning flag, second RB winning flag, and CB winning flag are set (when step S602 is NO), when none of the first RB winning, second RB winning, and CB winning are established and a carryover command is set (when the processing of step S617 is executed), when a predetermined value is set in the remaining payout counter in steps S605 and S612, and when the end determination processing is performed in step S618, the process proceeds to step S606 and a status command is set. Here, the status command is a command sent to the display control device 81 to allow the game state at the time of the end of the game (i.e., the game state of the next game) to be grasped, and in step S606, a status command corresponding to the setting flag set in the status information storage area 106c is set. After setting the status command, in step S607, an external signal setting process is performed to set an external signal to be output from the external centralized terminal board 121 to the outside of the slot machine 10. Then, this process ends.

<Overview of game state transitions and display modes>
Here, the transition of the gaming state will be described with reference to Figure 29. Note that the CB state is not shown in the figure.

When the game state is in RB state, if the number of medals paid out in that RB state reaches 110, the RB state ends and the game state transitions to the normal game state.

When the game state is the normal game state, the game state transitions to the first RT state when the transition result stops on a winning line, and the game state transitions to the RB state when an RB win is achieved. The transition result stops on a winning line when a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won. In the lottery process using the lottery table for the normal game state, the first promotion replays 1 to 4, which trigger a transition to the second RT state, and the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which trigger a transition to the third RT state, are not won, so there is no transition from the normal game state to the second RT state to the third RT state (see Figure 17).

When the game state is the first RT state, the game state transitions to the second RT state by the establishment of the third replay winning. The third replay winning is established when any of the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operation sequence (see FIG. 23(a)). In the lottery process using the lottery table for the first RT state, the second promotion replays 1 and 2, which are the trigger for transition to the third RT state, are not won, so the first RT state does not transition to the third RT state. Also, in the first RT state, if the corresponding RB winning is not established in the game in which each RB winning flag is set, that is, if the RB winning flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if the corresponding RB winning is established in the game in which each 1RB winning flag is set, the game state transitions to the RB state. In addition, in the first RT state, even if a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won and the transition result stops, the game state will not transition.

When the game state is in the second RT state, the game state transitions to the third RT state by the establishment of the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning. Also, when the second replay winning is established, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The fourth replay winning and the fifth replay winning are established when the second promotion replay 1 or the second promotion replay 2 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operating sequence (see FIG. 23(b)). The second replay winning is established when any of the fall replays 1 to 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a predetermined operating sequence (see FIG. 23(b)). In addition, if the corresponding RB win is not achieved in the game in which each RB win flag is set, i.e., if the RB win flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if the corresponding RB win is achieved in the game in which each RB win flag is set, the game state transitions to the RB state. Note that in the second RT state, even if a miss occurs in a game in which the push order bell is won and the transition result stops, the game state does not transition.

When the game state is the third RT state, if the second replay win is established, the game state transitions to the first RT state. The second replay win is established when any of Fall Replay 1 to Fall Replay 3 is won and the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in a specified operation sequence (see FIG. 23(b)). In addition, if the corresponding RB win is not established in the game in which each win flag is set, that is, if the RB win flag is carried over, the game state transitions to the normal game state, and if the corresponding RB win is established in the game in which each RB win flag is set, the game state transitions to the RB state. Note that in the third RT state, even if a miss occurs in the game in which the push order bell is won and the transition result stops, the game state does not transition.

In this slot machine 10, the main control unit 101 manages six types of game states: normal game state, first RT state, second RT state, third RT state, RB state, and CB state, and also manages four types of display modes, broadly classified as normal mode, CZ mode (chance zone mode), AT mode (assist time mode), and RB mode.

Figure 30 shows the transition between display modes.

RB mode is a display mode that is entered when the first RB win or the second RB win is achieved, and ends when the RB state ends. In other words, RB mode is a display mode that corresponds to the RB state. Therefore, when entering RB mode, players can expect an increase of up to 104 medals.

When transitioning from normal mode to RB mode, a lottery to transition to AT mode may be held in that RB mode. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is won, the mode will transition to AT mode after RB mode ends. If the lottery to transition to AT mode is not won, the mode will transition to normal mode after RB mode ends. When transitioning from AT mode to RB mode, the mode will return to AT mode after RB mode ends.

Normal mode is a display mode in which the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not announced when the push order bell is won, or when the first promotion replay 1 to first promotion replay 4, fall replay 1 to fall replay 3, second promotion replay 1, second promotion replay 2, BAR replay 1, BAR replay 2, special replay 1, special replay 2 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "push order replays") are won. In normal mode, a lottery is held to switch to CZ mode or AT mode. If the lottery to switch to CZ mode or AT mode is won, the mode will switch from normal mode to CZ mode or AT mode. When switching to AT mode, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 will be announced when the push order bell or push order replay is won.

The normal mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the normal mode, when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified, so it is rare to transition from the second RT state to the third RT state, and it corresponds almost entirely to the normal game state or the first RT state. In the normal mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that approximately 0.92 medals will be lost per game, if the game state at that time is the second RT state, it is expected that approximately 0.61 medals will be lost per game, and if the game state at that time is the third RT state, it is expected that approximately 0.08 medals will be gained per game.

The CZ mode is a so-called chance zone mode in which the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the AT mode is higher than in the normal mode. The CZ mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the CZ mode, when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won, the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44 is not notified, so transition to the second RT state or the third RT state is rare, and it almost always corresponds to the normal game state or the first RT state. The expected increase or decrease in medals per game in the CZ mode is the same as that in the normal mode. In the normal game state or the first RT state, it is expected that the medals will decrease by about 0.92 per game. In the game state at that time, it is expected that the medals will decrease by about 0.61 per game. In the game state at that time, it is expected that the medals will increase by about 0.08 per game. In the CZ mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 may be notified when the push order bell is won or when the push order replay is won. In this case, it is preferable to set the frequency of the notification of the operation sequence, such as the number of times the operation sequence is notified and the winning probability of the notification lottery, to be lower in the CZ mode than in the AT mode. As a configuration for notifying the operation sequence in the CZ mode, for example, the operation sequence may be notified a predetermined number of times (once) when the push order bell is won during the stay, but the operation sequence may not be notified when the push order bell is won thereafter.

The AT mode is a display mode in which the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is announced both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won. The AT mode is a mode that starts with an initial number of games played of a predetermined number (for example, 50 times), and when the predetermined number of games have been played without any addition to the number of games, or when a number of games including the added number have been played, the mode switches from the AT mode to the normal mode.

The AT mode corresponds to each of the game states of the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, the third RT state, and the CB state. However, in the AT mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified both when the push order bell is won and when the push order replay is won, so if the player operates the stop switches 42 to 44 in the notified operation sequence, it corresponds to the second RT state and the third RT state, and mainly corresponds to the third RT state. More specifically, in the AT mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified even when the push order replay is won, so there is a transition from the first RT state to the second RT state, and from the second RT state to the third RT state, and the player stays in the third RT state. In the AT mode, if the game state at that time is the normal game state or the first RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 0.52 medals per game, if the game state at that time is the second RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 0.82 medals per game, and if the game state at that time is the second RT state, the player can expect to gain approximately 2.00 medals per game. Since the AT mode continues for at least 50 games after the game state transitions to the third RT state, when the game transitions to the AT mode, the player can expect to gain approximately 100 medals.

Regarding the transition of display modes when the number of medals owned by a player increases, the general flow is to transition from normal mode to AT mode, and then from AT mode back to normal mode, and the transition from normal mode to AT mode may or may not go through CZ mode.

As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured so that the player can increase the number of medals owned in each display mode, AT mode, and RB mode. In conjunction with each display mode, multiple RT states and multiple states such as RB state and CB state are switched back and forth depending on the winning of each replay or the stopping of the transition result. As described above, when the push order replay is won or the push order bell is won, the corresponding replay winning is achieved or the transition result is stopped depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 43. Also, in the AT mode, when the push order bell is won, the operation sequence that can achieve the first minor prize is announced, so that the player can expect to increase the number of medals owned.

Here, when the display mode is the AT mode, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 is notified when the push order bell or push order replay is won as described above, and when the display mode is the normal mode or CZ mode, the operation sequence when the push order bell or push order replay is won is not notified. Therefore, from the viewpoint of whether or not the operation sequence when the push order bell or push order replay is won is notified, the AT mode is more advantageous for the player than the normal mode or CZ mode. And from the viewpoint of the ease of transitioning to the AT mode, the CZ mode is more advantageous for the player than the normal mode. In other words, the AT mode is included in the advantageous zone, which is a zone in which the winning rate of small winnings etc. is changed by the notification of the operation sequence, making it possible to progress in the game in an advantageous situation for the player, and the CZ mode, in which the transition rate to the AT mode is high, is also included in the advantageous zone.

The display mode configuration is explained below.

<Lottery result processing>
First, the lottery result response process (step S312) of the lottery process (FIG. 16) by the main control device 101 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S701, a process is performed to grasp the current game state. More specifically, it is grasped whether it is in the RB state or CB state, or in other states (normal game state, each RT state, first RB state, second RB state). As already explained, in the RB state or CB state, the prescribed number of bets is set to 2, and in other states, the prescribed number of bets is set to 1 or 3. Then, in step S702, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is one prescribed number (specific prescribed number) prescribed in the state grasped in step S701. More specifically, in the RB state or CB state, the prescribed number of bets is only 2, so a positive judgment is always made in step S702. In states other than the RB state or CB state, the prescribed number of bets is 1 and 3 as described above, and in this embodiment, 3 is set as the specific prescribed number in states other than the RB state or CB state, and if the number of bets is 3 in states other than the RB state or CB state, a positive judgment is made in step S702. In this case, the display mode processing (processing for the instruction function) from step S703 onwards is performed. On the other hand, if the number of bets is 1 in a state other than the RB state or the CB state, a negative judgment is made in step S702, and the lottery result response processing ends. In this case, the display mode processing from step S703 onwards is not performed. Therefore, for example, if the first RB or second RB is won and an attempt is made to achieve a first RB winning or second RB winning in a one-bet game, the display mode processing is not performed.

In step S703, a random number shift process is executed. This process is for random numbers used in AT mode lottery and will be explained in detail later.

In the next step S704, it is determined whether the current game is in an advantageous zone by determining whether an advantageous zone flag has been set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The advantageous zone flag is set based on winning the lottery for transition to an advantageous zone, including the above-mentioned AT mode, and is cleared when the advantageous zone ends. If the advantageous zone flag has not been set, the process proceeds to step S705, and advantageous zone transition lottery processing is executed.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 32, in the advantageous zone transition lottery process, first, in step S801, the lottery result of the current game is ascertained. Then, in step S802, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. As shown in FIG. 35, the advantageous zone transition lottery table is set so that the transition rate to the advantageous zone (probability of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery) differs depending on the lottery result of each game. As the trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone, all results that can be won are set as the trigger for the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone.

After obtaining the lottery table in step S802, a process of obtaining a random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is executed in step S803. The random number for the advantageous zone transition lottery is a dedicated counter in the various counter areas 106e, which is updated at a predetermined interval, and the latest updated value of the counter is obtained in step S803. Then, in step S804, an advantageous zone transition lottery is executed, and in step S805, it is determined whether or not the transition lottery has been won. If the transition lottery has been won, the lottery process is terminated as it is. If the transition lottery has been won, in step S806, a process of setting the above-mentioned advantageous zone flag is executed. This process makes it possible to make a positive determination in step S704 of the lottery result response process (FIG. 31) for the next game or later. In the following step S807, a process of setting an advantageous zone winning game flag is executed in the various flag storage areas 106d. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to know that the transition lottery to the advantageous zone has been won in the current game. After executing the processing of step S807, this advantageous zone transition lottery process ends.

In the lottery result response process, if it is determined that the advantageous zone flag is set in step S704, that is, if the lottery for transition to the advantageous zone has been won in the previous game or before, or after the lottery process for transition to the advantageous zone has been executed in step S705, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not either the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d of the RAM 106. The AT mode winning flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won, and is a flag that is set when the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won and is cleared when transitioning to the AT mode. The AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode, and is a flag that is set when transitioning to the AT mode and is cleared when the AT mode is finally terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S706, an AT lottery process is executed in step S707. If a positive determination is made in step S706, an AT addition process is executed in step S708.

<AT lottery processing>
The AT lottery processing will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

The AT lottery process mainly involves a lottery to determine whether or not to transition the display mode to the AT mode. That is, in step S901, it is determined whether or not the game that has just started is in the second RB state. If the game is in the second RT state, in this embodiment, the AT lottery process ends without performing any processing related to the AT lottery from step S902 onwards. As described above, in the second RB state, the winning probability differs depending on the set value. In contrast, in the first RB state, the winning probability does not differ depending on the set value. And in this embodiment, the AT lottery is performed in games in the first RB state, but the AT lottery is not performed in games in the second RB state.

In the following step S902, the lottery result of the current game is ascertained. Then, in step S903, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set. If the advantageous zone flag is not set and the current game is in the normal zone, in step S904, a process is executed to obtain an AT mode lottery table for the normal zone from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. Also, even if the advantageous zone flag is set in step S903, if the advantageous zone winning game flag is set in step S905, the AT mode winning flag for the normal zone is obtained in step S904. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery for a game that has won the advantageous zone transition lottery is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal zone.

If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set in step S905, it is determined in step S906 whether or not the CZ mode flag is set in the various flags storage area 106d. The CZ mode flag is a flag that the CPU 102 uses to determine whether the current display mode is CZ mode or not, and is set when transitioning to CZ mode and cleared when CZ mode ends. If the CZ mode flag is not set, in step S907, the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous zone is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105, and if the CZ mode flag is set, in step S908, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is obtained from the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105.

As shown in FIG. 35, in these AT mode transition lottery tables, the probability of transitioning to the AT mode is set according to the type of lottery result (winning role). For example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, strong cherries are more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than weak cherries. In general, the lower the winning probability (appearance rate) of the game lottery result, the more likely it is to win the AT mode transition lottery. In addition, when comparing the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section with the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous section and the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, it is set so that the same lottery result is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery for the advantageous section than for the normal section, and more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery for CZ than for the advantageous section. For example, the AT mode winning rate for weak watermelons in the advantageous section is twice the AT mode winning rate for weak watermelons in the normal section, and the AT mode winning rate for weak watermelons in CZ mode is even higher than that.

The game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery and the winning probability are not limited to the above. For example, the types of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery may be different between the normal zone and the advantageous zone, or between the advantageous zone and the CZ mode, to ensure the superiority of the advantageous zone or the CZ mode. In this case, it is preferable to make the types of game results that trigger the AT mode transition lottery more numerous in the advantageous zone or the CZ mode. Furthermore, in this case, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery itself may be the same in the normal zone, the advantageous zone, and the CZ mode. A plurality of CZ modes may be provided, and different AT mode transition lottery tables may be set for each CZ mode, such that in one CZ mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery at Chance A, and in another CZ mode, it is easier to win the AT mode transition lottery at Chance B.

After acquiring the AT mode transition lottery table in step S904, step S907, or step S908, a process of acquiring random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S909. In step S909, random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery are acquired from the lottery information storage area 106f in the RAM 106. The configuration of the lottery information storage area 106f and the process for storing random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery in the area 106f will be described in detail later, but the process of acquiring random numbers for the AT mode transition lottery in step S909 differs from the configuration of acquiring the latest updated value at the time of the lottery, as in other lotteries (e.g., advantageous zone transition lottery).

Then, in step S910, an AT mode transition lottery is executed, and in step S911, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won. If the AT mode transition lottery has been won, in step S912, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag has been set, and if the advantageous zone flag has not been set and the AT mode has been won in the normal zone, in step S913, the advantageous zone flag is set, and in step S914, the advantageous zone winning game flag is set.

If the advantageous zone flag is set in step S912, or after the process of step S914 is executed, the process of setting the AT mode winning flag is executed in step S915. In the following step S916, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the first RB state. In other words, it is determined whether or not the AT mode transition lottery has been won in the game in the first RB state. If a negative determination is made in step S916, and the game is not in the first RB state, the process of setting the premonition mode is executed in steps S917 to S919.

In this embodiment, when a situation arises in which a transition to the AT mode may occur, a premonition mode is set to indicate this situation. In the premonition mode, a display indicating that the AT mode transition lottery has been won is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc., and when the number of games in the premonition mode reaches 0, a transition to the AT mode is permitted, and a notification to that effect (AT mode winning notification display) is displayed.

In step S917, a process is performed to determine the number of games in the premonition mode (premonition game number) by lottery. The premonition game number is set to, for example, 0 to 32 games, and which premonition game number is likely to be selected varies depending on the game result that triggered the AT mode to be won. For example, if the AT mode is won with a strong cherry, a premonition mode of 0 to 10 games is likely to be selected, and if the AT mode is won with a weak cherry, 7 to 14 games are likely to be selected.

In step S918, a process is executed in which the number of premonition games determined by the lottery in step S917 is input to a premonition counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The premonition counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games remaining in the premonition mode. Then, in step S919, a premonition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and a process is executed in which the premonition command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The premonition flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to grasp that the premonition mode has been set, and the premonition command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to grasp that the premonition mode has been set. The premonition command includes information on the number of games in the premonition mode.

If it is determined in step S916 that the AT mode transition lottery for the game in the first RB state has been won, in step S920, a first RB win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d, and in step S921, a process is executed to set a first RB win command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then this AT lottery process is terminated. The first RB win flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know that the game that won the AT mode transition lottery was a game in the first RB state, and the first RB win command is a command that allows the display control device 81 to know that fact. The process of setting the first RB win flag and outputting the first RB win command will be described in detail later.

If it is determined in step S911 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S922. In step S922, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, a CZ mode transition lottery is performed in step S923. In the CZ mode transition lottery, the CZ mode transition lottery table (see FIG. 35) is obtained from the various table storage area 105a, and a lottery counter is obtained from the various counter area 106e, and a lottery is performed as to whether to transition to CZ mode. In this embodiment, strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, chance A, chance B, and middle bells are set as trigger roles for the CZ mode transition lottery, but the lottery may be performed based on other roles, and the winning probability is not limited to that in FIG. 35.

Then, in step S924, it is determined whether or not the CZ mode transition lottery has been won. If the CZ mode has been won, in step S925, the CZ mode flag is set, and a predetermined value of 10 is input to the CZ counter provided in the various counter area 106e, and the CZ start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. By setting the CZ mode flag, a positive judgment is made in the above step S906, and it becomes possible to receive the AT mode transition lottery at an advantageous lottery table. In addition, the CZ counter is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the number of games in the CZ mode, and a subtraction process is performed by 1 each time one game is played in the CZ mode. Then, when the CZ counter becomes 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared and the CZ mode ends. The CZ start command is a command to make the display control device 81 aware that CZ mode is starting. When the display control device 81 receives this CZ start command, it controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that a performance for starting CZ mode is performed, and also controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and speaker 64 so that a performance during CZ mode is performed during each game in CZ mode.

If the CZ mode flag is set in step S922, if the CZ mode transition lottery is not won in step S924, or after the processing of step S925 is executed, the process proceeds to step S926. In step S926, it is determined whether or not a pseudo premonition flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. In this embodiment, a pseudo premonition mode (a mode in which a so-called false presentation occurs) is set in which a suggestive presentation that is the same as or similar to the premonition mode occurs, but the presentation mode ends without an AT mode winning notification presentation that allows a transition to the AT mode, and the pseudo premonition flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to grasp that it is such a pseudo premonition mode. If the pseudo premonition flag is not set, in step S927, whether or not to set the pseudo premonition mode, and the number of games in the pseudo premonition mode if set, are determined by lottery. For example, the less likely the game result is to be won (the lower the occurrence rate), the more likely the player is to win the lottery for switching to the pseudo-omen mode. Also, if the lottery for switching to the pseudo-omen mode is won with a result that is more likely to be won (the higher the occurrence rate), the pseudo-omen mode may be set to a relatively long number of games. Then, in step S928, a process is executed to input the number of games in the pseudo-omen mode determined in step S927 into the pseudo-omen counter. Note that, if the lottery for switching to the pseudo-omen mode is not won, the process of step S928 is not executed (0 is input into the pseudo-omen counter). After that, in step S929, a pseudo-omen flag is set, and a process is executed to set the pseudo-omen command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT lottery process is terminated. The pseudo premonition command is a command for making the display control device 81 understand that the pseudo premonition mode has been set, and includes information on the number of games remaining in the pseudo premonition mode. The display control device 81 performs a lottery to determine whether a suggestive effect will occur depending on the number of games remaining in the pseudo premonition mode. If the lottery to switch to the pseudo premonition mode is not won in step S927, it is advisable to end the AT lottery processing as is without performing the processing of step S929.

<AT top-up processing>
Next, the AT addition process executed in step S708 will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 34. As already described, the AT addition process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode winning flag or the AT mode flag is set, and is a process for adding the number of continued games in the AT mode that starts with a predetermined number of games as the initial number of continued games.

That is, in step S1001, it is determined whether the game that has just started is in the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in either of the RB states, the AT addition process is terminated without carrying out the process for addition from step S1002 onwards. That is, in this embodiment, in a game in the RB state, a lottery for adding the number of games to be continued in the AT mode is not performed. If the game is not in the RB state in step S1001, the lottery result for the current game is obtained in step S1002. Then, in step S1003, the lottery table for adding is obtained from the various table storage area 105a.

As shown in FIG. 36, the add-on lottery table in this embodiment is set so that the probability of winning the add-on lottery and the number of added games when won vary depending on the type of lottery result. For example, a strong cherry adds 20 to 200 AT mode games, with the average number of added games being 40 games. A weak cherry adds 5 to 300 games, with the average number of added games being 20 games. Although there are cases where a greater number of games is selected for weak cherries than for strong cherries, the average number of games is set so that strong cherries are the greater number of games.

In the next step S1004, a random number (counter) for the lottery is obtained from the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106. Then, in step S1005, a lottery is performed to add the number of games in the AT mode. In the next step S1006, it is determined whether or not the lottery for the addition has been won. If it is determined that the addition has not been won, the AT addition process is terminated. If it is determined that the lottery for the addition has been won, in step S1007, a process is performed to add a value corresponding to the number of games to be added in step S1005 to a counter that manages the number of continued games in the AT mode (more specifically, an AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106). In the next step S1008, a post-addition lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to perform a post-addition notification that notifies the player that the lottery for the addition has been won and the number of games to be played.

In this slot machine 10, multiple modes of the addition notification are set when the number of continuing games in the AT mode is added. More specifically, the modes of the addition notification have multiple modes that differ in the game in which the addition notification is performed, and the modes are set to a case where the addition notification is performed in the game in which the addition occurred or in a series of games triggered by the game in which the addition occurred (also referred to as "immediate addition notification" in the following explanation), and a case where the addition notification is performed in a notification game that is a game after the game in which the addition occurred and in which the notification game is determined after the fact (also referred to as "later addition notification" in the following explanation).

In the instant add-on notification, a series of games triggered by a game where an add-on occurs refers to, for example, a case where a continuous performance occurs with the game where an add-on occurs as a trigger, and a series of games refers to games that can continue from the game where the add-on occurred over multiple games. The series of games also includes cases where a continuous performance does not occur, for example, a corresponding performance does not occur in the game where an add-on occurs, and an add-on notification occurs in the next game or multiple games later, and the game where the add-on occurred and the games up until the add-on notification occur are considered to be a series of games, and such types of add-on notification are also included in the instant add-on notification.

On the other hand, in the case of later-addition notification, the notification game that is determined ex post and is a game that comes after the game in which the addition occurred is different from the series of games in the immediate-addition notification in that the notification timing is determined ex post as the AT mode progresses, for example, in a game that is about to end, rather than being determined in the game in which the addition occurred. In other words, the notification game can be said to be a game that is set without being triggered by the game in which the addition occurred.

The following describes the overview of the display contents of the auxiliary display unit 65 for the immediate loading notification and later loading notification with reference to Figure 37.

As described above, the immediate add-on notification notifies a portion of the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG in the figure), while the later add-on notification notifies the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. later. If the number of games notified first is the display remaining number counter HG and the number of games notified later is the later add-on counter BG, the number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of games remaining in the advantageous zone ZG) will be equal to the sum of the display remaining number counter HG and the later add-on counter BG. The display remaining number counter HG is decremented by one each time a game is played, and the later add-on counter BG is not decremented unless a later add-on notification occurs, even if a game is played.

As shown in FIG. 37, in this embodiment, when the remaining number of games displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65 (remaining number of games display ZGP) reaches a predetermined number (1) during the AT mode, i.e., when the display remaining number counter HG reaches a predetermined number (1), a later-add notification is generated. The later-add notification notifies the player that the number of games corresponding to the later-add counter BG (150 in the figure) has been added. In this case, the later-add counter BG is decremented by the notification amount (becoming 0 in the figure), and the display remaining number counter HG is updated by adding the notification amount due to the later-add notification, and the remaining number of games display ZGP in the auxiliary display unit 65 also becomes a value corresponding to the display remaining number counter HG (150 after one game has been played in the figure).

In this way, when a bonus is won, if the later bonus notification is selected, a difference may occur between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in favorable zone ZG). On the other hand, if the immediate bonus notification is selected, no difference occurs between the display remaining number counter HG and the actual number of remaining games in AT mode, etc. (number of remaining games in favorable zone ZG).

In step S1008 above, for example, it is determined whether the current add-on will be notified via an immediate add-on notification or a later-add-on notification based on the game result that triggered the current add-on winning and the current later-add-on counter BG. For example, if the game result that triggered the current add-on winning is a result that is unlikely to win the add-on lottery, making the later-add-on notification more likely to be selected can increase the surprise of the later-add-on notification. Also, making the later-add-on notification more likely to be selected the lower the current later-add-on counter BG can suitably increase the opportunities for the later-add-on notification to be made.

After executing the later-addition lottery process in step S1008, it is determined in step S1009 whether or not the later-addition lottery has been won. If the later-addition has not been won and immediate-addition notification has been selected, in step S1010, a process is performed to add the current added-on winning game to the display remaining number counter HG provided in the various counter area 106e, and the current number of added-on games is temporarily stored in a register or the like. Then, in step S1011, a notification timing setting process is executed to set the timing at which the add-on notification will be executed in the current game. The notification timing setting process is a process that sets the timing at which the add-on notification will be executed in the current game.

In one game, the timing of the addition notification is set to differ depending on the number of added games. In this embodiment, the execution timing of the addition notification in the current game is set to be when the first reel is stopped, when the second reel is stopped, and when the third reel is stopped, assuming that the order of the stop operations for each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R is the first reel, the second reel, and the third reel. Also, the timing of the stop ON operation, which is when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed among the stop operations for each reel, and the stop OFF operation, which is when the pressing operation is ended, are set.

Here, we will provide additional explanation on the operation of the stop switches 42-44. The stop switches 42-44 can be moved from an initial position, located at the frontmost side, to an operating position, located at the backmost side. When placed at the initial position, the detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a is in a LOW state, and by operating the stop switches from the initial position to the operating position, the detection signal from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switches from a LOW signal to a HI signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a LOW signal to a HI signal, the main control device 101 understands that a stop ON operation has been performed, which means that the stop switches 42-44 have been pressed.

The stop switches 42-44 are also biased toward their initial positions by springs or the like. Therefore, when the hand is released from the stop switches 42-44 and the operating force (pressing force) applied to the operating positions is no longer applied, the stop switches 42-44 return to their initial positions by the biasing force of the springs or the like. In this case, the detection signals from the stop detection sensors 42a-44a switch from a HI signal to a LOW signal. Then, based on the detection signal switching from a HI signal to a LOW signal, the main control device 101 determines that a stop OFF operation has been performed, which means that the pressing operation of the stop switches 42-44 has ended.

The top-up notification is set to occur when the stop switch 42-44 is operated to stop either when the stop switch is turned on or when the stop switch is turned off. In other words, in a game in which the top-up notification occurs, the top-up effect can occur not only when the stop switch 42-44 is pressed, but also when the pressing operation ends.

In the notification timing setting process of step S1011, the notification timing is set so that an additional notification is more likely to occur when the reels are stopped OFF than when they are stopped ON. In addition, when comparing the first to third reels, the timing is set so that the third reel is most likely to be selected when the third reel is stopped (ON operation, OFF operation), the second reel is next most likely to be selected when the second reel is stopped, and the first reel is least likely to be selected when the first reel is stopped. In relation to the number of additional games, the more the number of additional games is, the more likely it is that the timing of the third reel's stop OFF operation will be selected. In other words, if a player knows in advance that an additional notification will occur, and if an additional notification does not occur by the time the third reel is stopped ON, the player will likely perform the third reel's stop OFF operation in high hopes that a large number of games will be added.

In step S1012, an add-on command containing information on the occurrence of an add-on, the number of games to be added, information on the selection of immediate add-on, and information on the timing of the addition notification in the current game is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the AT add-on processing is terminated. The display control device 81 that has received the add-on command sets the addition notification presentation based on this information.

If it is determined in step S1009 that the later-addition lottery has been won, the process proceeds to step S1013. In step S1013, a process is executed to add the current number of added games to the later-addition counter BG provided in the various counter area 106e. Then, in step S1014, a process is executed to set a later-addition flag in the various flag storage area 106d, and then, in step S1015, an add-on command including information that an add-on has occurred, the number of added games, and information that the later-addition notification has been selected is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and the AT add-on process is terminated.

Return to the explanation of the lottery result response process (FIG. 31). After executing the process of step S707 or step S708, in step S709, it is determined whether the result of this lottery process was a win in the push order role of push order replay or push order bell. If the push order role was a win, in step S710, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT notification flag is a flag that is set at the stage when the transition to the AT mode is permitted to occur after the transition to the AT mode lottery is won (when the number of premonition games becomes 0 and the AT mode winning notification is made). If the AT notification flag is set, in step S711, the push order role process is executed, and then the lottery result response process is terminated. If the push order role is not a win in step S709, or if the AT notification flag is not set in step S710, the lottery result response process is terminated as it is.

＜Outline of the push order announcement＞
Prior to the explanation of the push order role processing, an overview of the notification of the operation order when the push order role is won (push order notification, push order notification performance, order notification, mode notification) will be explained. Notification of the operation order is mainly performed by the auxiliary display unit 65 and the instruction monitor 68.

First, the configuration of the instruction monitor 68 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38(a) is a front view of the instruction monitor 68, and FIG. 38(b) is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the display mode and the display content of the instruction monitor 68.

As shown in FIG. 38(a), the indication monitor 68 has eight display segments N1 to N8. Each display segment N1 to N8 has an individual light source made of an LED, and by controlling the on/off of each of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up any one display segment, or any combination of display segments. This allows the indication monitor 68 to display a specific symbol (including letters and numbers) individually. Note that each of the individual light sources emits light of the same color, so the same color is displayed on each of the display segments N1 to N8.

Regarding each of the display segments N1 to N8 in more detail, the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are all linear display segments, and the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged so that they can at least display the numbers "1" to "6". The eighth display segment N8 is a circular display segment, and is arranged to the side of the lower right part of the area in which the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are arranged. Therefore, the indication monitor 68 can at least display "1" to "6", "1." to "6.", and ".".

In addition, as long as the indication monitor 68 can display multiple patterns of symbols individually, the shape and arrangement of each display segment N1 to N8 can be arbitrary, and a configuration using seven segments instead of eight segments, or nine segments, etc., may be used. In addition, it is not essential that the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 are the same, and the colors displayed in each display segment N1 to N8 can be changed as appropriate. In addition, it is not essential to control the lighting or extinguishing of each display segment N1 to N8 by controlling the on/off of a light source, and as long as the display control can be performed individually for each display segment N1 to N8, a segment display device may be configured with a single backlight and liquid crystal display. Furthermore, instead of applying a segment display to each display area, symbols may be displayed using other types of display devices such as a liquid crystal display device, an organic EL display device, a CRT, and a dot matrix.

The first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 are display segments used to notify the operation sequence of the push order role. For example, as shown in FIG. 38(b), when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "left" → "middle" → "right" to provide a winning mode advantageous to the player, the sixth display segment N6 and the seventh display segment N7 are lit and display "1". Also, when the operation sequence of each stop switch 42-44 is "right" → "left" → "middle" to provide a winning mode advantageous to the player, the first display segment N1, the second display segment N2, the third display segment N3, the fifth display segment N5, and the sixth display segment N6 are lit and display "5". In other words, the numbers (symbols) displayed on each display segment N1 to N7 correspond one-to-one to the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 to stop based on the numbers (symbols) displayed on the display segments N1 to N7, the player can win in an advantageous manner.

The eighth display segment N8 is lit in the game in which the start condition is met, when a predetermined start condition is met, including a notification condition that creates a situation in which a push order notification can occur, such as a transition to a favorable zone, an AT mode winning notification being made, and an AT notification flag being set. It is also turned off when the AT mode ends and there is a transition from the favorable zone to the normal zone.

In other words, an advantageous zone (specific game state, specific mode) is a zone that includes a navigation state (AT mode, high frequency mode) in which the operation sequence of the push order bell and push order replay is more easily notified, making it easier for the player to win in an advantageous manner, a chance state (CZ mode, high probability mode) in which it is easier to win the lottery to transition to the navigation state, or a winning state (winning mode) in which the player has won the lottery to transition to the navigation state or chance state but has not transitioned to the navigation state or chance state. The eighth display segment N8 serves as a zone indicator (specific notification means) that lights up during a specific zone in which the player can benefit from the push order notification in the advantageous zone, and turns off during a normal zone that is not an advantageous zone, and during a non-specific zone that is not an advantageous zone even if it is an advantageous zone.

As already explained, the instruction monitor 68 having the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as the push order indicator and the eighth display segment N8 as the section indicator is disposed near the side of the payout number display unit 62 on the gaming panel 25. In other words, the instruction monitor 68 is disposed above the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. operated by the player, in other words, it is not disposed on the decorative panel, which is the front part of the gaming machine, below the position where the stop switches 42 to 44 etc. are provided. Therefore, the eighth display segment N8 is prevented from being hidden by the hand etc. operating the stop switches 42 to 44 etc., and it can be said that it is disposed in a position where it is easily visible to the player. In addition, since it is disposed near the payout number display unit 62 where the player who is playing the game aiming to win medals can easily focus on it, it can be said that the player is prevented from overlooking it.

Furthermore, the brightness of the corresponding LED is set so that the eighth display segment N8 in the instruction monitor 68 is brighter than the brightness of the surrounding display parts (e.g., the payout number display part 62 and the backlight of the gaming panel 25) (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). Therefore, even if the eighth display segment N8 and the surrounding display parts are both controlled to emit light (when they are in a lit state), the eighth display segment N8 stands out. The illuminance of the corresponding LED is also set so that the eighth display segment N8 has a higher illuminance toward the front of the gaming machine than the surrounding display parts (more specifically, twice as bright as the surrounding display parts). This configuration also improves the visibility of the eighth display segment N8, and prevents the eighth display segment N8 from being overlooked when it is in a lit state.

Next, the push order notification effect on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained using an example in which the push order role is won when the operation order to be notified this time is center → right → left.

As shown in FIG. 39(a), in the auxiliary display unit 65, of the three parallel button displays corresponding to the stop switches 42 to 44, the button display corresponding to the stop switch that should be operated first (the middle button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 in the figure) is marked with the number 1 and displayed larger than the other button displays. In addition, each button display is displayed in a color corresponding to the winning role (yellow for bell, blue for replay, etc.). This allows the player to recognize the winning role in the current game and that the stop switch that should be operated first is the middle stop switch 43. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, the right button display is displayed with the number 2 and the left button display is displayed with the number 3 to indicate that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44 and the last stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

When the player operates the middle stop switch 43, as shown in FIG. 39(b), the center button display corresponding to the middle stop switch 43 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the middle stop switch 43 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the right stop switch 44.

When the player operates the right stop switch 44, as shown in FIG. 39(c), the right button display corresponding to the right stop switch 44 disappears on the auxiliary display unit 65, and the left button display corresponding to the left stop switch 42 is displayed large. This allows the player to confirm that the operation of the right stop switch 44 has been completed, and that the next stop switch to be operated is the left stop switch 42.

To explain the timing of the push order notification, it is set to be executed during the inactive period of the stop switches 42 to 44 from when the rotation of each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts, through the acceleration period, until the reels reach constant speed rotation. By configuring the push order notification to be executed at a timing before the operation of the stop switches 42 to 44 becomes effective in this way, it is possible for the player to recognize the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 and then operate the stop switches 42 to 44 as desired, allowing the game to progress at a good tempo.

<Push order processing>
Next, the push order processing executed in step S711 will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 40.

In step S1101, it is determined whether the current lottery result is one of the first promotion replays 1 to 4. A positive determination in step S1101 occurs when the first replay or the third replay wins based on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, the process proceeds to step S1102, and the push order notification for the third replay is controlled to be performed on the instruction monitor 68 as the push order notification on the main control device 101 side. Specifically, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning among the first replay and the third replay is notified (see FIG. 23(a)). After that, in step S1103, the push order notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, which is the control device on the sub side, and then this push order role processing is terminated. The push order notification command includes information on the current display mode and information on the lottery result. The processing on the display control device 81 side based on receiving the push order notification command will be explained in detail later.

The case where the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay winning is notified in step S1102 is basically assumed to be after the lottery for transition to the AT mode is won, the premonition mode is passed, and the winning notification for the AT mode is made, but before the transition to the AT mode. That is, the lottery table in the second RT state or the third RT state is designed so that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 cannot be won, and the first promotion replays 1 to 4 can only be won in the first RT state. However, even during the AT mode, there are cases where the game state falls from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state due to an incorrect operation, etc., and even in such a case, it is possible to quickly return to the third RT state by winning the first promotion replays 1 to 4.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1101, then in step S1104 it is judged whether the current lottery result is any of Fall Replays 1 to 3. A positive judgment is made in step S1104 when the first replay or the second replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1105, the push order notification for the first replay is controlled to be performed on the instruction monitor 68 as the push order notification on the main control device 101 side. Specifically, of the first replay and the second replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). Thereafter, in step S1106, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then this push order processing is terminated.

In this way, if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won in a situation where the lottery for transition to the AT mode has been won, the operation sequence corresponding to the third replay win is notified, making it possible to transition the game state to the second RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in the above step S710, the push order function processing is not performed, and no push order notification is issued. Therefore, for example, even if the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are won without winning the AT mode in the first RT state, there are cases where the first replay win is achieved and cases where the third replay win is achieved.

In addition, if fall replays 1 to 3 are won while the AT notification flag is set, a notification of the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win is made, making it possible to prevent the game state from transitioning to the first RT state. On the other hand, if a negative judgment is made in step S710 above, no push order notification is made, so that, for example, when the AT mode ends, the AT notification flag is cleared, and the display mode transitions to the normal mode, the second replay win may be established by winning fall replays 1 to 3, and the RT state will transition from the second RT state or the third RT state to the first RT state.

Also, for example, in the first RT state, if the first promotion replays 1-4 are won without winning the AT mode, and the operation sequence happens to correspond to the third replay win and the third replay win is achieved (even if the state transitions to the second RT state), the second replay win may be achieved by winning the fall replays 1-3. Therefore, as described above, even if the state transitions to the second RT state by chance without winning the AT mode, the state will then promptly transition to the first RT state.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1104, in step S1107, it is judged whether the current lottery result is either the second promotion replay 1 or 2. A positive judgment is made in step S1107 when the first replay, the fourth replay, or the fifth replay wins depending on the operation sequence of the current game. In this case, in step S1108, as a push order notification on the main control device 101 side, control is performed so that a push order notification for the fourth replay or the fifth replay is performed on the instruction monitor 68. Specifically, among the first replay, the fourth replay, and the fifth replay, the operation sequence corresponding to the fourth replay winning or the fifth replay winning is notified (see FIG. 23(b)). After that, in step S1109, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1107, in step S1110, it is judged whether the current lottery result is either BAR Replay 1 or 2. BAR Replay 1 and 2 are the winning results in the third RT state, and either the first replay or the sixth to eighth replays will be won depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, BAR Replay 1 and 2 are set as the trigger role for the add-on lottery, and in this embodiment, if an add-on win is made in the AT add-on process, a push order notification is made to establish a seventh replay win, and if an add-on win is not made, a push order notification is made to establish a first replay win, a sixth replay win, or an eighth replay win.

That is, if it is determined in step S1110 that it is BAR Replay 1 or 2, in step S1111, it is determined whether or not the above-mentioned AT addition process has won the addition, and if it has not won, proceed to step S1105 and perform processing for the push order notification for the first replay. If the addition has won, in step S1112, as the push order notification on the main control device 101 side, control is performed so that the push order notification for the seventh replay is performed on the instruction monitor 68. After that, in step S1113, a process is performed to set the push order notification command, and then this push order role processing is terminated. Note that in the AT addition process in this embodiment, the winning probability of the addition lottery is set so that the addition can be won in BAR Replay 1 of BAR Replays 1 and 2, and is set so that the addition cannot be won in BAR Replay 2. Therefore, the case where a positive judgment is made in the above step S1111 is when, of BAR Replay 1 and BAR Replay 2, the BAR Replay 1 is selected and the additional lottery is won. Note that the configuration may be such that the push order notification corresponding to the 6th replay win or the 8th replay win is made in some or all cases where the BAR Replay 1 is selected and the additional lottery is not won, or in some or all cases where the BAR Replay 2 is selected.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1110, in step S1114, it is judged whether the current lottery result is either specific replay 1 or 2. Specific replays 1 and 2 are winning results in the third RT state, and depending on the operation order of stop switches 42 to 44, either the first replay, the eleventh replay, or the twelfth replay will win. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 36, similar to BAR replays 1 and 2, specific replays 1 and 2 are also set as triggers for the additional lottery, and in this embodiment, in the AT mode game number additional lottery triggered by specific replays 1 and 2, first a lottery is held to determine whether the eleventh replay win or the twelfth replay win will be established, and an additional lottery is held depending on the lottery result. In other words, if the 11th replay, which is a cherry replay, is selected, there is a 15% chance of winning an additional prize, and if the 12th replay, which is a watermelon replay, is selected, there is a 20% chance of winning an additional prize (Figure 36).

If it is a specific replay in step S1114, in step S1115, the push order notification for the 11th replay or the 12th replay is controlled to be performed on the instruction monitor 68 as a push order notification on the main control device 101 side corresponding to the replay on the side selected in the above-mentioned additional lottery. After that, in step S1116, a process of setting a push order notification command is performed, and then this push order role processing is terminated.

As mentioned above, when a BAR replay is won, if an additional win has been won, a push order notification for the seventh replay is made, whereas when a specific replay is won, a push order notification for a Cherry replay or Suikari play is made regardless of whether an additional win has been won. Therefore, even if a Cherry replay or Suikari play is won, there are cases where an additional win is not made.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1114, a judgment is made in step S1117 as to whether or not the lottery result of this game is a push order bell win. If a push order bell win is made, the process proceeds to step S1118 to judge whether or not the AT mode flag is set. If a negative judgment is made in step S1117 or step S1118, the push order role processing is terminated. In other words, even if the AT notification flag is set, if the AT mode flag is not set and the preparation state before transition to the AT mode is in progress, no push order notification is made when the push order bell wins. If the AT mode flag is set in step S1118, a push order notification corresponding to the first minor role win is made on the instruction monitor 68 on the main control device 101 side in step S1119, and a push order notification command is set in step S1120, after which the push order role processing is terminated.

<Winning Result Processing>
Next, the winning result response process performed in the winning result response process (step S414) in the reel control process (FIG. 18) will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG.

In step S1201, a game count management process is executed. The game count management process is a process for managing the number of continued games in AT mode, CZ mode, premonition mode, etc.

That is, in the game number management process, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 42, first, in steps S1301 and S1302, the same process as in steps S701 and S702 is performed. That is, in step S1301, a process is performed to grasp the current game state. More specifically, it is grasped whether it is in the RB state or CB state, or in another state (normal game state, each RT state). Then, in step S1302, it is determined whether the number of bets in the current game is a specified number (specific specified number) specified in the state grasped in step S1301. If the determination is affirmative in step S1302, the process for the display mode from step S1303 onwards is performed. On the other hand, if the determination is negative in step S1302, the game number management process is terminated as it is. In this case, the process for the display mode from step S1303 onwards is not performed.

In step S1303, the first RB win flag or the second RB win flag is set, and it is determined whether the current game is in a carryover state before transitioning to the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in a carryover state, in step S1304, the CZ mode flag or the AT mode flag is erased, and this game number management process is terminated. In this case, the CZ mode and AT mode are terminated. However, for the AT mode, after the RB state ends, a push order notification is issued when a push order replay is won, and a prompt transition to the third RT state occurs. Note that in this case, after the RB state ends and the transition to the third RT state occurs, measurement of the number of games in the AT mode is resumed.

If it is determined in step S1303 that the first RB winning flag or the second RB winning flag is not set, it is determined in step S1305 whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is set, the CZ counter is decremented by 1 in step S1306. Then, it is determined in step S1307 whether the CZ counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, the CZ mode flag is cleared in step S1308, and a CZ mode end command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. By clearing the CZ mode flag, the CZ mode ends and the mode transitions to normal mode. In addition, the display control device 81 that has received the CZ mode end command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that an announcement that the CZ mode has ended (for example, a text display such as "Too bad" and a corresponding sound effect) is made.

If a negative judgment is made in either step S1305 or step S1307, or after the processing of step S1308 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1309. In step S1309, it is judged whether or not the premonition flag or the pseudo premonition flag is set. If neither flag is set, the game count management process ends as is. If either flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1310, and a process is executed to decrement the premonition counter or the pseudo premonition counter by 1. That is, in step S1310, if the premonition mode is selected, the premonition counter is decremented by 1, and if the pseudo premonition mode is selected, the pseudo premonition counter is decremented by 1.

After executing the process of step S1310, in step S1311, it is determined whether the premonition flag is set and the premonition counter has become 0. That is, if the number of premonition games becomes 0 in the premonition mode, the process proceeds to step S1312 and the process of clearing the premonition flag is performed. Then, in step S1313, the process of setting the AT notification flag in the various flag storage area 106d is executed. As described above, by setting the AT notification flag, it is possible to transition the RT state to a higher RT state when the push order replay is won, and it is possible to prevent transition to a lower RT state. Incidentally, in the above step S1304, the AT notification flag is not erased even during the AT mode. Therefore, after the RB state ends, a push order notification occurs when the push order replay is won, and it is possible to transition to the third RT state.

After executing the process of step S1313, in step S1314, a process is executed to set the AT mode winning notification command as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode winning notification command controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that an AT mode winning notification effect is performed to indicate that the AT mode transition lottery has been won and transition to the AT mode is now permitted. In the AT mode winning notification effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays "Super lucky!!" and a corresponding sound effect is output from the speaker 64.

If in step S1311 the premonition counter is not 0, or if it is 0 but the pseudo premonition flag is set instead of the premonition flag, the process proceeds to step S1315. In step S1315, it is determined whether the pseudo premonition counter is 0 and the pseudo premonition flag is set. If a positive determination is made in step S1315, a process is executed in step S1316 to clear the pseudo premonition flag, and then the game count management process is terminated. This ends the pseudo premonition mode.

Note that, as described above, if the AT mode transition lottery is won in a game during the first RB state, the premonition flag is not set, so a negative judgment is made in step S1309 and the processing of steps S1312 to S1314 is not performed.

If a negative judgment is made in either step S1309 or step S1315, or after the processing of either step S1314 or step S1316 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1317. In step S1317, it is judged whether the AT mode flag is set. If the AT mode flag is set, in step S1318, a subtraction process is performed on the AT mode continuation counter. Then, in step S1319, it is judged whether the AT mode continuation counter has become 0, and if it has become 0, in step S1320, a process is performed to erase the AT mode flag and the AT notification flag. Then, in step S1321, a process is executed to set an AT end flag in the various flag storage area 106d. The AT end flag is a flag that allows the CPU 102 to know whether a state in which the vehicle is in an advantageous zone and not in AT mode is a state after a transition to AT mode has occurred.

In step S1322, a process is performed to set the AT mode end command as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81, which has received the AT mode end command, controls the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that an AT mode end notification effect is performed (for example, a text display such as "END", a display of the number of medals acquired during the AT mode, a display of the number of games continued in the AT mode, and a corresponding sound effect). If a negative judgment is made in step S1317 or step S1319, or after the process of step S1322 is executed, the game number management process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the winning result response process, after executing the process of step S1201, the process for the later-addition notification is executed in step S1202. The later-addition notification process is a process for making the above-mentioned later-addition notification, and executes an add-on notification (later-addition notification) corresponding to the later-addition counter BG on the condition that the later-addition flag is set based on the display remaining number counter HG reaching a predetermined value (1). Then, a value corresponding to the executed add-on notification is added to the display remaining number counter HG and subtracted from the later-addition counter BG, and the later-addition flag is cleared on the condition that the later-addition counter BG is 0.

In the next step S1203, it is determined whether the current stop result is the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win. As described above, if the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established, the RT state process (FIG. 21) performs processing to transition the game state to the third RT state. In this case, in step S1204, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. When the AT notification flag is not set, it means that the fourth replay win or the fifth replay win is established without the transition condition to the AT mode being established. In this case, the winning result response process is terminated without performing processing for starting the AT mode. When the AT notification flag is set, it is determined in step S1205 whether the current display mode is in the AT mode. Specifically, it is determined whether the AT mode flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As described above, the AT mode flag is a flag for the CPU 102 to specify that the display mode is the AT mode.

If the AT mode flag is set in step S1205, the display mode is already AT mode, so this winning result response process ends. On the other hand, if the AT mode flag is not set, processing to start the AT mode is performed in steps S1206 to S1208.

That is, in step S1206, the AT mode flag is set. In the following step S1207, the AT mode start command is set as an output target to the display control device 81. The display control device 81 that has received the AT mode start command notifies the user that the AT mode will start from the next game by using the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like. Then, in step S1208, the AT mode continuation number is counted. Specifically, the initial value (for example, 50) of the number of continued games in the AT mode is set on the condition that the AT mode continuation counter provided in the various counter areas 106e of the RAM 106 is 0. After the processing of step S1208 is executed, the winning result corresponding processing is terminated. In addition, in step S1208, a case where the AT mode continuation counter is not 0 is, for example, a case where RB is won during the AT mode and the AT mode is resumed after the RB state, and in such a case, the AT mode continuation counter is taken over as it is and measurement is resumed.

As described above, processing for transitioning the display mode is performed separately from the RT state processing (Figure 21) based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to transitioning the gaming state to the third RT state, which is the main state of the AT mode. This is to avoid the AT mode, etc. being started based on the winning of a combination that corresponds to transitioning the gaming state, even if the lottery for transitioning the display mode has not been won.

When transitioning between display modes, among those involving a transition in game state, transitions to a higher mode, i.e., transitions from normal mode to AT mode, are configured to be transitioned based on the winning result of the corresponding role. Therefore, transitions in display mode and transitions in game state are performed as a set in the same game. On the other hand, in the case of transitions to lower modes, for example, when the game state transitions due to the stopping of a second replay winning as a fall replay, transitions in display mode are not performed. When transitioning to such lower modes, the game state is managed by the winning result (RT state processing), while the display mode is managed by the number of games. Therefore, when transitioning to these lower modes, transitions in game state and transitions in display mode may occur in separate games.

<First section display process>
Next, a first section display process and a second section display process will be described as processes related to turning on/off the eighth display segment N8.

The first section display process is a process that is performed in step S316 of the lottery process (Figure 16), and is performed after the lottery result of the game is determined based on the operation of the start lever 41, and a lottery for switching the display mode, etc. (lottery result response process) is performed based on the lottery result.

As shown in FIG. 43, in step S1401, it is determined whether the eighth display segment N8 as a section indicator is being displayed, more specifically, whether the eighth display segment N8 is being lit. As described above, when the eighth display segment N8 is being lit, it indicates when the advantageous section is a specific section in which at least the notification conditions for the push order notification to occur are met. If a negative determination is made in step S1401 and it is determined that the eighth display segment N8 is being turned off, the process proceeds to step S1402.

In step S1402, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, the advantageous zone flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process (FIG. 32) or when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the normal zone in the AT lottery process (FIG. 33). If the advantageous zone flag is set, in step S1403, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set. The advantageous zone winning game flag is a flag that is set when the advantageous zone transition lottery is won in the advantageous zone transition lottery process or when the AT mode transition lottery is won during the normal zone in the AT lottery process (FIG. 33), and is a flag for the CPU 102 to identify that it is the winning game. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, in step S1404, a process is executed to clear the advantageous zone winning game flag. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set in step S1403, proceed to step S1405.

In step S1405, it is determined whether or not counting the number of games in the advantageous zone, more specifically, measurement of the advantageous zone game number AG in the various counter areas 106e, has begun. If measurement of the advantageous zone game number AG has not begun, processing is performed in step S1406 to start measuring the advantageous zone game number AG. The advantageous zone game number AG corresponds to a grasping means for grasping the number of games executed in the advantageous zone, and processing is performed to add one for each game in the advantageous zone.

If it is determined in step S1405 that the measurement has already started, or after the processing of step S1406 is executed, the process proceeds to step S1407. In step S1407, it is determined whether the AT notification flag is set. As already explained, the AT mode winning notification is performed and the AT notification flag is set, so that the push order notification can occur when the push order role is won, and the above notification condition is established. If it is determined in step S1407 that the AT notification flag is set, in step S1408, the display of the section indicator is started by lighting the 8th display segment N8. In addition, when the main control device 101 starts displaying the 8th display segment N8 as the section indicator with the lit state, it outputs a command for sound output to the display control device 81 so that a predetermined sound effect (for example, a mechanical sound such as "Gagot!") is output from the speaker 64. The display control device 81 controls the speaker 64 so that the above-mentioned predetermined sound effect is emitted based on the command for sound output. In addition, when the eighth display segment N8 starts to be displayed, the auxiliary display unit 65 or another display unit may be configured to generate a performance. In this case, a corresponding command may be output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 may be configured to control the auxiliary display unit 65, etc., so that the corresponding performance is generated.

If it is determined in step S1401 that the eighth display segment N8 is being displayed as a section indicator, then in step S1409, processing is executed to continue the display during the favorable section. Specifically, in step S1409, processing is executed to continue the situation in which the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, processing to end the display of the section indicator is not executed in this first section display processing.

If it is determined in step S1402 that the favorable zone flag is not set, if it is a winning game even if the favorable zone flag is set (after the processing of step S1404 is executed), or if it is not a winning game but the situation is not such that a push order notification can occur (if it is determined in step S1407 that the AT notification flag is not set), proceed to step S1410. In step S1410, a process is executed to add 1 to the first role ratio counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The first role ratio counter is a counter for counting the number of games in which a push order notification does not occur, that is, the number of games in the normal zone and the non-specific zone.

After executing the display start process of the section indicator in step S1408, and after executing the display continuation process in step S1409, the process proceeds to step S1411. In step S1411, a process is executed to add 1 to the role ratio second counter provided in the various counter area 106e. The role ratio second counter is a counter for counting the number of games that can generate a push order notification, i.e., the number of games in a specific section.

After executing the processing of step S1410 or step S1411, a role ratio calculation process is executed in step S1412. In this process, the value of the role ratio second counter is divided by the sum of the role ratio first counter and the role ratio second counter (total number of games). In other words, the role ratio calculation process is a process that calculates the proportion of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games. Then, in step S1413, a process is executed to display the calculation result of step S1412 on the role ratio monitor 77.

As shown in FIG. 5, the role ratio monitor 77 has multiple 7-segment display sections consisting of seven display segments. Specifically, the role ratio monitor 77 has a first display section 77a, a second display section 77b, a third display section 77c, a fourth display section 77d, and a fifth display section 77e as 7-segment display sections. The display segments in the first display section 77a to the fifth display section 77e have individual light sources made of LEDs, similar to the display segments N1 to N7 of the instruction monitor 68, and by controlling the on/off of these individual light sources, it is possible to light up only one display segment, and to light up any combination of display segments. As a result, each role ratio monitor 77 is designed to display a specific symbol (including alphabets and numbers), and in particular, the role ratio monitor 77 is capable of displaying five-digit numbers.

In step S1413, the result of the calculation process in step S1412 is output to the role ratio monitor 77, and the display of each display section 77a to 77e on the role ratio monitor 77 is controlled so that a four-digit number is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77. Specifically, a number smaller than 1 and up to four decimal places, such as "0.5012," is displayed on the role ratio monitor 77 as the ratio of the number of games in which a push order notification may occur out of the total number of games. After the process of step S1413 is executed, the first section display process is terminated.

The display of the role ratio monitor 77 may be controlled after rounding off the 5th decimal place in the calculation process of step S1412. In addition, since the first display unit 77a of the role ratio monitor 77 basically displays "0", the first display unit 77a may not be included, or the first display unit 77a may be configured to always display "0" by printing or the like. It is also preferable to display a decimal point between the first display unit 77a and the second display unit 77b by printing or the like.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, the second section display process will be described with reference to the flowchart in Fig. 44. As already described, the second section display process is a process performed in step S415 of the reel control process, and is performed after medals are paid out (payout determination process) and the game state is changed based on the winning result (winning result response process) at the end of one game.

In step S1501, it is determined whether the favorable zone flag is set. If it is not set, the second zone display process is terminated. If the favorable zone flag is set, in step S1502, a process is executed to count the number of games in the favorable zone. Specifically, a process is executed to add 1 to the favorable zone game count AG. After executing the process in step S1502, in step S1503, an update process is executed for the favorable zone increase/decrease number MY provided in the various counter area 106e. The favorable zone increase/decrease number MY is a counter that allows the CPU 102 to grasp the increase/decrease number of medals in the favorable zone (the difference between the number of medals bet and the number of medals paid out in each game in the favorable zone), and in step S1503, the increase/decrease number of medals in the current game (the number of medals paid out in the current game - the number of medals bet in the current game) is grasped based on the winning result of the current game (the winning result corresponding process and payout determination process immediately before), and the process is executed to add the increase/decrease number of medals to the favorable zone increase/decrease number MY.

Specifically, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 45, in the MY update process of step S1503, in step S1601, it is determined whether the result of the current game is any of the replay wins. If it is any of the replay wins, the MY increase/decrease in the advantageous zone number of coins MY is not updated, and the MY update process ends as is. If it is not any of the replay wins, proceed to step S1602.

In step S1602, a process is executed to subtract the number of inserted coins (number of bets) from the number of coins paid out based on the game results of the current game. Step S1602 is a process for grasping the number of coins increased or decreased by subtracting the number of coins used in the game from the number of coins won. For example, if the first small win is achieved in a three-bet game, three coins are bet and nine coins are paid out, resulting in a net increase of six coins. Also, if the second small win is achieved in a three-bet game, three coins are bet and three coins are paid out, resulting in a net increase (decrease) of zero coins. And if no small win is achieved in a three-bet game, three coins are bet and zero coins are paid out (no coins are paid out), resulting in a net decrease of three coins.

In the next step S1603, the calculation result of step S1602 is added to the number of medals in the favorable zone MY. For example, if the calculation result of step S1602 is that an increase of 6 medals has occurred, a process of adding 6 to the number of medals in the favorable zone MY is executed, and if the calculation result of step S1602 is that a decrease of 3 medals has occurred, a process of subtracting 3 from the number of medals in the favorable zone MY is executed. Then, in step S1604, it is determined whether the number of medals in the favorable zone MY is 0 or more, and if the number of medals in the favorable zone MY is less than 0 and there is no increase in medals in the favorable zone but there is a decrease in medals, in step S1605, the number of medals in the favorable zone MY is cleared to 0, and the MY update process is terminated. If the number of medals in the favorable zone MY is 0 or more and there is an increase in medals in the favorable zone, the MY update process is terminated.

In the second section display process, after executing the MY update process in step S1503, the remaining number of games management process is executed in step S1504, and the remaining number management process is executed in the following step S1505. The remaining number of games management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous section is in a situation where the current remaining number of games will reach the upper limit number of games (1500 games) based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode. In the remaining number of games management process, for example, the remaining number of games in the AT mode is 100 games, and the advantageous section game number AG is 1450, etc., even if the AT mode is continued, it is grasped whether or not the upper limit number of games in the advantageous section will be reached before the end condition of the AT mode (remaining number of games in the AT mode = 0). If it is in such a situation, the first excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation. The remaining number management process is a process for managing whether or not the advantageous zone will reach the upper limit increase (2400) with the current remaining number of games based on the remaining number of games in the AT mode. In the remaining number management process, for example, if the remaining number of games in the AT mode is 100 games and the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY is 2300, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone upper limit increase is likely to be reached before the AT mode termination condition (remaining number of games in the AT mode = 0) even if the AT mode is continued. In this case, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone upper limit increase is likely to be reached based on the expected increase/decrease number of medals per game in the AT mode, the remaining number of games in the AT mode, and the current advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY. If such a situation exists, a second excess flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d as a flag for identifying the situation.

By setting the first excess flag and the second excess flag, any further AT mode additions will not be performed (will be limited), and if the addition lottery is won, a bonus different from the number of games added (such as a suggestion of a set value or the display of a rare image) will be given. This makes it possible to avoid meaningless additions being performed in situations where there is a high possibility that the upper limit number of games or the upper limit increase number will already be reached due to a large number of games remaining, and makes it possible to enjoy playing even in the above-mentioned situations.

After executing the processing of step S1505, in step S1506, it is determined whether the number of games in the advantageous zone AG has reached the upper limit of 1500, or whether the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous zone coins MY has reached the upper limit of increases of 2400 or more. If either of these forced termination conditions is met, in step S1507, the number of games in the advantageous zone AG and the number of increases or decreases in the advantageous zone coins MY are cleared to 0. In the following step S1508, a process is performed to end the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator. Then, in step S1509, a process is performed to initialize parameters and information such as various flags and counters in the advantageous zone, and then this second zone display process is terminated.

More specifically, the data initialization process of step S1509 is a process for resetting flags and counters that were set when moving to the current favorable zone, and flags and counters that were set during the current favorable zone, to their initial values. For example, if a premonition flag, pseudo premonition flag, CZ mode flag, AT mode win flag, AT notification flag, AT mode flag, etc. are set, these flags are cleared. Furthermore, if counters for the number of games continued in premonition mode, AT mode, etc. are greater than 0, these counters are all reset to 0. In other words, the initialization process initializes all variables or parameters that affect the performance of the push order notification with respect to the favorable zone as an advantageous state using the push order notification, and is a process for clearing the RAM for such variables or parameters.

If it is determined in step S1506 that the number of games in the favorable zone AG has not reached the upper limit, or that the number of increases or decreases in the favorable zone MY has not reached the upper limit increase, the process proceeds to step S1510, where it is determined whether the normal end condition of the favorable zone has been met. More specifically, it is determined whether the CZ mode flag, the AT mode winning flag, and the AT mode flag are all set, and whether the remaining number of continued games in the AT mode, etc., has become 0. If none of these flags are set, it is determined in step S1511 whether the AT end flag is set. The AT end flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode ends. If the AT end flag is set, the process proceeds to step S1507, and the process for the end of the favorable zone in steps S1507 to S1509 is performed, and the second section display process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1510 or step S1511, the second section display process is terminated as it is. In this case, the section indicator (eighth display segment N8) will continue to be lit. In other words, the advantageous zone does not end not only during AT mode, but also after transition to the advantageous zone, when there is no transition to AT mode; after transition to the advantageous zone, the advantageous zone ends when the mode transitions to AT mode and the AT mode ends.

<About the push order indicator and section indicator displays and game progress>
The relationship between the start and end of the advantageous zone and the display of the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator will be explained with reference to Figure 46.

As shown in FIG. 46, in the slot machine 10, in the normal zone, which is not an advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is turned off (not lit). In this normal zone, push order notification is not performed. In other words, in contrast to the advantageous zone, which has the performance related to the instruction function such as push order notification, the normal zone can be said to be a zone that does not have such instruction function. The situation in which the display mode is in the normal mode mainly corresponds to the normal zone.

In the normal zone, for example, if the player wins the lottery for moving to the favorable zone by winning a weak watermelon role, the measurement of the number of games played in the favorable zone (counting the number of games in the favorable zone AG) will start from the game following the game in which the game result that triggered the winning is realized. Then, if the player wins the lottery for moving to the AT mode during the favorable zone and a winning notification and AT notification flag are set, etc., a push order notification can occur, and the eighth display segment N8 will light up, as this indicates that the conditions for starting the display of the zone indicator are met.

After that, while the eighth display segment N8 is lit, a push order notification is generated using the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7. In this case, the push order information ("1" to "6") is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 as described above, and the player can understand the push order based on the push order information. In the push order notification, the push order information starts to be displayed when the start lever 41 is operated in the game, and ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed in the game. If the game is not the final game of the advantageous zone, only the display of the push order information by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 ends when the third reel stop ON operation is performed, and the display of the advantageous zone by the eighth display segment N8 continues. Then, if a push order role is won again in the next game or later, the push order information corresponding to that push order role is displayed by the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7.

When the number of continuing games in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit, or the number of medal increases in the advantageous zone reaches the upper limit increase number, and it becomes the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 also goes out and the notification of the advantageous zone ends. In this embodiment, in the final game of the advantageous zone, the eighth display segment N8 goes out at the timing when medal payout ends (by the second zone display process, which is the process after the payout determination process). Note that if medal payout is not performed in the final game, the eighth display segment N8 goes out when the third reel stop OFF operation is performed. This allows the player to clearly understand that the game in question was the final game of the advantageous zone.

As described above, the number of games in the advantageous zone is counted from the game following the game that won the lottery to move to the advantageous zone, while the push order notification only occurs during the period when the eighth display segment N8 is lit. In other words, even in an advantageous zone, in a zone where the eighth display segment N8 is off (non-specific zone), the push order notification does not occur. In other words, by checking whether the eighth display segment N8 as a zone indicator is lit or not, it is possible to clearly grasp that at least the advantageous zone is a situation where the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed (specific zone, actual increase zone). In this way, it is possible to prevent a difference in the degree of advantage between a player who ends the game without knowing that the benefit of the push order notification can be enjoyed and a successor player who sits down after him. In other words, in a situation where the eighth display segment N8 is not lit, the push order notification does not occur, so it is possible to end the game with dignity.

<Processing related to notification performance on the sub side>
Next, various notification processes performed by the sub-side display control device 81 will be described. As various notification processes, a performance setting process executed at a predetermined cycle (1.49 msec cycle) is provided. The performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In the performance setting process, first in step S1701, it is determined whether or not a new command has been received from the main control device 101. If a new command has been received, in step S1702, a process is executed to store the received command in RAM 183. A command storage area is provided in RAM 183, and this command storage area is configured as a ring buffer that can store multiple commands individually and can read out previously stored commands.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1701, or after the process of step S1702 is executed, in step S1703, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a betting command. A betting command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on a betting operation being performed, and includes a betting command set in step S207 of normal processing. If it is a betting command, in step S1704, a betting performance setting process is executed. In the betting performance setting process, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display unit 65 and the speaker 64 so that a performance based on the current betting operation is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1703, or after the processing of step S1704 has been executed, in step S1705, it is judged whether or not the newly received command was a start command. A start command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the operation of the start lever 41, and includes the lottery result command set in step S313 of the lottery processing, as well as a premonition command, an added command, a push order notification command, a specific push order notification command, and the like, which are set in the lottery result response processing. If it is one of these start commands, in step S1706, a start performance setting process is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1705, or after the processing of step S1706 is executed, in step S1707, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is a command at the time of each stop operation. Each stop operation command is a command output from the main control device 101 based on the stop operation of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R, and is a stop command command set in step S405 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18). If the stop command is a stop command at each stop operation, in step S1708, a process for setting the performance at each stop operation is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1707, or after the processing of step S1708 is executed, in step S1709, it is judged whether or not the newly received command is an all stop command. An all stop command is a command output from the main control device 101 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R have stopped, and includes the winning result command set in step S411 of the reel control processing (FIG. 18), as well as the AT mode start command and AT mode end command set in the winning result corresponding processing. If it is one of these all stop commands, in step S1710, the all stop performance setting processing is executed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1709, or after the processing of step S1710 has been executed, other processing is executed in step S1711, and then the effect setting processing is terminated. In step S1711, settings are made for effects based on commands from the main control device 101 other than when a bet is made, when the game is started, or when the game is stopped (for example, effects based on the operation of the settlement switch 59), effects based on signals from sensors connected without going through the main control device 101 (such as an effect switch detection sensor), settings for error notification, etc.

The following describes the process for setting the effects at start, at each stop operation, and when all stops.

<Start-time performance setting process>
Next, the start-time performance setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S1801, a display mode setting process is performed. In this process, it is determined whether the display mode currently set on the main control device 101 side is normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode, or RB mode, and the display effect of the auxiliary display unit 65 is set to the corresponding display mode. Specifically, the various flag storage area 183a of the RAM 183 on the display control device 81 side also has an area for setting a CZ mode flag, an AT mode flag, and an RB state mode flag as flags for grasping the display mode, and the corresponding flag is set when each mode starts and cleared when it ends. In step S1801, by grasping these various mode corresponding flags, the current display mode is identified, and the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, upper lamp 63, etc. are controlled so that the corresponding effect is performed.

In the next step S1802, the process for the reserved shift is executed. The process for the reserved shift is a process for displaying the reserved information related to the AT mode transition lottery, and this process will be described in detail later.

In step S1803, it is determined whether the lottery result of the game to be started this time is a push order role win based on the received lottery result command. If the push order role wins, in step S1804, a push order notification process is performed. Here, the push order notification process is explained with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 49.

In step S1901, it is determined whether the currently received start command includes a push order notification command. If the push order notification command is not included, the push order notification process ends. If the push order notification command is included, the process proceeds to step S1902.

In step S1902, it is determined whether the current lottery result is the first promotion replay 1 to 4. If it is the first promotion replay 1 to 4, in step S1903, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect that results in the third replay winning, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1902 that the first promotion replays 1 to 4 are not the winning combination, then in step S1904 it is determined whether the current lottery result is fall replays 1 to 3. If it is fall replays 1 to 3, the process proceeds to step S1905, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect that results in the first replay winning combination, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1904 that the replay is not one of fall replays 1 to 3, then in step S1906 it is determined whether the current lottery result is second promotion replays 1 and 2. If it is second promotion replays 1 and 2, then in step S1907 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect that results in the fourth and fifth replay wins, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1706 that the result is not the second promotion replay 1 or 2, then in step S1708 it is determined whether the current lottery result is BAR replay 1 or 2. If it is BAR replay 1 or 2, then in step S1709 it is determined whether an add-on command has been received as the current start command. In other words, it is determined whether the add-on lottery was won when BAR replay 1 or 2 was won. If an add-on command has not been received, then the process proceeds to step S1905, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect that results in the first replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1909 that an add-on command has been received, the process proceeds to step S1910, where the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect that will result in the seventh replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1908 that the result is not BAR Replay 1 or 2, then in step S1911 it is determined whether the current lottery result is Specific Replay 1 or 2. If it is Specific Replay 1 or 2, then in step S1712 it is determined whether a push order notification corresponding to Cherry Replay (11th replay) is performed. In other words, if Cherry Replay is selected in the additional lottery when Specific Replay 1 or 2 is won, then in step S1913 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification performance that results in an 11th replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1912 that the operation sequence to be notified this time does not correspond to an 11th replay win, which is a cherry replay, but corresponds to a 12th replay win, which is a sweet replay, then in step S1914, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect that will result in a 12th replay win, and then the push order notification process is terminated.

If it is determined in step S1911 that the replay is not specific replay 1 or 2, then in step S1915 it is determined whether the current lottery result is a push order bell. If it is a push order bell, then in step S1916 the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled to perform a push order notification effect in which the first minor prize, which results in a payout of 9 coins, is achieved, and then the push order notification process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S1915, then the push order notification process is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time performance setting process (FIG. 48), if it is determined in step S1803 that the push sequence role has not been won, in step S1805, it is determined whether or not the transition trigger role has been won. The transition trigger role is, for example, a result called a rare role with a low probability of winning, such as strong cherries, weak cherries, strong watermelons, weak watermelons, strong cherry overlaps 1 and 2, and weak cherry overlaps 1 and 2, and is a general term for results that are expected to transition to AT mode or bonus state. If the transition trigger role has been won, processing for notifying the transition trigger role is performed in step S1806. In the transition trigger role notification processing, processing is performed to control the auxiliary display unit 65, speaker 64, etc. so that a chance suggestion performance is performed as a performance suggesting that there is a high possibility of some advantageous event occurring based on the winning of the transition trigger role, or processing is performed so that continuous performances are performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S1805, or after the processing of step S1804 or step S1806 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S1807. In step S1807, it is judged whether or not an add-on command has been received as the current start command. If an add-on command has been received, in step S1808, a process is performed to set up the add-on effect in advance so that the add-on effect for the number of games corresponding to the add-on command is executed when the game is stopped. As an example of the add-on effect, as shown in Figures 53(a) to 53(c), a number corresponding to the number of games to be added is displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the add-on effect, the corresponding sound effect (for example, the electronic sound "Kyukyukyukyukyueen!") is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

The details of the setting process for the additional effects in step S1808 will be explained with reference to the flowchart in Figure 50.

In step S2001, a process is performed to determine the number of added games to be notified based on the currently received added command. In the following step S2002, a process is performed to determine the timing of the notification. The timing of the notification is the timing at which the added performance is executed, and this timing is determined by the processing on the main control device 101 side described above, and information on the determined timing is set in the added command and output. Therefore, the display control device 81 side can determine the timing at which the added performance should be executed by reading the added command. The timing of the notification is set to the game at which the added performance should be executed and the timing corresponding to the stop operation of each of the stop switches 42 to 44.

After the notification timing is grasped in step S2002, in step S2003, it is determined whether or not the result of the determination in step S2002 is that an additional effect will be performed in the current game. When an additional effect will not be performed in the current game, it is determined in step S2003 that a later addition notification is selected, and in this case, the setting process for the additional effect is terminated. When an additional effect will be performed in the current game, in step S2004, it is determined whether or not the timing for executing the additional effect in the current game was when any of the reels stopped ON. When it was when the reels stopped ON, in step S2005, the target reel for generating the additional effect is set, and the setting is made so that the additional effect will occur when the target reel is stopped ON. Specifically, a process is performed to set one of the flags for when the first reel is stopped ON to the flag for when the third reel is stopped ON in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are flags for the CPU 181 to grasp the timing for the additional effect to occur. In step S2705, the CPU 181 reads the performance data of the additional performance corresponding to the number of additional games to be generated when the stop ON operation is performed from the performance data storage area 182b, and temporarily stores the data in a predetermined performance data setting area. When the CPU 181 determines that an additional performance will be generated at a timing corresponding to the stop ON operation flag, the CPU 181 reads the performance data temporarily stored in the performance data setting area, and performs the additional performance.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2004, in step S2006, it is judged whether or not the first or second reel was stopped and turned OFF. If these reels were stopped and turned OFF, in step S2007, a target reel for generating an additional effect is set, and the additional effect is set to occur when the target reel is stopped and turned OFF. Specifically, a process is performed to set either a flag for when the first reel is stopped and OFF or a flag for when the second reel is stopped and turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. These flags are also flags that allow the CPU 181 to grasp the timing of the additional effect occurrence. Also in step S2007, the effect data for the additional effect corresponding to the number of games for the additional effect is read from the effect data storage area 182b, and the data is temporarily stored in a predetermined effect data setting area.

If a negative judgment is made in step S2006, in step S2008, the current additional effect is set to occur when all reels are stopped (when the third reel is turned OFF). Specifically, a process is performed to set a flag when the third reel is turned OFF in the various flag storage area 183a. Also in step S2008, a temporary storage process is performed for the effect data of the additional effect corresponding to the number of additional games. After the process of step S2005, step S2007, or step S2008 is executed, the process of setting the additional effect is terminated.

Returning to the explanation of the start-time performance setting process, if the top-up command is not received in step S1807 or after the process of step S1808 is executed, the bonus performance setting process is executed in step S1809, the continuous performance setting process is executed in step S1810, and then in step S1811, other start-time performances are set, and the start-time performance setting process is terminated. The bonus performance setting process is a process for performing the bonus performance during the first RB state or the second RB state on the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. In the bonus performance, for example, the content of each performance is set to be different so that the player can distinguish between the first RB state and the second RB state. In addition, it is set so that a performance according to the lottery result in the first RB state or the second RB state is performed. In addition, the continuous performance setting process is a process for performing a continuous performance in which a series of performances is set across multiple games. In the process of step S1811, for example, a presentation suggesting the lottery result is set in response to the start of the game, and the lamp around the start lever 41 is turned off to notify that the operation has been accepted.

<Performance setting process for each stop operation>
Next, the process of setting the effects to be performed at each stop operation, which is performed in step S1708, will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

In step S2101, it is determined whether each stop operation command received this time is a stop ON operation command. A stop ON operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the stop switch 42 to 44 is pressed during the stop operation of each reel.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2101, the process proceeds to step S2802, where it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reel is turned on for stop is set as the effect for this game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If it is set, in step S2103, it is determined whether or not the stop ON operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop ON operation. If it is not a stop ON operation for the target reel, this setting process is terminated. If it is a stop ON operation for the target reel, in step S2104, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. are controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop ON operation is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional performance is set as the performance at the time of the current stop ON operation, as shown in FIG. 53(a), an additional performance occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65 at the timing when the stop switches 42 to 44 are pressed (ON operation). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is also emitted from the speaker 64.

Also, for example, if the current game is a push order role win and the push order notification effect is set, the push order notification effect will change to an effect indicating the reel to be operated next by stopping the corresponding reel based on each stop ON operation. Specifically, if all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the first reel to be operated as shown in FIG. 39(a) is displayed. Then, when the corresponding reel (middle reel 32M in the figure) stops due to the stop ON operation corresponding to the first reel, the effect changes to an effect indicating the next reel to be operated (right reel 32R in the figure) as shown in FIG. 39(b). Also, if two reels are spinning before the stop ON operation effect, a display indicating the second reel to be stopped as shown in FIG. 39(b) is displayed, and based on the second reel stopping due to the stop ON operation, the display changes to an effect indicating the third reel to be stopped (FIG. 39(c)).

If the determination in step S2101 is negative, the process proceeds to step S2105, where it is determined whether the stop operation command received this time is a stop OFF operation command. A stop OFF operation command is a command that is output from the main control device 101 when the pressing operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, which is one of the stop operations for each reel, is completed. If the command is not a stop OFF command, the process ends.

If a positive judgment is made in step S2105, the process proceeds to step S2106, where it is determined whether or not an effect that occurs when the reel is stopped and turned OFF is set as the effect for this game. If it is not set, this setting process is terminated. If it is set, in step S2107, it is determined whether or not the stop OFF operation command received this time is a stop operation for the reel that is the target of the effect that is set for the stop OFF operation. If it is not a stop OFF operation for the target reel, this setting process is terminated. If it is a stop OFF operation for the target reel, in step S2108, the auxiliary display unit 65, etc. is controlled so that an effect is performed when the stop OFF operation is performed, and then this setting process is terminated.

For example, if an additional effect is set as the effect at the time of the current stop OFF operation, as shown in FIG. 53(b), when the pressing operation of the stop switch 42 to 44 is finished and the hand is released from the stop switch 42 to 44, an additional effect occurs on the auxiliary display unit 65. In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional effect is emitted from the speaker 64. If a negative judgment is made in step S2105, this effect setting process ends.

<Performance setting process when all stops>
Next, the complete stop effect setting process will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG.

First, in step S2201, it is determined whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode start command. If an AT mode start command is included, in step S2202, processing is performed to set the AT mode start effect. In the AT mode start effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the text "AT Start!". In addition, in the AT mode start effect, control is performed so that a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "Here we go!") is emitted from the speaker 64.

If the AT mode start command is not included in step S2201, it is determined in step S2203 whether the currently received stop command includes an AT mode end command. If the AT mode end command is included, processing is performed in step S2204 to set the AT mode end effect. In the AT mode end effect, for example, the auxiliary display unit 65 displays the words "AT END", displays the number of games to be continued in the current AT mode, and displays the total number of coins paid out in the current AT mode. In addition, in the AT mode end effect, the speaker 64 is controlled to emit a corresponding sound effect (for example, a high-pitched female voice saying "See you later").

After executing either step S2202 or step S2204, or after a negative judgment is made in step S2203, the process proceeds to step S2205. In step S2205, if an additional performance is set, the auxiliary display unit 65 and the like are controlled to execute the additional performance. As already explained, the setting of the additional performance is performed in step S1807 in the start-time performance setting process. Specifically, if the timing of the occurrence of the current additional performance is set to when all reels stop in the setting process of the additional performance (FIG. 50), the additional performance is generated on the auxiliary display unit 65 when all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R stop, as shown in FIG. 53(c). In this case, a sound effect corresponding to the additional performance is also emitted from the speaker 64.

After that, in step S2206, the process for displaying pending information is executed. The process for displaying pending information related to the AT mode transition lottery is described in detail later. After the process of step S2206 is executed, in step S2207, other stop time effects are set, and then this effect setting process is terminated. In step S2207, for example, the upper lamp 63 is controlled to light up in a color corresponding to the winning combination, a sound effect corresponding to the payout amount of the winning combination is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64, and a sound effect corresponding to the automatic bet during replay is controlled to be emitted from the speaker 64.

As described above, in this slot machine 10, the main control device 101 performs a lottery process based on the insertion of medals as game media and the start operation of the start lever 41, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R starts to rotate, and each reel 32L, 32M, 32R stops based on the stop operation of the stop switches 42 to 44. If the combination of symbols that stops on the active line corresponds to the result of the lottery process, the corresponding bonus is awarded. In this configuration, multiple RT states with different probabilities of becoming a replay as a result of the lottery process are provided, and the RT state transition occurs when the corresponding promotion replay or fall replay is won. Whether or not the corresponding replay will be won is determined by the result of the win/lose lottery, as well as the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, and the notification of the operation sequence is performed by winning the transition lottery to the advantageous zone, which is performed according to the result of the lottery process, and transitioning to the advantageous zone, and further winning the transition lottery to the AT mode included in the advantageous zone and transitioning to the AT mode. The result of the lottery process is a push order bell, and depending on the operation order of the stop switches 42 to 44, it is possible to achieve this push order bell winning and win medals. Then, by transitioning to the AT mode and transitioning to the third RT state, which is an RT state in which the replay probability is improved, in that RT state, it is possible to achieve the push order bell winning in a state in which the replay probability is improved, and it is possible to win a large number of medals.

As already explained, when switching to AT mode, an initial number of games (50) is set, and it becomes possible to play in AT mode for that initial number of games. If an additional lottery is won in AT mode, the number of continuing games in AT mode is increased, and the number of games that can be played in AT mode increases. As a result, the number of medals that can be won in the AT mode can also increase.

When the number of remaining games in AT mode becomes 0 and the number of remaining games in other display modes in the favorable zone is also 0, or when the conditions for forcibly terminating the favorable zone (1500 games played or an increase of 2400 coins) are met, the end process of the favorable zone (AT mode) is performed in the second zone display process. As already explained, in the end process of the favorable zone, initialization process is performed for various parameters (various information) in the favorable zone, so that information in the favorable zone is not carried over after the end of the favorable zone, and the favorable zone and the normal zone can be clearly distinguished.

<About the AT mode transition lottery>
The manner in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the slot machine 10 will be described below.

As already explained, the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the AT lottery process in the lottery result response process. The AT mode transition lottery is performed based on the lottery result of the lottery process in the game in which the transition lottery is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "lottery result of the game" or simply the "lottery result"), the AT mode transition lottery table, and a random number for the lottery (counter value). The lottery result of each game is the result of the lottery process performed based on the start operation of each game (operation of the start lever 41), and the AT mode transition lottery table is stored in advance in the various table storage area 105a of the ROM 105. In contrast, the random number for the lottery is configured to be obtained in advance in a game prior to the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

Figure 54 is a flowchart showing the random number acquisition process, which is a process for pre-obtaining a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. The random number acquisition process is a process performed in step S416 in the reel control process (Figure 18), and is performed after the stop operation of all reels 32L, 32M, and 32R has been performed. In other words, it is performed based on the third stop OFF operation in the third stop operation among the stop operations of each of the reels 32L, 32M, and 32R.

In step S2301, a process is executed to obtain an AT counter C provided in the various counter area 106e of the RAM 106. The AT counter C corresponds to a random number used in the AT mode transition lottery. The AT counter C is a loop counter that is incremented by one within the range of 0 to 999 and returns to the initial value (i.e., 0) after reaching a maximum value (i.e., 999). The AT counter C is updated periodically and, for example, is incremented by one each time a timer interrupt process is started.

In addition, like the free-running counter and hardware circuit used to determine whether a hand is successful, a dedicated free-running counter and hardware circuit may be used, and the hardware circuit may latch the value of the free-running counter before the processing of step S2301 (for example, when the third stop OFF operation is performed), and the latched value may be read in step S2301. Also, the latched value may be temporarily stored in a specified area of RAM 106 until the processing of step S2301 is performed.

In step S2302, a process is executed to store the value of the AT counter C acquired in step S2301 in the lottery information storage area 106f of the RAM 106. As shown in FIG. 55, the lottery information storage area 106f includes a storage area RE and an execution area AE. The storage area RE is made up of multiple storage areas, including a first storage area RE1 to a fifth storage area RE5.

When the conditions for acquiring the AT counter C are met, the AT counter C is stored in chronological order in the first memory area RE1 to the fifth memory area RE5 in the order of the first memory area RE1 → the second memory area RE2 → the third memory area RE3, etc. And, by having five memory areas as the multiple memory areas, up to five random numbers for the lottery used in the AT mode transition lottery can be stored.

In step S2302, the value of AT counter C acquired in step S2301 is stored in the area with the smallest number (lowest area) among the free areas in the first memory area RE1 to the fifth memory area RE5. For example, if the value of AT counter C is stored in each of the first memory area RE1 to the fourth memory area RE4 and the fifth memory area RE5 is a free area, in step S2302, the value of AT counter C acquired in step S2301 is stored in the fifth memory area RE5.

Note that the configuration is not limited to storing the value of the AT counter C as is, but may store information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C, and may, for example, convert the value of the AT counter C into a value for AT mode lottery before storing it.

In step S2303, it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is a game in the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in either RB state, in step S2304, the AT command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number acquisition process is terminated. The AT command contains information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored this time, as well as information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the memory areas RE1 to RE5. Therefore, by receiving the AT command, the display control device 81 can grasp the information of each of the memory areas RE1 to RE5 in the lottery information memory area 106f.

If it is determined in step S2303 that the game is not in the RB state, the random number acquisition process ends without outputting an AT command. Therefore, in games other than the RB state, the AT counter C is acquired, but the AT command is not output.

The random number acquisition process is started regardless of the lottery results, game status, display mode, etc. of each game, and the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the lottery results, game status, display mode, etc. of each game. In other words, the AT counter C is acquired independently of the lottery results, game status, display mode, etc. of the game at the time of acquisition.

Next, the random number shift process, which sequentially shifts the random numbers for the AT mode lottery stored in each of the storage areas RE1 to RE5 of the lottery information storage area 106f, will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 56. The random number shift process is performed in step S703 in the lottery result response process (FIG. 31).

In step S2401, among the memory areas RE1 to RE5, the random number information for the lottery stored in the first memory area RE1 (information corresponding to the AT counter C) is shifted to the execution area AE, and the random number information stored in the first memory area RE1 is cleared. The execution area AE is an area for storing random number information used in the AT mode transition lottery when an AT mode transition lottery is held in the current game. Then, in the process of acquiring random numbers for the lottery in step S909 during the AT mode transition lottery in the AT lottery process (FIG. 33), the information corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is acquired as the random number information to be used in the current AT mode transition lottery. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery is held based on the information shifted to the execution area AE from the AT counter C information previously acquired.

In the next step S2402, the information stored in each of the memory areas RE2 to RE5 is shifted to the lower area. Specifically, the information stored in the second memory area RE2 is stored in the first memory area RE1, and the information stored in the second memory area RE2 is cleared. The information in each area is shifted in order from the third memory area RE3 to the second memory area RE2, the fourth memory area RE4 to the third memory area RE3, and the fifth memory area RE5 to the fourth memory area RE4. In this case, only information is shifted from the fifth memory area RE5 to the fourth memory area RE4, and no new information is shifted. In other words, the information in the fifth memory area RE5 is cleared, and the fifth memory area RE5 becomes an empty area.

In the next step S2403, it is determined whether the game to be ended is a game in the first RB state or the second RB state. If it is in either RB state, in step S2404, a process is executed to set the shift time command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is terminated. If it is not in either RB state in step S2403, the random number shift process is terminated as it is.

<AT mode transition lottery table>
As described above, the AT mode transition lottery uses the information of the AT counter C acquired in advance based on the third stop OFF operation of each game. The AT mode transition lottery uses the information of the random number for the lottery as the AT counter C, as well as the lottery results of each game and the AT mode transition lottery table. Hereinafter, the relationship between the value of the AT counter C and the lottery results of each game will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

In the AT mode transition lottery table, the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is associated with the lottery result of each game. Specifically, for example, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, if the lottery result of the game is a strong cherry, the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "0" to "14", and if the lottery result of the game is a weak cherry, the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "0" to "3". Also, if the lottery result of the game is a strong watermelon, the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "500" to "529", and if the lottery result of the game is a weak watermelon, the AT counter C value that wins the AT mode transition lottery is "500" to "514".

In other words, for example, if a "3" is obtained as the AT counter C and an AT mode transition lottery is held in a game in which the AT counter C is stored in the execution area AE, and the lottery result of the game is a strong cherry or a weak cherry, the AT mode transition lottery will be won. On the other hand, even if an AT mode transition lottery is held in a game in which a "3" is obtained as the AT counter C and stored in the execution area AE, if the lottery result of the game is a strong watermelon or a weak watermelon, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

Figure 58 shows whether or not the AT mode transition lottery will be won based on the value of the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f and the lottery results of each game.

For example, in FIG. 58(a), random number shift processing is performed at the start of the game, and "751" is shifted as AT counter C to the execution area AE of the lottery information storage area 106f, "600" is shifted to the first memory area RE1, "324" to the second memory area RE2, "40" to the third memory area RE3, and "99" to the fourth memory area RE4. Note that by performing the random number shift processing as described above, the random number in the fifth memory area RE5 is cleared. If the lottery result of the game is a normal replay, the "751" stored in the execution area AE as the AT counter C is not associated with a normal replay (FIG. 57), so the AT mode transition lottery for this game will not be won.

Figure 58(b) shows the start of the game following Figure 58(a), with the AT counter C value in each memory area shown in Figure 58(a) shifted one by one to the lower area. Also, in Figure 58(b), at the end of the game in Figure 58(a) (when the third stop OFF operation is performed), a new AT counter C is obtained, and after that AT counter C is stored in the fifth memory area RE5, it is shifted to the fourth memory area RE4 by the shift at the start of the game in Figure 58(b).

If the lottery result of the game in Figure 58 (b) is a weak cherry, the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE is "600" which is not associated with a weak cherry (Figure 57), so the AT mode transition lottery for this game will not be won.

Figure 58(c) shows the start of the game following Figure 58(b), with the AT counter C values in each memory area shown in Figure 58(b) further shifted to the lower area one by one. Also in Figure 58(c), a new AT counter C is obtained at the end of the game in Figure 58(b) (when the third stop OFF operation is performed), and after that AT counter C is stored in the fifth memory area RE5, it is shifted to the fourth memory area RE4 by the shift at the start of the game in Figure 58(c).

If the lottery result of the game in Figure 58 (c) is Strong Watermelon, the AT counter C value "324" stored in the execution area AE is not associated with Strong Watermelon (Figure 57), so the AT mode transition lottery for this game will not be won.

Figure 58(d) shows the start of the game following Figure 58(c), with the AT counter C value in each memory area shown in Figure 58(c) shifted one by one to the lower area. Also, in Figure 58(d), at the end of the game in Figure 58(c) (when the third stop OFF operation is performed), a new AT counter C is obtained, and after that AT counter C is stored in the fifth memory area RE5, it is shifted to the fourth memory area RE4 by the shift at the start of the game in Figure 58(d).

When the lottery result of the game in Figure 58 (d) is a strong cherry, the AT counter C of "40" stored in the execution area AE is not associated with a strong cherry in the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous zone, but is associated with a strong cherry in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ (Figure 57), so if the game is in CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery for this game will be a winning entry.

Here, the AT mode transition lottery for each game in FIG. 58(a) to FIG. 58(d) is performed using the AT counter C acquired in the game prior to the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed, and the AT mode transition lottery table as described above. In other words, the AT counter C used in the AT mode transition lottery for each game in FIG. 58(a) to FIG. 58(d) is basically the AT counter C acquired 5 games ago. Therefore, for example, even if the game 5 games before the game in FIG. 58(d) in which the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE was acquired is not in CZ mode, if the game in FIG. 58(d) is in CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C will be a win. Conversely, even if the game 5 games before the game in FIG. 58(d) in which the AT counter C shifted to the execution area AE was acquired is in CZ mode, if the game in FIG. 58(d) is not in CZ mode, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C will be a win.

In addition, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery for each game can be held during the first RB state among the RB states. Therefore, for example, in a situation where "777" is acquired as the AT counter C corresponding to the third role in RB during the advantageous zone, if the AT counter C can be transitioned to the first RB state before it is given to the AT mode transition lottery, or if the first RB state can be continued until the AT counter C is given to the AT mode transition lottery, the AT mode transition lottery will be won on the condition that the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is a win for the third role in RB. And even if it is possible to transition to the first RB state or to continue the first RB state as described above, if the lottery result of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is not a win for the third role in RB, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

In this way, in this embodiment, the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C obtained in advance and the lottery result of the current game, realizing innovative gameplay that takes advantage of the discrepancy between the game in which the AT counter C is obtained and the game in which it is used.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, an AT mode transition lottery is held not only for each game, but also when the RB state ends. This configuration is explained below.

<End Determination Process>
First, the end determination process in this embodiment will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 59. The end determination process is a process (step S618) that is carried out in each game in the bonus state in the bonus state process (Fig. 26).

In step S2501, it is determined whether any of the small prizes have been achieved in the current game. As already explained, in the CB state, winning any of CB medium small prizes 1 to 4 will achieve any of the 1st to 41st small prizes. In contrast, in the 1st RB state and the 2nd RB state, any of the RB strong cherry, RB 1st prize, RB 2nd prize, and RB 3rd prize will be achieved. Figure 61 shows the relationship between the proportion of winning prizes in each RB state and the set value.

In the first RB state, as shown in FIG. 61(a), regardless of the set value, the ratio of winning roles during the first RB state is the same, with a 50% probability of winning a strong cherry during RB, a 20% probability of winning the first role during RB, a 15% probability of winning the second role during RB, and a 15% probability of winning the third role during RB. As already explained, if a strong cherry during RB is won, it is possible to achieve the 28th small role winning and the 32nd to 35th small role winnings, and if a winning is achieved, 15 medals will be paid out (2 bet game). However, a strong cherry during RB is a result that may be missed, and depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, none of the small roles will be achieved in the game in which the strong cherry during RB is won, and in this case, no medals will be paid out. In this case, a negative judgment is made in step S2501.

If the first role in RB is won, it is possible to achieve the first small role win, if the second role in RB is won, it is possible to achieve either the first or 39th small role win, if the third role in RB is won, it is possible to achieve either the first or 40th small role win, and 15 medals will be paid out regardless of which small role win is achieved (2 bet game). And, these first role in RB, second role in RB, and third role in RB are all results in no missed wins, and regardless of the operation timing or operation order of stop switches 42 to 44, any of the small roles will be achieved and 15 medals will be paid out.

In other words, in the first RB state, there is a 50% chance of winning a 15-coin payout role that may result in a miss (strong cherry during RB), and a 50% chance of winning a 15-coin payout role that may not result in a miss (first role during RB, second role during RB, third role during RB).

In the second RB state, as shown in FIG. 61(b), the ratio of winning roles in the second RB state differs depending on the set value. More specifically, the ratio of strong cherries in RB and the first role in RB differs depending on the set value. In setting 1, the probability of winning strong cherries in RB is 34%, and the probability of winning the first role in RB is 36%, while in setting 6, the probability of winning strong cherries in RB is 50%, and the probability of winning the first role in RB is 20%. The higher the set value, the higher the ratio of winning strong cherries in RB and the lower the ratio of winning the first role in RB. In this case, the total ratio of strong cherries in RB and the first role in RB is set not to differ depending on the set value. In other words, in the second RB state, there is a 70% chance of winning a strong cherry or the first role during the RB, a 15% chance of winning the second role during the RB, and a 15% chance of winning the third role during the RB.

In other words, in the second RB state, there is a 34% to 50% probability of winning a 15-coin payout role that may result in a miss (strong cherry during RB), and a 66% to 50% probability of winning a 15-coin payout role that may not result in a miss (first role during RB, second role during RB, third role during RB), and these percentages are different from those in the first RT state.

As already explained, the first role in RB, the second role in RB, and the third role in RB can all result in the first small role winning, but depending on the timing of the stop operation of the right reel 32R, the second role in RB can result in the 39th small role winning, and the third role in RB can result in the 40th small role winning. Therefore, the player can know whether the first role in RB, the second role in RB, or the third role in RB has won.

If any of the minor winning combinations is achieved in step S2501, the number of medals to be paid out for the current game is subtracted from the remaining payout counter in step S2502. As already explained, the remaining payout counter is a counter into which a value corresponding to the upper limit payout amount is input when a bonus is won. For example, in the first RB state or the second RB state, the upper limit payout amount is set to 100.

After executing the process of step S2502, in step S2503, it is determined whether the remaining payout counter is equal to or less than 0 and the upper limit payout number of the bonus has been reached. If the upper limit payout number has been reached, in step S2504, it is determined whether the current bonus is in either the first RB state or the second RB state. In other words, if it is in the CB state, a negative determination is made in step S2504. If it is in the first RB state or the second RB state, in step S2505, it is determined whether the AT mode winning flag or the AT notification flag is set. When the AT mode winning flag or the AT notification flag is set, it means that after winning the AT mode transition lottery, the first RB or the second RB is won before transitioning to the AT mode, or the first RB or the second RB is won during the AT mode. When neither the AT mode winning flag nor the AT notification flag is set, in step S2506, the end time AT lottery process is executed, and then the end determination process is terminated. If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S2501, S2503, and S2504, or if a positive judgment is made in step S2505, the end judgment process ends without performing the end AT lottery process.

<End time AT lottery processing>
In the end time AT lottery process, as shown in Fig. 60, in step S2601, it is determined whether or not the first RB win flag is set in the various flag storage area 106d. As already explained, in this embodiment, in the first RB state among the RB states, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery for each game is permitted, and the first RB win flag is a flag that is set when the AT mode transition lottery is won in any game in the first RB state. If it is not set, proceed to step S2602.

In step S2602, a process is executed to obtain an AT mode transition lottery table for use at the end of RB from the various table storage area 105a. Then, in step S2603, a process is executed to obtain a random number for the AT mode transition lottery. The process of step S2603 is similar to the process of step S909 in the AT lottery process (FIG. 33), and the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE of the lottery information storage area 106f is obtained. In other words, the process of step S2603 is a process to obtain a random number for the AT mode transition lottery (AT counter C) obtained before the game in which the RB state end condition is met and the RB state ends.

In the following step S2604, an AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for the RB end acquired in step S2602 and the AT counter C acquired in advance in step S2603. Here, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the RB end, as shown in FIG. 62, the value of the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is set to a common value regardless of the type of RB state, the result of the current game, or the set value. That is, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the end of the first RB state shown in FIG. 62(a), regardless of whether the first RB state is ended by a strong cherry in RB, the first role in RB, the second role in RB, or the third role in RB that can be won in the first RB state, and regardless of the set value that is set, the value of the AT counter C that is associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery is "0" to "499". Also, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the end of the second RB state shown in FIG. 62(b), regardless of whether the second RB state was ended by a strong RB cherry, the first role in RB, the second role in RB, or the third role in RB, which can be won in the second RB state, and regardless of the set value, the value of the AT counter C associated with winning the AT mode transition lottery is "0" to "499". Therefore, if the value of the AT counter C obtained in advance in a game prior to the RB state end game is "0" to "499", the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB will be won regardless of the type of RB state, the lottery result of the end game, or the set value.

In step S2605, it is determined whether the result of the transition lottery in step S2604 was a winning result, and if it was not a winning result, the end-time AT lottery processing is terminated.

If the first RB win flag is set in step S2601, the first RB win flag is cleared in step S2606. After executing the process of step S2606, or if it is determined in step S2605 that the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB has been won, the process proceeds to step S2607, where the AT notification flag is set, and in step S2608, the AT mode win notification command is set as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the process for the end-of-RB AT lottery is terminated.

In this way, in this embodiment, when the RB state ends, regardless of the result of the game in which the end condition is met, an AT mode transition lottery is held using the AT counter C obtained in the game prior to the game in which the end condition is met. Therefore, unlike the AT mode transition lottery that uses the lottery results of each game held during normal play as described above, in which the AT mode transition is won when the lottery result corresponds to the acquired AT counter C, the AT mode transition is won when the RB state end condition is met in the game associated with the acquired AT counter C.

<Processing for pending display>
Next, the game characteristics using the configuration in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed at the end of the RB as described above will be described. Fig. 63 is a flowchart showing the reserved display process. The reserved display process is a process performed in step S2206 of the all-stop performance setting process (Fig. 52) in the display control device 81.

In step S2701, it is determined whether an AT command has been received from the main control device 101. As already explained, the AT command is a command that is output and set in the random number acquisition process that is performed when the third stop OFF operation is performed to end the game, on the condition that the game to be ended this time is in the RB state, and includes information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C acquired this time, as well as information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C stored in each of the memory areas RE1 to RE5. If an AT command has not been received in step S2701, the pending display process is terminated as is.

If an AT command has been received, in step S2702, the AT counter C information corresponding to each of the memory areas RE1 to RE5 is stored in the pending information memory area 183c of the RAM 183 based on the information contained in the received AT command. Although detailed explanation using figures is omitted, the pending information memory area 183c on the display control device 81 side has a configuration similar to that of the lottery information memory area 106f on the main control device 101 side, and has each memory area (first memory area to fifth memory area) capable of storing AT counter C information for five games, and also has an execution area that stores AT counter C information for the game that is the subject of the AT mode transition lottery. In step S2702, based on the received AT command, the information of AT counter C in the first memory area RE1 on the main control device 101 side is stored in the first memory area in the hold information storage area 183c, the information of AT counter C in the second memory area RE2 is stored in the second memory area in the hold information storage area 183c, ... the information of AT counter C in the fifth memory area RE5 is stored in the fifth memory area in the hold information storage area 183c, and the information of AT counter C in the execution area AE is stored in the execution area in the hold information storage area 183c.

After performing the processing of step S2702, processing is performed in steps S2703 to S2708 to display a pending message on the auxiliary display unit 65.

Here, the hold display shown on the auxiliary display unit 65 will be explained with reference to FIG. 64.

As shown in FIG. 64(a), a reserved display area Dr is set at the bottom as a predetermined display area in the auxiliary display unit 65. The reserved display area Dr is partitioned so that the same number of unit reserved display areas Dr1 to Dr5 as the maximum number of AT counters C stored in the reserved information storage area 183c are arranged side by side in the left-right direction. Specifically, the reserved display area Dr is set with a first unit reserved display area Dr1, a second unit reserved display area Dr2, a third unit reserved display area Dr3, a fourth unit reserved display area Dr4, and a fifth unit reserved display area Dr5. In addition, an execution display area Dp is set to the left of the reserved display area Dr (to the left of the first unit reserved display area Dr1) next to the reserved display area Dr for displaying the reserved AT counters C stored in the execution area of the reserved information storage area 183c. The execution display area Dp is partitioned as an area larger than each of the unit pending display areas Dr1 to Dr5, allowing the player to clearly distinguish between the pending display for the AT mode transition lottery for the game in question and the pending display for the AT mode transition lottery for a later game than the current game.

As shown in FIG. 64(b), in the special image table for displaying the reserved display in the execution display area Dp and the reserved display area Dr, the first special image P1 to the third special image P3 are associated with the AT counter C, respectively. The first special image P1 to the third special image P3 indicate the content of the winning result of the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB based on the corresponding AT counter C. Specifically, when the AT counter C is between "0" and "399", the first special image P1 is associated to be displayed as an indication that the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB will be won. Also, when the AT counter C is between "400" and "599", the second special image P2 is associated to be displayed as an indication that the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB may or may not be won. If the AT counter C is between "600" and "999", the third special image P3 is displayed to indicate that the player will not win the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB.

Each of these special images P1 to P3 is set to have different characters and colors displayed so that the player can distinguish between them. In the figure, the first special image P1 is displayed as a circle character, the second special image P2 is displayed as a triangle character, and the third special image P3 is displayed as a cross character, but the characters and display style of each special image P1 to P3 are arbitrary as long as the player can distinguish them.

Returning to the explanation of the pending display process, in step S2704, a corresponding special image is selected from the special image table acquired in step S2703 and the value of the AT counter C. Then, in step S2705, image data of the selected special image is stored in a memory area that stores the AT counter C acquired at the current acquisition opportunity, together with the AT counter C. More specifically, image data corresponding to the selected special image is read from ROM 182, and the image data and the value of the AT counter C acquired this time are stored in the empty area with the lowest number among the empty areas of the pending information memory area 183c (basically the fifth memory area).

In the next step S2706, it is determined whether or not a special image is already being displayed on the auxiliary display unit 65. The process of step S2706 is a process for determining whether or not the display conditions for the hold display are already met. If the display conditions for the hold display are met and a special image is being displayed, the process proceeds to step S2708, and the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the special image corresponding to the image data stored in step S2705 is displayed in the corresponding unit hold display area (basically the fifth unit hold display area Dr5). If an AT command was not received in step S2701, the RB state is not in progress, or a special image is not being displayed in step S2706, the hold display process is terminated.

In other words, even if the RB state is active, if the conditions for displaying a special image (hold display) are not met, the special image corresponding to AT counter C is selected, and only the storage process for that image data is performed.

<Processing for reserved shift>
Next, the reserved shift process will be described with reference to the flowchart of Fig. 65. The reserved shift process is a process that is carried out in step S1802 of the start-time performance setting process (Fig. 48) when the game is started based on the operation of the start lever 41.

First, in step S2801, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received from the main control device 101. As described above, the shift command is a command output from the main control device 101 on the condition that the device is in the RB state in the random number shift process that is executed when the number of bets on the game to be started this time in the lottery result response process (Figure 31) is a specific prescribed number according to the gaming state. If the shift command has not been received, the hold shift process is terminated without performing the shift process of the hold display data from step S2802 onwards.

If a shift command has been received, in step S2802, a process is performed to clear the data for the hold display displayed in the execution display area Dp. More specifically, a process is performed to clear the AT counter C information stored in the execution area corresponding to the execution display area Dp in the hold information storage area 183c and the image data for the special image as the hold display. Then, in step S2803, a process is performed to shift the data for the hold display displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1 to the execution area from which the data has been cleared. More specifically, in the hold information storage area 183c, the AT counter C information stored in the first storage area corresponding to the first unit hold display area Dr1 and the image data for the special image as the hold display are shifted to the execution area.

In the next step S2804, the data for the reserved display displayed in each unit reserved display area is shifted to a lower memory area. More specifically, the AT counter C information stored in the second memory area corresponding to the second unit reserved display area Dr2 and the image data for the special image as the reserved display are shifted to the first memory area, and the AT counter C information and image data in the second memory area are cleared, and the data in the memory areas corresponding to each unit reserved display area is shifted in order from the third memory area to the second memory area, the fourth memory area to the third memory area, and the fifth memory area to the fourth memory area. In this case, only the data in the fourth memory area corresponding to the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4 is shifted from the fifth memory area corresponding to the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5, and no new data is shifted. In other words, the data in the fifth memory area is cleared, and the fifth memory area becomes an empty area in which no data is stored.

In step S2805, the remaining payout number is determined from the upper payout limit in the RB state and the current payout number, and a determination is made as to whether the remaining payout number is 65 or less. As described above, in the RB state, the upper payout limit is set to 110 coins, and each game is set so that 15 medals can be paid out regardless of the winning combination, and the RB state is set so that the RB state termination condition is met and the RB state ends when 15 medals have been paid out eight times. Therefore, the process of determining whether the remaining payout number is 65 or less can be said to be a process of determining whether 15 medals have already been paid out three times and whether the RB state can end within the remaining five games, including the current game.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the number is 65 or less, then in step S2806, a process is performed in which a special image corresponding to the image data of each area shifted in steps S2801 to S2806 is displayed in the corresponding display area. That is, a special image corresponding to the image data shifted to the execution area is displayed in the execution display area Dp, and a special image corresponding to the image data shifted to each memory area is displayed in each unit reserve display area. That is, the process of step S2805 is a process of determining whether or not the display condition for a special image (reserved display) in the RB state is met, and the display condition for a special image is met when the remaining payout number in the RB state is a specific number of 65 or less and the game can end within the remaining 5 games.

If it is determined in step S2805 that the conditions for displaying a special image are not met, the process for reserved shifting is terminated. After each special image is displayed in step S2806, the process for updating the games scheduled to end is performed in step S2807, and then the process for reserved shifting is terminated.

<Update process for games scheduled for termination>
As already explained, in the RB state, if the first role in the RB, the second role in the RB, or the third role in the RB is won, a small role winning in which 15 coins are paid out is established regardless of the operation sequence or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, while if a strong cherry is won in the RB, a small role winning in which 15 coins are paid out is established or not established, resulting in a missed win, depending on the operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, even if it is determined in the above step S2805 that the RB state can end within 5 games, it may take more than 5 games to end depending on the lottery results of each game and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. In other words, the game in which the lottery for the AT mode shift at the end of the RB is performed may change depending on the progress of the game, such as the lottery results of each game and the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44. Therefore, in step S2807, the game in which the lottery for the AT mode shift at the end of the RB is scheduled to be performed is set as the scheduled game to be ended, and the scheduled game to be ended is updated according to the progress of the game.

In other words, in the update process for the game to be completed, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 66(a), in step S2901, the current remaining payout number is input to the calculation counter SC provided in the various counter area 183b of the RAM 183. Then, in step S2902, the maximum payout number per game (15) is subtracted from the calculation counter SC. Note that in this embodiment, the possible winning combinations in each game in the RB state are all configured to pay out 15 medals, but in a configuration in which, for example, 9 medals or 3 medals are paid out, it is preferable to subtract 9 from the calculation counter SC in step S2902.

In the next step S2903, the end counter EC provided in the various counter areas 183b is incremented by 1. The end counter EC corresponds to the game scheduled to end. Then, in step S2904, it is determined whether the calculation counter SC is less than 0 based on the result of the processing in step S2902. If it is equal to or greater than 0, the process returns to step S2902, where the maximum payout amount is subtracted from the calculation counter SC again, and the end counter EC is incremented. If the calculation counter SC is less than 0, a positive determination is made in step S2904, and the process proceeds to step S2905.

In step S2905, a process is performed to execute a scheduled end display corresponding to the end counter EC. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 66(b), a scheduled end display EP is displayed in a location (above) corresponding to the display of the execution display area Dp or each unit reserved display area Dr1 to Dr5 in the auxiliary display unit 65 as a display indicating which of the special images displayed in the execution display area Dp or each unit reserved display area Dr1 to Dr5 corresponds to the game scheduled to end. For example, if the end counter EC is 1 and the game scheduled to end is the current game, the scheduled end display EP is displayed above the special image in the execution display area Dp in correspondence with the special image. Also, for example, if the end counter EC is 4 and the game scheduled to end is four games later, including the current game, the scheduled end display EP is displayed above the special image in the third unit reserved display area Dr3 in correspondence with the special image.

In step S2905, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled to display the planned end display EP in the location corresponding to the end counter EC when a positive judgment is made in step S2904. Then, in step S2906, the calculation counter SC and the end counter EC are cleared to 0, and the update process for this planned end game is terminated.

<Relationship between the scheduled game end and the AT counter>
Next, how the game to be completed is changed depending on the game results of each game in the RB state will be described with reference to FIGS.

Figure 67 shows the state at the start of a game in which the remaining payout number in the RB state is 65 coins as a result of the previous game and the game is started in a situation where it can end within the remaining 5 games. For example, in Figure 67 (a), the remaining payout number display ZHP, which displays a number corresponding to the remaining payout number in the RB state, is displayed, for example, in the upper right corner as a predetermined area of the auxiliary display unit 65. In addition, in the auxiliary display unit 65, special images are displayed in the execution display area Dp and each unit hold display area Dr1 to Dr4. Each special image corresponds to the AT counter C and image data stored in each area. For example, as shown in Figure 67 (b), the AT counter C in the execution area is "27", and the image data in this case is the image data of the first special image P1 (shown as 1 in Figure 67 (c)), and in this case, the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp in Figure 67 (a). In addition, the AT counter C in the second memory area is "895", and in this case the image data stored is the image data of the third special image P3 (shown as 3 in FIG. 67(c)), and in this case the third special image P3 is displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 in FIG. 67(a). In addition, the AT counter C in the fourth memory area is "531", and in this case the image data stored is the image data of the second special image P2 (shown as 2 in FIG. 67(c)), and in this case the second special image P2 is displayed in the fourth unit hold display area Dr4 in FIG. 67(a).

The expected end display EP is displayed in the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4, which corresponds to five games after the current game, and suggests that a lottery for transition to AT mode at the end of the RB will be held using the AT counter C, which corresponds to the second special image P2 five games after the current game.

For example, if the lottery result of the current game is the first combination in RB, and the first minor combination is won as shown in FIG. 67(d), the remaining number of coins to be paid out will decrease from 65 to 50 coins. Then, at the end of the current game, a new AT counter C is pre-acquired. For example, as shown in FIG. 67(e), if the AT counter C acquired this time is "7", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the first special image P1 are stored in the fifth memory area (steps S2702 to S2705), and the first special image P1 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display unit 65 at the end of the game.

Figure 68 shows the next game after Figure 67.

That is, the AT counter C and image data are shifted from each area in FIG. 67(b) and FIG. 67(c) to the area one level below, and the execution display area Dp and the special images corresponding to each unit reserved display area Dr1 to Dr4 are also shifted to the area one level below. For example, the AT counter C (601) and image data (3) stored in the first memory area in FIG. 67 are shifted to the execution area in FIG. 68, and the special image is also shifted from the first unit reserved display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp. In addition, the end schedule display EP is updated according to the progress of the previous game, and since 15 coins were paid out in the previous game, in FIG. 68 the end schedule display EP is moved from the location corresponding to the fourth unit reserved display area Dr4 to the location corresponding to the third unit reserved display area Dr3.

For example, if the lottery result of the current game is the first combination in RB, and the first minor combination is won, as shown in FIG. 68(d), the remaining number of coins to be paid out will decrease from 50 to 35. Then, at the end of the current game, a new AT counter C is pre-acquired, and as shown in FIG. 68(e), if the AT counter C acquired this time is "915", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the third special image P3 are stored in the fifth memory area, and the third special image P3 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 at the end of the game.

Figure 69 shows the situation when the remaining payout number at the start of the game is 20 and a strong cherry is won during RB. That is, as shown in Figure 69(a), the remaining payout number display ZHP shows "20", the first special image P1 is displayed in the execution display area Dp, the second special image P2 is displayed in the first unit hold display area Dr1, and the expected end display EP is displayed corresponding to the first unit hold display area Dr1. Also, as shown in Figures 69(b) and 69(c), information on the corresponding AT counter C and image data information are stored in each area of the hold information storage area 183c.

In this situation, a strong cherry is won during RB, and as shown in FIG. 69(d), when the 28th minor prize is won, the remaining number of coins to be paid out decreases from 20 to 5. Then, at the end of the current game, a new AT counter C is pre-acquired, and as shown in FIG. 69(e), if the AT counter C acquired this time is "815", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the third special image P3 are stored in the fifth memory area, and the third special image P3 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 at the end of the game.

Figure 70 shows the next game after Figure 69.

That is, the AT counter C and image data are shifted from each area in FIG. 69(b) and FIG. 69(c) to the area below, and the execution display area Dp and the special images corresponding to each unit reserved display area Dr1 to Dr4 are also shifted to the area below. For example, the AT counter C (531) and image data (2) stored in the first memory area in FIG. 69 are shifted to the execution area in FIG. 70, and the special image is also shifted from the first unit reserved display area Dr1 to the execution display area Dp. In addition, the end schedule display EP is updated according to the progress of the previous game, and since 15 coins were paid out in the previous game, in FIG. 70(a), the end schedule display EP is moved from the location corresponding to the first unit reserved display area Dr1 to the location corresponding to the execution display area Dp. In other words, it indicates that the RB state will end if 15 coins are paid out in the current game.

In this situation, if a strong cherry is won during RB, as shown in FIG. 70(d), if the strong cherry is missed during RB, the remaining number of medals to be paid out remains at 5. In this case, the RB state does not end in this game, and the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB is not held. In other words, the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C (531) stored in the execution area corresponding to the current game is not held. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 72, if the strong cherry is not missed during RB in the game, and for example, the 28th small combination is won, 15 medals are paid out in this game, the remaining number of medals to be paid out becomes 0 from 5, and the RB state end condition is met. In this case, the AT mode transition lottery using the above AT counter C (531) stored in the execution area in this game is held. However, the AT mode transition lottery is not won (see FIG. 62).

Even if a strong cherry is missed during RB as described above, a new AT counter C is acquired in advance when the current game ends, as shown in FIG. 70(e). In other words, the AT counter C is acquired when the game ends, regardless of the game lottery results and game results (winning combination, whether or not there was a miss, the operation timing and operation sequence of the stop switches 42-44). As shown in FIG. 70(e), if the AT counter C acquired this time is "691", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the third special image P3 are stored in the fifth memory area, and the third special image P3 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display unit 65 when the game ends.

In this case, as shown in FIG. 71, when 15 coins are paid out in the game following the game in FIG. 70, a lottery for switching to the AT mode is held. That is, the AT counter C and image data are shifted from each area in FIG. 70(b) and FIG. 70(c) to the lower area one by one, and the special images corresponding to the execution display area Dp and each unit reserved display area Dr1 to Dr4 are also shifted to the lower area one by one. For example, the AT counter C (7) and image data (1) stored in the first memory area in FIG. 70 are shifted to the execution area in FIG. 71. In addition, the end schedule display EP is updated according to the progress of the previous game, and since 15 coins were not paid out in the previous game, in FIG. 71(a), the end schedule display EP remains displayed in the area corresponding to the execution display area Dp. That is, it indicates that the RB state will end if 15 coins are paid out in the current game as well.

As shown in FIG. 71(d), when the first minor winning combination is achieved, the remaining payout number decreases from 5 to 0, and the RB state end condition is achieved. In this case, a lottery for AT mode transition at the end of RB is held, and a lottery for AT mode transition is held using the AT counter C(7) stored in the execution area corresponding to the current game. Incidentally, if a lottery for AT mode transition using the AT counter C(7) is held, the AT mode transition is won (see FIG. 62).

As shown in FIG. 71(e), the AT counter C is obtained not only based on the lottery results and game results of the current game, but also regardless of whether the AT mode transition lottery is successful or not. That is, when the current game ends, a new AT counter C is obtained in advance, and as shown in FIG. 71(e), if the AT counter C obtained this time is "83", the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the first special image P1 are stored in the fifth memory area, and the first special image P1 is displayed in the fifth unit reserved display area Dr5 in the auxiliary display section 65 when the game ends.

<AT mode transition lottery during RB>
As described above, there is no set difference in the winning probability of the first RB, and there is no set difference in the probability of each winning role in the lottery table of each game in the first RB state. On the other hand, there is a set difference in the winning probability of the second RB and the probability of each game in the second RB state.

As shown in FIG. 73(a), if the first RB is won at the timing of ta1, an AT mode transition lottery may be held in the winning game of the first RB. In the case where the first game in the first RB state starts at the timing of ta2, the first game ends at the timing of ta3, the second game in the first RB state starts at the timing of ta4, and the second game ends at the timing of ta5, as described above, the AT mode transition lottery for each game is executed in the lottery result corresponding process at the start of the game, so the AT mode transition lottery for the first game is held at the timing of ta2, and the AT mode transition lottery for the second game is held at the timing of ta4. This AT mode transition lottery is held according to the AT counter C stored in the execution area AE and the lottery result of this game (strong cherry during RB, first role during RB, second role during RB, third role during RB) (FIG. 57).

In other words, the AT mode transition lottery is held regardless of which small winning combination is established at ta3 or ta5, the number of medals paid out, the number of remaining payouts during the RB state, etc. Therefore, even if a strong cherry is missed during the RB at ta7 when the 6th game started at ta6 ends, or at ta10 when the 9th game started at ta8 ends, the AT mode transition lottery for the 6th or 9th game will be held at the timing of ta6 or ta8.

In the 10th game that started at timing ta10, if a small winning combination is achieved at timing ta11 and the end condition of the first RB state is achieved based on this winning combination, a lottery for transition to the AT mode at the end of the RB will be held. This lottery for transition to the AT mode will be held regardless of the lottery results or game results of the game in which the end condition was achieved. In other words, if any of "0-499" is stored as the AT counter C in the execution area AE in the 10th game, the AT mode transition lottery will be won, and if any of "500"-"999" is stored, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won.

In addition, FIG. 73(a) shows that all AT mode transition lotteries prior to the AT mode transition lottery of ta11 were unsuccessful. In this case, an AT mode win notification is made at the end of the RB state of ta11 (see FIG. 74(b)).

In contrast, FIG. 73(b) shows a case where the AT mode transition lottery is won in each game during the first RB state before the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is held. That is, tb1 to tb5 are the same as ta1 to ta5 above, and after the first RB is won, the first RB state begins and the AT mode transition lottery is held in each game (tb1, tb2, tb4). Then, if the AT mode transition lottery for the sixth game, which started at tb6, is won, the execution of subsequent AT mode transition lotteries is restricted (tb8, tb10, tb11). In this case, not only is the AT mode transition lottery at the start of the game not held, but the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is also not held.

However, even if the AT mode transition lottery is won in tb6, the AT mode winning notification is not made in that game in tb6. In addition, the pending display using special images and the like for each game in the RB state and the end schedule display EP are also continued even if the AT mode transition lottery is won. Then, at the timing when the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB can be held in tb11, the winning notification of the AT mode won in tb6 is made. The mode of this AT mode winning notification is that shown in FIG. 74(b), and is the same as the notification mode when the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB is won in FIG. 73(a). In other words, the player cannot tell from the execution timing and notification mode of the AT mode winning notification whether the AT mode transition lottery was won in any of the games in the first RB state, or whether the AT mode transition lottery based on the establishment of the end condition of the first RB state was won.

Figure 74 (a) shows the AT mode transition lottery in the second RB state.

As described above, in the second RB, the execution of the AT mode is restricted not only at the time of the winning, but also in each game during the second RB state. Therefore, not only in the game in which the second RB was won at the timing of tc1, but also at the start timing of each game during the second RB state (tc2, tc4, tc6, tc8, tc10), the AT mode transition lottery is not performed. Of course, at the end of each game (tc3, tc5, tc7, tc9), the AT mode transition lottery based on the lottery result or game result of the game is not performed. However, at the timing of tc11 when the end condition of the second RB state is established, the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is performed. Note that the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB is performed regardless of the lottery result of the game started at tc10 or the game result at the time of winning at tc11, and the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT counter C and the AT mode transition lottery table. The figure shows a case where the AT mode transition lottery at tc11 is won, in which case the AT mode winning notification in FIG. 74(b) is issued at tc11.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

The AT counter C used in the AT mode transition lottery is obtained in advance, and then the AT mode transition lottery is performed by satisfying the RB state termination condition. This allows the player to play in such a way that the success or failure of the termination condition is adjusted in relation to the already obtained AT counter C, making it possible to create new gameplay during the RB state.

In this case, the condition for ending the RB state is the occurrence of the maximum number of coins being paid out, and by providing a strong RB cherry that can be missed depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42-44 as a possible result to be won during the RB state, it becomes possible for the player to choose whether to adjust the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held even if it means missing a strong RB cherry, in relation to the AT counter C. Furthermore, if the player chooses to miss the cherry, he or she must operate the stop switches 42-44 at a timing when a miss may occur. In this way, by configuring the game to allow for appropriate intervention in the AT mode transition lottery, the excitement of the game can be significantly improved.

In contrast, if the first, second, or third RB role is won as a winning role during the RB state, the first minor role is won without any room for player intervention. In this way, the possibility of adjusting the end conditions of the RB state varies depending on the lottery results of the game, so that the difference in advantage between players who can intervene (cause a miss) and those who cannot is not made too large.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, in the second RB state, a setting difference is set between the probability of winning a strong cherry during RB and the probability of winning the first role during RB, which results in a setting difference in whether or not the above-mentioned intervention can be performed. By doing this, it is possible to create a setting difference in the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery without setting a setting difference in the AT mode transition lottery itself, and the payout rate will differ even with the same setting value between when the above-mentioned intervention is performed and when it is not, making it possible to more appropriately diversify the payout rate using the setting value.

Regarding the setting difference, there is no setting difference in the transition rate to the first RB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is held for the result that triggers the winning of the first RB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is held during the first RB state. On the other hand, there is a setting difference in the transition rate to the second RB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is not held for the result that triggers the winning of the second RB state, and the AT mode transition lottery is not held during the second RB state. In addition, by performing the end-time AT lottery process at the end of any RB, the end-time AT lottery process is also performed in the second RB state, making it possible for players to think that the AT mode transition lottery is also held for the result that triggers the winning of the second RB state, or that the AT mode transition lottery is also held during the second RB state, and the attention to these target games can be appropriately increased.

In particular, if an AT mode transition lottery is held during the RB state, the results are notified all at once at the end of the RB, making it difficult to tell whether the content of the notification is for the RB state or its end, and therefore making it difficult to tell whether the AT mode transition lottery was actually held during the RB state. This makes it possible to favorably increase attention to the target games and to draw greater interest in the RB state end games.

Since the AT mode transition lottery is not held during the second RB state as described above, a novel gameplay is realized in which the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held can be adjusted by adjusting the game in which the RB state ends, depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted.

In this case, if in the first RB state, the AT mode transition lottery can be held when a strong cherry is won during the RB, so it is as if the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held is adjusted depending on the operation mode of the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held. In this way, by making the player's own operation seem to have a large influence on the AT mode transition lottery, attention to the AT mode transition lottery can be more appropriately increased.

In addition, even if the end game of the second RB state is adjusted during the second RB state, if adjustment is made using a strong mid-RB cherry, the profit of the game will differ greatly because 15 medals will be paid out or 0 medals will be paid out, and the cost of the adjustment is high. In other words, by making it up to the player to choose whether to adjust the end game even at the expense of lowering the profit of the game, the player can consider the balance with the profit from the subsequent AT mode transition lottery, making the game more interesting.

In addition, since the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted during the second RB state, in a configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired in advance, the AT counter C used for the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB state in a game in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted is acquired. In this way, it is possible to prevent interest in the AT mode transition lottery from fading even in a game in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, and it is possible to more appropriately increase the attention to the AT mode transition lottery.

In particular, by making the setting value and lottery results of the game in which the AT Counter C is obtained unaffected when the AT Counter C is obtained, it is possible to draw attention to the AT Counter C, which is obtained equally for each game, without giving negative impressions such as "you can't expect much because it's a low setting" or "you can't expect much because it's a result that appears often."

Thus, while the AT counter C is acquired regardless of the set value or the lottery result of the acquisition game, the end game of the RB state can be moved forward or backward depending on the set value and the lottery result, so it is possible to prevent the setting value from affecting the AT mode transition lottery too much, while still allowing the setting value to affect it to a certain extent.

In addition, while it is possible to adjust the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed depending on the lottery results of the acquired game and the like, the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB state is performed without reflecting the result of the end game. In other words, whether the game result of the RB state end game is a strong cherry during RB or the first role during RB, the result of the AT mode transition lottery is determined only by the AT counter C. In this way, while the AT mode transition lottery is basically performed based on the combination of the game lottery result and the AT counter C, in the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB, the combination is a combination of different games, such as the lottery result of the game during the RB state and the AT counter C value at the RB end game. Therefore, interest in one AT mode transition lottery can be distributed across multiple games, and the attention to the game can be increased appropriately.

<Modification 1>
In this modification, the display conditions for the hold display during the RB state are different from those in the first embodiment. Figure 75 is a flowchart showing the hold display process in this modification.

In this modified example, the processing after it is determined that a special image is not being displayed differs from that described above. That is, the processing from step S3001 to step S3007 is the same as the processing from step S2701 to step S2707, and the value of the AT counter C and the image data of the corresponding special image are stored in the corresponding areas based on the received AT command. Then, in step S3006, it is determined whether or not a special image is being displayed, and if it is determined that a special image is being displayed, in step S3007, the special image corresponding to the currently acquired AT command is displayed in the fifth unit hold display area Dr5, and then this hold display processing ends.

If it is determined in step S3006 that a special image is not being displayed, in this modified example, the process proceeds to step S3008. In step S3008, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game will be a result that triggers a lottery for whether or not to perform a hold display. In this modified example, the trigger role for the lottery for executing the hold display is set as a strong cherry in RB. That is, in step S3008, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is a strong cherry in RB. If it is a strong cherry in RB, a hold display lottery process is executed in step S3009. In the hold display lottery process, a hold display lottery table is obtained from the various table memory area 182a, and a lottery is performed for whether or not to start a hold display.

As shown in FIG. 77, the reserved display lottery table has a common probability of winning regardless of the setting value in the first RB state, and in this modified example, it is set to a uniform 20%. That is, in the first RB state, the start condition for the reserved display is met in 20% of games in which a strong RB cherry is won. On the other hand, in the second RB state, the winning probability differs depending on the setting value, and setting 1 is set to have the lowest winning probability, and setting 6 is set to have the highest winning probability. That is, in setting 1, the start condition for the reserved display is met in 20% of games in which a strong RB cherry is won in the second RB state, and in setting 6, the start condition is met in 50%. In particular, in the second RB state, the winning probability of a strong RB cherry is set to be easier to win as the setting value increases (FIG. 61), and the setting difference between the success or failure of the start condition for the reserved display becomes more noticeable.

In step S3010, it is determined whether or not the pending display lottery process in step S3009 has resulted in a win, and if so, in step S3011, a pending display win flag is set in the various flag storage area 183a, and then the pending display process is terminated. If a negative determination is made in step S3008 or step S3011, the pending display process is terminated.

By setting the reserved display winning flag, the reserved display is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 76, in the reserved shift processing in this modified example, if it is determined in step S3105 that the remaining payout number is 65 or less, it is determined in step S3106 whether the reserved display winning flag is set. If it is not set, the reserved shift processing ends. That is, in this case, the reserved display is not performed regardless of the remaining payout number. Therefore, the player cannot decide whether to postpone the end game in the RB state. If the reserved display winning flag is set in step S3106, a special image display process is performed in step S3107, and an update process for the game scheduled to end is performed in step S3108, and then the reserved shift processing ends. Note that the processes in steps S3101 to S3105 and steps S3107 to S3108 are the same as the processes in steps S2801 to S2807 above.

In this way, by introducing randomness into the start game of the reserved display, in a game in which the reserved display is used to decide whether or not to postpone the end game of the RB state, the presence or absence of the reserved display, which is used as a basis for the decision, varies depending on the game result, making the game more interesting. In other words, when the reserved display is not displayed, it is impossible to decide whether or not to advance the end game of the RB state, and it is impossible to decide whether or not to complete a win when a strong RB medium cherry is won.

However, if the strong cherry during RB is not won, the number of medals increased during the RB state will be reduced by the number of bets on the game, so it is thought that it is better to win. On the other hand, in the first RB state, the longer the game continues in the RB state, the more times the AT mode transition lottery is held during the RB state, so from the viewpoint of improving the winning rate of the AT mode transition lottery, it is preferable not to win the strong cherry during RB. And even in the second RB state, the number of times the execution lottery for the above-mentioned reserved display is held also increases, so it is preferable not to win the strong cherry during RB in order to adjust the end game of the RB state from the reserved display. In that case, the player will select whether to play a game aiming for a substantial medal increase or a game aiming for a win for the AT mode transition, and then decide whether to cause a miss when the strong cherry during RB is won. In this way, the player's involvement in the game is encouraged, and it is possible to improve the fun of the game.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, based on the above modified example 1, the number of reserved display images increases each time the reserved display lottery process is won. That is, in the reserved display process shown in FIG. 78, after the reserved display lottery process is performed in step S3209, it is determined in step S3210 whether or not the lottery process has been won. If the lottery process is won, the reserved display winning flag is set in step S3211, and then the process of adding 1 to the display number counter provided in the various counter area 183b is executed in step S3212, and the reserved display process is terminated. The display number counter is a counter for the CPU 181 to grasp the number of special images to be displayed. The processes in steps S3201 to S3211 are the same as the processes in steps S3001 to S3011.

In the reserved game shift process of this modified example, as shown in FIG. 79, if it is determined in step S3306 that the reserved game display winning flag is set, the value of the display counter is obtained in step S3307 to identify the number of times the reserved game display lottery has been won. Then, in step S3308, the auxiliary display unit 65 is controlled so that the number of reserved games displayed corresponds to the value of the display counter. Thereafter, in step S3309, an update process for the games scheduled to end is performed, and then this reserved game shift process is terminated. Note that the processes in steps S3301 to S3306 and S3309 are the same as those in steps S3101 to S3106 and S3108.

For example, if the display counter is 1, a special image corresponding to the execution display area Dp is displayed, but no special image is displayed in each of the unit hold display areas Dr1 to Dr5. Therefore, although information corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery when the RB state ends in the current game can be understood from the display content of the execution display area Dp, information corresponding to the result of the AT mode transition lottery when the RB state ends in the next game or later cannot be understood.

For example, if the special image displayed in the execution display area Dp is the first special image P1, it can be understood that it is preferable to end the RB state in the current game, and if it is the third special image P3, it can be understood that it is not preferable to end the RB state in the current game. However, since it is not possible to miss anything unless the current game is a strong cherries during RB, there may be situations where you have no choice but to end the RB state in that game even if the third special image P3 is displayed.

On the other hand, if the special image displayed in the execution display area Dp is the second special image P2, ending the RB state in the current game may result in a win in the AT mode transition lottery, but there is also a chance that the win will not occur. Furthermore, even if the RB state is not ended in the current game, it is not known whether the special image corresponding to the desired AT counter C will be displayed in the next game. In other words, in this case, even if the result of the current game is a strong RB cherry, which can cause a miss, it is up to the player to decide whether or not to cause a miss, and the excitement of the game is enhanced through this choice.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the trigger for the lottery for executing the reserved display is different from that in modification 1. That is, in this modification, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 80, if it is determined in step S3406 that a special image is not being displayed, it is determined in step S3408 whether or not a winning combination of strong cherries in RB has been achieved as the result of the current game, as the trigger for the lottery for executing the reserved display. If a winning combination has been achieved, a lottery process for the reserved display is performed in step S3409, and if a miss has occurred, the process for the reserved display is terminated as it is. The processes in steps S3401 to S3411 are the same as those in steps S3001 to S3011, except for the process in step S3408.

In other words, in this modified example, even if a strong RB cherry is won, the lottery for displaying the reserved status will not be held unless a winning combination is achieved. Therefore, the player must choose between missing out on the strong RB cherry in a game in which the strong RB cherry is won and extending the RB state, or winning the combination, taking the lottery for the reserved display, and aiming to increase the number of medals in the RB state. In this way, the options available to the player in a game in which they can choose whether to postpone the lottery for switching to the AT mode, which is held in the game that ends the RB state, are increased, making the game more interesting.

<Modification 4>
In this modification, the contents of the lottery results of the game in the RB state are different from those of the first embodiment. That is, as shown in the lottery results of each game in the first RB state in FIG. 81(a) and the lottery results of each game in the second RB state in FIG. 81(b), in this modification, in addition to the strong cherry in RB, the first role in RB, the second role in RB, and the third role in RB, a losing result is included. That is, 10% of each game in the first RB state is a losing result in which no winning is achieved regardless of the operation sequence or operation timing of the stop switches 42 to 44, and 20% to 30% of each game in the second RB state is the losing result. Therefore, even if the end schedule display EP is performed in correspondence with the execution display area Dp and it is shown that the end condition of the RB state is established by generating the payout of 15 coins in the current game, if the lottery result of the current game is a losing result, the player cannot receive the AT mode transition lottery in the current game. In addition, the first special image P1 is displayed not only in the execution display area Dp but also in the area corresponding to the expected end display EP, and even if it is understood that if 15 coins are paid out in each game, the lottery for switching to the AT mode at the end of the RB will be won, if the result is a loss midway, the end of the RB state will be forcibly postponed. In this way, the fun of playing during the RB state can be increased.

In regard to the losing result in this modified example, in the first RB state, the probability of the losing result is set so that there is no difference in the settings. Also, in the second RB state, a difference in the settings is set for the strong RB cherry and the losing result, so that the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the strong RB cherry and the harder it is to lose, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win the strong RB cherry and the easier it is to lose. In this way, by setting a difference in the settings, it is possible to predict the setting value while playing a game that adjusts the end game of the RB state. For example, while a losing result is preferable in relation to the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB, it is preferable not to get a losing result in predicting the setting value (predicting a high setting), thereby increasing the interest of the game.

Furthermore, if a losing result occurs during the RB state, the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is held at the end of the RB state is postponed, causing the corresponding AT counter C to shift, and even a losing result can be configured to affect the AT mode transition lottery. And since a set difference is set for the probability of a losing result, it is possible to affect the AT mode transition lottery with a relatively simple configuration in which the winning probability of a losing result is adjusted by a set value to change the payout rate.

<Modification 5>
In this modified example, the push order bell can be won during the RB state. As described above, when the push order bell is won, depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44, there are cases where the first small prize is won, the second small prize to the 26th small prize are won, and there are cases where none of the small prizes are won and the winning is missed. In the RB state, since the game is played with two coins as a bet, 15 medals are paid out for the first small prize, and 14 medals are paid out for the second small prize to the 26th small prize. In other words, the number of medals paid out varies depending on the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44. For example, when the remaining number of medals to be paid out in the RB state is 15, if the first small prize is won, the RB state termination condition is met in the game, but in the case of the second small prize to the 26th small prize or a miss, the RB state termination condition is not met in the game.

In this case, the operation sequence of the stop switches 42 to 44 during the RB state may be notified, for example, a push order notification effect corresponding to the first small win may be performed. In this way, the player can refer to the push order notification when adjusting the end condition by paying out 15 medals, when adjusting the end condition by paying out 14 medals, or when adjusting by causing a miss. In a situation where it would be advantageous to pay out 14 medals, even if push order notifications corresponding to the second to 26th small wins are not generated, as long as the push order notification corresponding to the first small win is generated, a player who wants to receive the 14 medals does not have to follow the push order notification corresponding to the first small win.

The presence or absence of a push order notification in the RB state may be different depending on whether the RB state has transitioned to an advantageous zone or a normal zone. In other words, the push order notification may not be generated when the state transitions to a normal zone, and may be generated when the state transitions to an advantageous zone. In this way, not only can the push order notification provide the advantage of being able to increase the number of medals paid out, but it can also provide the advantage of adjusting the number of games to end the RB state, contributing to the creation of new gameplay that utilizes the push order notification.

Incidentally, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 82, the probability of winning the push order bell in the first RB state and the probability of winning the push order bell in the second RB state are the same, but the ratio of the first role in RB, the second role in RB, and the third role in RB is different between the first RB state and the second RB state. More specifically, it is set so that it is easier to win the first role in RB in the first RB state, and easier to win the second role in RB in the second RB state. And, in the second RB state, it is set so that the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the first role in RB and the harder it is to win the third role in RB, and the lower the setting, the harder it is to win the first role in RB and the easier it is to win the third role in RB. As described above, the first role in RB, the second role in RB, and the third role in RB can be determined which result has been won depending on whether or not the first small role is won. In this modified version, in order to predict the set value by determining which result has been won, it is necessary to determine whether the first small prize has been won and whether the push order bell has been reached, which increases the difficulty of predicting the set value and improves the enjoyment of the game.

<Modification 6>
In this modified example, a configuration is adopted in which a transition to a specific state with a different probability of winning a small prize can occur during the RB state.

That is, in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 83(a), strong JAC and weak JAC are provided as winning modes. When the "red 7" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the center reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a strong JAC winning occurs and a transition to the first JAC state occurs. The first JAC state ends when the first JAC game is played three times, and when the first JAC state ends, the state at the time of winning is restored. For example, if the transition to the first JAC state occurs during the RB state, the transition to the RB state occurs after the first JAC state ends.

When the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L, the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the middle reel 32M, and the "red bell" or "white bell" symbol on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, a weak JAC win is achieved and a transition to the second JAC state occurs. The second JAC state ends when the second JAC game has been played three times, and when the second JAC state ends, the state returns to the state at the time of the win. For example, if the transition to the second JAC state occurs during the RB state, the transition to the RB state will occur after the second JAC state ends.

Figure 83 (b) is a diagram showing a part of the lottery table for the first RB state and the second RB state. In this modified example, a common lottery table is used for the first RB state and the second RB state.

In this modified example, the probability of winning when the index value IV=59 is about 1 in 1.31, the probability of losing is about 1 in 4.22, and other minor winning combinations (strong cherry in RB, first winning combination in RB, second winning combination in RB, third winning combination in RB) are not won. When a JAC is won, the strong JAC winning flag and the weak JAC winning flag are set, and it becomes possible to win in either the first JAC state or the second JAC state. In this case, as a combination of symbols that wins with a strong JAC and a weak JAC, the center reel 32M and the right reel 32R are set with the same symbol, and the left reel 32L is set to be different. Therefore, when a JAC is won, it is possible to select whether a strong JAC or a weak JAC will be won depending on the symbol aimed at the left reel 32L.

On the center reel 32M and right reel 32R, the "red bell" and "white bell" symbols are arranged so that they are spaced within four symbols from each other, and it is possible to stop the corresponding symbols in an effective position regardless of the operation timing of the stop switches 43, 44. In contrast, on the left reel 32L, the "red 7" and "black BAR" symbols are arranged at a maximum of 11 symbols apart, and depending on the operation timing of the stop switch 42, it may or may not be possible to stop the corresponding symbols in an effective position. In other words, in a game in which a JAC is won, neither a strong JAC nor a weak JAC may win, resulting in a missed opportunity. In this modified example, the winning flag in the case of a JAC win is cleared if no winning is achieved in the game in which the JAC is won, and is not carried over to the next game.

When a strong JAC win is achieved, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 83(c), the state transitions to the first JAC state where the first small win as the first JAC small win has a high probability (approximately 1 in 1.31). Also, when a weak JAC win is achieved, as shown in the lottery table of FIG. 83(d), the state transitions to the second JAC state where the second small win to the 26th small win as the second JAC small win has a high probability (approximately 1 in 1.31). Note that in the first and second JAC states, only the first and second JAC small wins can be won, and if the corresponding JAC small win is not achieved, the result is a miss (approximately 1 in 4.22).

In the first and second JAC states, the specified number of bets is set to "3", and the first and second JAC games are played in a three bet game. When the first JAC small win is won, the first small win can be achieved, in which case nine medals will be paid out. When the second JAC small win is won, the second to 26th small wins can be achieved, in which case three medals will be paid out.

Figure 84 is a flowchart showing the end determination process in this modified example. The end determination process is performed for each game during the bonus state process (Figure 26).

In step S3501, it is determined whether any JAC winning has occurred. If a JAC winning has occurred, in step S3502, a process of inputting 3 to the JAC counter provided in the various counter area 106e is executed. The JAC counter is a counter that the CPU 102 uses to keep track of the number of JAC games in the JAC state. In the following step S3503, it is determined whether the JAC that has been won this time is a strong JAC, and if it is a strong JAC, in step S3504, a process of setting a strong JAC flag is executed. In this case, the first JAC state is set, and the first JAC game using the lottery table for the first JAC state (Figure 83 (c)) is executed from the next game. In other words, the first JAC minor combination can be won three times with a high probability.

If it is determined in step S3503 that a weak JAC has been won, a process of setting a weak JAC flag is executed in step S3505. In this case, the second JAC state is set, and the second JAC game using the lottery table for the second JAC state (Figure 83 (d)) is played from the next game. In other words, the second JAC minor combination can be won three times with a high probability.

If a negative judgment is made in step S3501 or after the processing of step S3504 or step S3505 is executed, the process proceeds to step S3506. In step S3506, it is determined whether any small winning combination has been achieved. If a winning combination has been achieved, in step S3507, a process is executed to subtract the number of medals paid out this time from the remaining payout counter. Then, in step S3508, it is determined whether the small winning combination this time is any of the JAC small winning combinations. As described above, in this modified example, in the RB state, winning combinations other than the JAC winning combination are not achieved, and in the JAC state, winning combinations other than the JAC small winning combination are not achieved, so if the current bonus state is the RB state, a positive judgment is always made in step S3508. Therefore, when a negative judgment is made in step S3508, it means that the current bonus state is the CB state. After a positive determination is made in step S3508, a process of decrementing the JAC counter by 1 is executed in step S3509, and a process of determining whether the JAC counter has become 0 is executed in step S3510. If the JAC counter is 0, a process of clearing each JAC flag is executed in step S3511.

If a negative judgment is made in any of steps S3506, S3508, and S3510, or after the processing of step S3511 has been executed, the process proceeds to step S3512. The processing of steps S3512 to S3515 is the same as the processing of steps S2503 to S2506 described above. In other words, as a process for ending the bonus state, when the RB state end condition is met and the RB state is ended, the end-time AT lottery process is executed on the condition that the AT mode winning flag or the AT notification flag is not set.

That is, in the RB state in this modified example, the first JAC state and the second JAC state are repeatedly played, and when the upper limit payout number of 110 coins is paid out, a lottery for switching to the AT mode at the end of the RB is held. Then, in the first JAC state, the first JAC game in which nine coins are paid out is played three times, and in the second JAC state, the second JAC game in which three coins are paid out is played three times. Therefore, if a strong JAC win is achieved, a total of 27 coins are paid out, and if a weak JAC win is achieved, a total of nine coins are paid out. In other words, if a strong JAC win is achieved, an increase of 18 coins can be expected, but if a weak JAC win is achieved, no increase in coins occurs. As described above, the player can select between a strong JAC win and a weak JAC win by the stopping mode of the left reel 32L.

Although detailed explanation using diagrams is omitted, in this modified example, if the total number of payouts during the RB state is 90 or more, and if a strong JAC winning occurs, and the RB state is in a situation where it is possible for the RB state to end during the first JAC state based on the strong JAC winning, the conditions for starting the display of the hold display are met, and the hold display will be displayed.

An example of the game flow during RB state in this modified example is explained with reference to Figure 85.

Figure 85 (a) shows an example of the progression of the RB state, particularly when aiming to increase medals. That is, if a strong JAC win is achieved in the first game during the RB state, and the first JAC game is played in the second to fourth games, the number of medals paid out at the end of the fourth game will be 27, and the number of medals increased will be 15. If this cycle of JAC win → strong JAC win → first JAC game three times → JAC win is repeated, the RB state termination condition will be met when a strong JAC win is achieved in the 17th game and a first JAC minor win is achieved in the 18th game, and the RB state will end. In this case, the number of medals increased will be 63. Then, with the establishment of the RB state termination condition, a lottery for transition to AT mode at the end of RB is held using the AT counter C of the 18th game.

Figure 86 (b) shows an example of progression when the end game of the RB state is postponed in relation to the acquired AT counter C. For example, after the third game of the third first JAC state ends in the 12th game, a weak JAC win is made in the 13th game instead of a strong JAC win. In this case, the medal increase speed from the 14th game is slower than in the case of Figure 85 (a) (when a strong JAC win is made), and the number of medals paid out per game is smaller. Also, after the second JAC state based on the weak JAC win ends, if a weak JAC win is made again in the 17th game instead of a strong JAC win, the second JAC state based on the weak JAC win ends in the 20th game.

Then, in the 20th game when the second JAC state based on the weak JAC winning ends, the total payout will be 99 coins, leaving 11 coins remaining. In other words, if a strong JAC winning is achieved, the condition for ending the RB state can be achieved during the first JAC game based on the strong JAC winning (the second first JAC game). In this case, if the first special image P1 corresponding to the AT mode transition win is displayed in the second unit hold display area Dr2 in the next 21st game, the player will win the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB.

The figure shows a case where the JAC is not won in the 21st game, resulting in a losing result. In that case, even if a strong JAC is won in the following 22nd game, the RB state will not end until the 24th game, two games later, so the RB state cannot end in the game corresponding to the first special image P1 displayed in the second unit reserve display area Dr2 in the 21st game. In the figure, the special image in the 24th game shows that the third special image P3, corresponding to not winning the AT mode transition, is displayed, and the special image in the following 25th game shows that the first special image P1, corresponding to winning the AT mode transition, is displayed.

Therefore, even if a JAC is won in the 22nd game, neither a strong nor a weak JAC is won, resulting in a missed opportunity, and then a strong JAC is won in the following 23rd game, and the RB state ends in the 25th game, which is the second game in the first JAC state based on the strong JAC win. As a result, the AT mode transition lottery at the end of the RB can be held at the AT counter C corresponding to the first special image P1, and the AT mode transition is won.

As described above, in a configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired in advance and a lottery for transition to the AT mode is held at the RB end game, by configuring the RB state to be transitioned to a first JAC state and a second JAC state with different medal increase speeds, it is possible to create gameplay in which the player can decide which JAC state to transition to based on the relationship with the AT counter C acquired in advance. Since it becomes necessary to make a selection that takes into account not only the possibility of winning in consideration of the medal increase in the game that was won, but also the medal increase in the next game and onwards, it is possible to significantly improve the gameplay of the game in which the RB state ends by adjusting the game in which it ends.

The player can select whether a strong JAC or a weak JAC will win by operating the player, and it is also possible to prevent either a strong JAC or a weak JAC from winning, which widens the range of choices in relation to the AT counter C and makes the game more interesting.

By providing a losing result in which the JAC is not won during the RB state, and a losing result in which the JAC minor prize is not won during the JAC game, there will be situations where things do not go as planned by the player, making it more difficult to adjust the RB end game in relation to the AT counter C, which not only makes the game more interesting, but also prevents the payout rate from becoming too high.

Second Embodiment
In this embodiment, in a configuration in which the AT counter C is acquired in advance, a new gameplay is created by utilizing the difference in the AT mode transition lottery between the advantageous zone and the normal zone. Figure 86 is a flowchart showing the AT lottery process in this embodiment. As already explained, the AT lottery process is a process executed in a situation where the AT mode is not won in the lottery result corresponding process (Figure 33).

In step S3601, the lottery result of the current game is grasped. Then, in step S3602, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set. If the advantageous zone flag is not set and it is a normal zone, the process proceeds to step S3603. In step S3603, it is determined whether or not the lottery result of the current game is the first specific role set as a trigger role for the AT mode transition lottery in the normal zone. As the first specific role, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, no question bell, and push order bell are set. All of these results are results in which the winning probability is set to the same probability regardless of various game states other than the bonus state, such as the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, and the third RT state. Note that, as shown in FIG. 87, in this embodiment, the winning probability of each result is different from that of the first embodiment. However, the fact that the winning probability of the push order replay, in particular, changes depending on the game state is common to the first embodiment. These first specific roles are the results excluding push order replays, bonus overlap roles, and bonus single roles. In this embodiment, if the current lottery result is not the first specific role, the AT lottery process ends without executing the AT mode transition lottery process from step S3604 onwards.

If it is the first specific role, proceed to step S3604 and obtain the AT mode lottery table for the normal section. In the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, as shown in FIG. 88(a), the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is set as a common value regardless of the result of the first specific role. More specifically, regardless of the result of normal replay, push order bell, strong cherry, etc., if it is the first specific role, it is set to win the AT mode transition lottery when the AT counter C is "0" to "56". In this embodiment, the AT counter C can be updated one by one between "0" and "9999", is updated at a predetermined period, and is set as a loop counter that returns to the initial value (0) when it reaches the maximum value (9999). In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the normal section, the AT counter C is assigned to the first specific role so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is about 1 in 176. As shown in FIG. 87, in the lottery table for each game state, the point value PV for the first specific role is set to a total of 28,800, and regardless of the game state, the probability of winning any of the first specific roles is approximately 1 in 2.27. Therefore, in each game state, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the first specific role during the normal period is approximately 1 in 399.

If it is determined in step S3602 that the advantageous zone flag is not set, it is determined in step S3605 whether or not the advantageous zone winning game flag is set. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is set, the process proceeds to step S3603, and an AT mode transition lottery is held on the condition that it is the first specific role. If the advantageous zone winning game flag is not set, the process proceeds to step S3606, and it is determined whether or not the lottery result of this game is the second specific role set as the trigger role for the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous zone. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 87, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell are set as the second specific role. All of these results are the result of the probability of winning being set to the same probability regardless of the various game states excluding the bonus state, such as the normal game state, the first RT state, the second RT state, and the third RT state, and the second specific role is the result of excluding the normal replay, the no-question bell, and the push order bell, which have a relatively high probability of winning, from the first specific roles, and is called a rare role. If the result of this lottery is not the second specific role, the AT lottery process ends without executing the process for the AT mode transition lottery from step S3607 onwards.

If it is the second specific role, proceed to step S3607 and determine whether the CZ mode flag is set. If the CZ mode flag is not set, the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous zone is obtained in step S3608, and if the CZ mode flag is set, the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ is obtained in step S3609. In the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous zone, as shown in FIG. 88 (b), the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is set as a common value regardless of the result of the second specific role. More specifically, regardless of whether the result is a strong cherry or a weak cherry, if it is the second specific role, it is set so that the AT mode transition lottery will be won if the AT counter C is "0" to "4098". In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous zone, the AT counter C is allocated so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is about 1 in 2.44. As shown in FIG. 87, in the lottery table for each game state, the point value PV for the second specific role is set to a total of 800, and regardless of the game state, the probability of winning any of the second specific roles is approximately 1 in 81.9. Therefore, when an AT mode transition lottery is held using the AT mode transition lottery table for the advantageous zone in each game state, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the second specific role is approximately 1 in 199, which is a higher probability than in the normal zone described above.

In addition, for the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the AT counter C that wins the AT mode transition lottery is set as a common value regardless of the result of the second specific role, and is set to win the AT mode transition lottery when the AT counter C is between "0" and "8264". In other words, in the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ, the AT counter C is assigned to the second specific role so that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is approximately 1 in 1.21. Therefore, when the AT mode transition lottery is performed using the AT mode transition lottery table for CZ in each game state, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery triggered by the second specific role is approximately 1 in 99, which is higher than the case of the normal zone and is also higher than the probability when the table for the advantageous zone is used.

After the AT mode transition lottery table is acquired in step S3604, step S3608, or step S3609, a process of acquiring an AT counter C is performed in step S3610. Here, as shown in FIG. 89, the lottery information storage area 106f in this embodiment is configured to be able to store 10 games' worth of AT counter C as random numbers for AT mode lottery. More specifically, the lottery information storage area 106f includes an execution area AE and a memory area RE, and the memory area RE includes a first memory area RE1 to a tenth memory area RE10. In step S3610, the AT counter C is acquired from the execution area AE, which serves as an area for storing the AT counter C to be used in the current game.

After that, an AT mode transition lottery is executed in step S3611. That is, when an AT mode transition lottery table for a normal zone is used, if the AT counter C is between "0" and "56", the AT mode transition is won, and if it is any other value, the AT mode transition is not won. Also, when an AT mode transition lottery table for a favorable zone is used, if the AT counter C is between "0" and "4098", the AT mode transition is won, and if it is any other value, the AT mode transition is not won. And, when an AT mode transition lottery table for a CZ is used, if the AT counter C is between "0" and "8264", the AT mode transition is won, and if it is any other value, the AT mode transition is not won.

In the next step S3612, it is determined whether the result of the lottery in step S3611 is a win for AT mode transition. If the result is a win for AT mode transition during the normal period, steps S3613 to S3615 are processed. This process is the same as the process in steps S912 to S914 above. Then, in steps S3616 to S3619, the process of setting the AT mode win flag and the process for the premonition mode are performed, and the AT lottery process is terminated. Note that in this embodiment, the configuration for the AT mode transition lottery during the RB state is omitted, but it is also possible to configure the presence or absence of the AT mode transition lottery to differ depending on whether or not the game is in the RB state as in the first embodiment above, or to perform processing regarding the notification mode when the lottery is won.

If it is determined in step S3612 that the AT mode transition lottery has not been won, the process proceeds to step S3620. The processing from step S3620 to step S3627 is the same as the processing from step S922 to step S929 described above, and therefore a description thereof will be omitted.

<Random number acquisition process>
In the random number acquisition process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of Figure 90, after acquiring the AT counter C in step S3701, a process is performed in which the AT counter C is stored in the area with the smallest number (basically the tenth storage area RE10) among the storage areas RE of the lottery information storage area 106f in step S3702. Then, in step S3703, it is determined whether or not the advantageous zone flag is set, and if it is within an advantageous zone, a process is performed in step S3704 to set the AT command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number acquisition process is terminated. If it is not within an advantageous zone, the AT command is not set for output and the random number acquisition process is terminated.

That is, in the first embodiment, the AT command was set to be output on condition that the player was in the RB state, whereas in this embodiment, the AT command is set to be output on condition that the player is in a favorable zone, which is a difference. In contrast, the AT counter C is obtained regardless of whether or not the AT command is output, which is the same as in the first embodiment.

<Random number shift processing>
In the random number shift process in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 91, in step S3801, the AT counter C stored in the first memory area RE1 is shifted to the execution area AE, and the AT counter C stored in the first memory area RE1 is cleared. In the following step S3802, the information stored in each memory area RE2 to RE10 is shifted to the lower area side. In this case, the tenth memory area RE10 becomes an empty area. In the following step S3803, it is determined whether the game to be ended this time is a game in an advantageous period. If it is in an advantageous period, in step S3804, a process is executed to set the shift time command as an output target to the display control device 81, and then the random number shift process is ended. If it is in the normal period in step S3803, the random number shift process is ended as it is.

That is, in the first embodiment, the shift command was set to be output on condition that the vehicle was in the RB state, whereas in this embodiment, the shift command is set to be output on condition that the vehicle is in a favorable zone. In contrast, the AT counter C is shifted regardless of whether or not a shift command is output, which is the same as in the first embodiment.

<Second Section Display Process>
Next, changes to the end conditions of the advantageous zone in this embodiment will be explained.

As shown in the flowchart of FIG. 92, in the second interval display process in this embodiment, steps S3901 to S3911 execute the same processing as steps S1501 to S1511 above. In this embodiment, even if the forced termination condition in the advantageous interval is not met (step S3906: NO) and furthermore the normal termination condition is not met (step S3910: NO, step S3911: NO), if a second replay win is achieved in step S3912, the process proceeds to step S3907 and processing for the end of the advantageous interval is performed. If a second replay win is not achieved, the advantageous interval continues.

As already explained, the second replay is a replay in which a win can be made when the fall replay is won, and when the win is made, a transition to the first RT state occurs. When the AT notification flag is set, a push order notification that does not make the second replay win possible occurs when the fall replay is won, making it possible to maintain the RT state in a higher RT state. As shown in FIG. 87, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the fall replay among the push order replays is different from that of the first embodiment, and the fall replay can be won even in the normal game state or the first RT state. In this case, in the RT state processing (FIG. 21), the state is transitioned to the first RT state not only when the transition result stops in the normal game state, but also when the second replay win is made in the normal game state, and when the second replay win is made in the first RT state, it is preferable to reset to the first RT state. In this embodiment, when the second replay win is achieved, a transition to the first RT state occurs, and if the win is within the advantageous zone, a transition to the normal zone occurs. In other words, in this embodiment, in a fall replay winning game, if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that corresponds to the second replay win, a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone occurs, whereas if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in an operation sequence that does not correspond to the second replay win, no transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone occurs.

<Processing for pending display>
Next, the pending display processing in this embodiment will be explained with reference to the flowchart of Figure 93.

In step S4001, it is determined whether an AT command has been received. If an AT command has been received, that is, if the game is in a favorable zone, a process is performed in step S4002 to grasp the value of the AT counter C contained in the received AT command, and a process is performed in step S4003 to store the grasped AT counter C in the corresponding memory area. Then, in step S4004, it is determined whether the AT counter C acquired this time is a value within a specific range as a winning range in the normal zone. In other words, although the current situation is a favorable zone, it is determined whether the value (0 to 56) is a value that will be the AT mode transition winning value if the game is in a normal zone and the AT mode transition lottery can be received with the first specific role. If it is within the specific range, in step S4005, a process is performed to input a number corresponding to the memory area storing the current AT counter C (basically 10 corresponding to the 10th memory area) into the specific range counter TC provided in the various counter areas 183b, and then the process for displaying the reserved state is terminated. The specific range counter TC is a counter that allows the CPU 181 on the display control device 81 to grasp the area in which the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f that are included in the specific range are stored.

If no AT command is received in step S4001, or if the AT counter C currently acquired in step S4004 is not within the specific range, the pending display process is terminated.

In other words, in this embodiment, when an AT counter C is obtained that will result in an AT mode transition lottery being won if the first specific role is used in the normal section, the display control device 81 grasps the position of the memory area in which the AT counter C is stored as a specific range counter TC.

<Processing for reserved shift>
In the process for the reserved shift in this embodiment, as shown in the flowchart of Fig. 94, first, in step S4101, it is determined whether or not a shift command has been received. If a shift command has been received, in step S4102, it is determined whether or not the specific range counter TC is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, in step S4103, a process of decrementing the specific range counter TC by 1 is performed.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4102, or after the processing of step S4103 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4104. In step S4104, a process is performed to clear the AT counter C information stored in the execution area corresponding to the execution display area Dp and the image data for the special image as the reserved display. Then, in step S4105, the AT counter C information stored in the first memory area corresponding to the first unit reserved display area Dr1 and the image data for the special image as the reserved display are shifted to the above-mentioned execution area. In the following step S4106, a process is performed to shift the reserved display data displayed in each unit reserved display area to a lower memory area. In this case, the data in the tenth memory area is cleared, and the tenth memory area becomes an empty area in which no data is stored.

In step S4107, it is determined whether the specific range counter TC is greater than 3. If it is 3 or less, then in step S4108, provided that the specific range counter TC is not 0, it is determined in step S4109 whether the AT mode is in effect. If the specific range counter TC becomes a specific number (3) or less as a result of this shift process and the AT mode is not in effect, then in step S4110, a process is executed to set the specific notification flag, and then this hold shift process is terminated. If the specific range counter TC is 0 in step S4108, then in step S4111, a process is executed to clear the specific notification flag, and then this hold shift process is terminated. If the specific notification flag is not set in step S4111, then that state is maintained.

If no shift command is received in step S4101, if the specific range counter is greater than the specific number in step S4107, or if the AT mode is not in effect in step S4109, the process for this reserved shift ends without setting the specific notification flag.

<Push order notification process>
The process for notifying the push order in this embodiment differs from that of the first embodiment described above, particularly the process when a fall replay is won.

That is, as shown in the flowchart of FIG. 95, first, in step S4201, it is determined whether the lottery result of the current game is the first promotion replay or not, and if it is the first promotion replay, in step S4202, it is determined whether a push order notification command has been received. If a push order notification command has been received, in step S4203, processing is executed to perform the push order notification effect for the third replay, and then the push order notification processing is terminated. If a push order notification command has not been received, the push order notification processing is terminated as is. That is, the processing of steps S4201 to S4203 is similar to the processing of steps S1901 to S1903 above, although there is a difference in whether a determination of whether a push order notification command has been received or not is made first.

If it is determined in step S4201 that the replay is not the first promotion replay, then in step S4204 it is determined whether the lottery result for this game is a fall replay. If it is a fall replay, then in step S4205 it is determined whether a push order notification command has been received. If it has been received, then in step S4206 processing is executed to perform the push order notification performance for the first replay, and then the main push order notification processing is terminated.

If the push order notification command is not received in step S4205, this means that the AT mode is not in progress or the AT mode transition lottery has not been won. In this case, in step S4207, it is determined whether the above-mentioned specific notification flag is set. If the specific notification flag is not set, the main push order notification process ends. If the specific notification flag is set, this means that, as described above, the previously acquired AT counter C includes an AT counter C with a value within a specific range that will result in an AT mode transition win if the first specific role is obtained in the normal zone, and that AT counter C is used in the AT mode transition lottery within three games. In this case, in step S4208, processing is executed to perform a specific notification on the auxiliary display unit 65 that makes it possible to establish a second replay win and end the advantageous zone.

96(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the player of the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay win, and displays "normal role mode" while indicating the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay win, so as to suggest that the player can perform the operation in the operation sequence to end the advantageous zone and then receive the AT mode transition lottery with the first specific role, thereby winning the AT mode transition. Note that, as shown in FIG. 23(b), in this slot machine 10, when the fall replays 1 to 3 are won, the first replay win or the second replay win is achieved depending on the stop switches 42 to 44 that are stopped first. For example, in the fall replay 1, if the left stop switch 42 is operated first, the first replay win is achieved, and if the middle stop switch 43 or the right stop switch 44 is operated first, the second replay win is achieved. Therefore, when announcing the operation sequence corresponding to the second replay win when a fall replay is won as the specific notification, it is sufficient to only notify the stop switches 42-44 that should be stopped first. Also, of the stop switches 42-44 that should be stopped first, two out of three correspond to the second replay win, and in this embodiment, one of the stop switches 42-44 is configured to be notified. That is, for example, as a specific notification when a fall replay 1 is won, of the middle stop switch 43 and the right stop switch 44, the middle stop switch 43 is notified as the stop switch 42-44 corresponding to the second replay win.

Furthermore, in this embodiment, when a specific notification is made, a notification is also made of an operation sequence that will not result in a second replay win when a fall replay is won. That is, in FIG. 96(a), the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the user of the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win, and displays, for example, "rare combination mode" while pointing to the operation sequence corresponding to the first replay win, so that the user can understand that performing the operation sequence will be advantageous in the event of receiving an AT mode transition lottery with a second specific combination. More specifically, when a fall replay 1 is won, a notification is made of the left stop switch 42 corresponding to the first replay win.

After executing the specific notification in step S4208, a push order notification for the second replay is performed in step S4209, and processing for a push order notification for the first replay is executed in step S4206, after which the push order notification processing ends. Note that the processing in steps S4209 and S4206 is included in the processing for performing the push order notification that allows for a second replay win, which is one of the specific notifications, and the push order notification that allows for a first replay win.

If it is determined in step S4204 that the fall replay has not been won, the same processing as in steps S1906 to S1916 is performed in steps S4210 to S4224. As described above, in this embodiment, since the push order notification process does not determine whether or not a push order notification command has been received at the beginning, a process for determining whether or not a push order notification command has been received (steps S4211, S4214, S4218, and S4223) is added after the process for determining whether or not various push order roles have been won. This is to perform a corresponding push order notification performance when a push order notification command has been received, but not to perform a push order notification performance when a push order notification command has not been received, and the basic processing content is the same as that of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 96(a), when a fall replay is won, a specific notification is made on the auxiliary display unit 65, which notifies the player of the operation mode that allows the player to transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, as well as the operation mode that maintains the advantageous zone. This allows the player to choose whether to end or maintain the advantageous zone when a fall replay is won. In this case, as shown in FIG. 96(c), when the first replay win is made, the advantageous zone will continue without ending, and if the second specific role is subsequently won, there is a relatively high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery. On the other hand, when the second replay win is made, the advantageous zone will end, and if the first specific role is subsequently won, there is a relatively high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery.

As already explained, the first specific role is a collective term for normal replay, strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, middle bell, no-question bell, and push order bell. If you win one of these first specific roles, you will win the AT mode transition lottery if the AT counter C is within a specific range of "0" to "56" during the normal period.

As described above, when there is an AT counter C within a specific range as a pre-acquired AT counter C, if the AT counter C is successfully transferred from the advantageous zone to the normal zone in a game in which an AT mode transition lottery is held with an AT counter C within the specific range and the first specific role is won, the AT mode transition lottery can be won. In this case, as shown in FIG. 88(a), since the probability of winning the first specific role is approximately 1 in 2.27, the winning rate when the AT mode transition lottery is held with an AT counter C within the specific range in the normal zone is approximately 1 in 2.27, and there is a relatively high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery.

However, if the first specific role is not won with the AT counter C within the specific range, the AT mode transition lottery will not be won, and if the first specific role is won in a favorable zone rather than a normal zone, there are cases where the AT mode transition lottery will not be won even if the AT counter C is within the specific range.

For example, in the advantageous zone, if you win the second specific role, which is a collective term for strong cherry, weak cherry, strong watermelon, weak watermelon, chance A, chance B, and middle bell included in the first specific role, and the AT counter C is between "0" and "4098" ("0" to "8264" in CZ mode), you may win the AT mode transition lottery. However, even if the AT counter C is within this range, if you win a normal replay, no-question bell, or push order bell, you will not win the AT mode transition lottery (the transition lottery will not be held).

Therefore, in this embodiment, if an AT counter C within a specific range is obtained in advance before winning the AT mode transition lottery in the advantageous zone, the notification mode of the specific notification is set so that the player can select between a gameplay that aims to win a first specific role in the game corresponding to the AT counter C within the specific range, and a gameplay that aims to win a second specific role during the advantageous zone. In this way, it is possible to realize an innovative game in which the player can select the content of the AT mode transition lottery at their own will.

Incidentally, a special notification is made when a fall replay is won and a push order notification command has not been received. Therefore, in this situation, as shown in FIG. 96(b), the main control device 101 will not make a push order notification either. In other words, if a push order notification or a special notification is not made, a second replay win may be achieved and the advantageous zone may end.

As described above, even if the pre-acquired AT Counter C includes something within the specific range, the specific notification is made after waiting for a fall replay to be won. In other words, even if the AT Counter C includes something within the specific range, the specific notification will not be made unless a fall replay is won. In this way, it is possible to reduce the annoyance of the specific notification being made even in situations where it is not possible to transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

Also, even if the AT counter C acquired in advance includes one within a specific range and the advantageous zone is shifted to the normal zone by winning the second replay, the advantageous zone shift lottery is performed with all possible results in each game, and the winning probability of the advantageous zone shift lottery is set to 100% in this slot machine 10 (FIG. 35). In other words, even if the advantageous zone is shifted to the normal zone, the advantageous zone will be returned to relatively quickly. In this case, if the AT counter C acquired in advance as described above includes one within a specific range and the advantageous zone is shifted to the normal zone by winning the second replay, the AT counter C within the specific range will result in a miss in a game before the AT mode shift lottery is targeted, and the AT counter C within the specific range will win the first specific role in a game in which the AT mode shift lottery is targeted. This results in an AT mode shift win.

In this case, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C within the specific range during the normal period per game is about 1 in 2.27, which is a very high probability, but for example, if the previous game results in a miss (about 1 in 3.25 to about 1 in 3.27 in the first RT state), the probability of winning the first specific role in the next game is about 1 in 7.38 to about 1 in 7.42, which is a lower probability than that per game. Furthermore, the probability of winning the first specific role after two consecutive misses is about 1 in 24.0 to about 1 in 24.3, the probability of winning the first specific role after three consecutive misses is about 1 in 78.0 to about 1 in 79.5, and the probability of winning the first specific role after four consecutive misses is about 1 in 253 to about 1 in 260. In other words, even if the transition to the normal zone is made based on the AT counter C within the specific range being stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is not always about 1 in 2.27. And, although the probability of winning the first specific role after three consecutive misses in the normal zone is higher than the probability of winning the second specific role in the favorable zone and winning the AT mode transition lottery (about 1 in 199), the probability of winning the first specific role after four consecutive misses in the normal zone is lower than the probability of winning the second specific role in the favorable zone and winning the AT mode transition lottery.

For example, as shown in FIG. 97(a), if the AT counter C stored in the ninth memory area RE9 is a value within a specific range, if a fall replay is won in the current game and a second replay win is established, the probability of consecutively losing results in the next game (first memory area RE1) and up to eight games later is approximately 1 in 12,400 in the first RT state, and the probability of achieving the first specific role after nine games is approximately 1 in 28,300.

Therefore, in this embodiment, a specific notification is not made immediately just because an AT counter C within a specific range is stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, but is made when the storage area in which an AT counter C within the specific range is stored is within a specific number of games (within 3 games). In other words, in the case of Figure 97 (a) above, a specific notification is not made and the first replay prize may be awarded.

In contrast, as shown in FIG. 97(b), when the AT counter C within a specific range corresponds to an AT mode transition lottery within a specific number of games, if a fall replay is won, a specific notification is issued, a second replay win is established, and a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone can occur.

The present embodiment described above provides the following excellent advantages:

When an AT counter C is obtained within a specific range in the advantageous zone that results in a high probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery if the AT mode transition lottery is held in the normal zone, a specific notification can be made that allows the player to transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone. This allows for innovative gameplay in which, under the premise that the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery is higher in the advantageous zone than in the normal zone, it becomes easier to win the AT mode transition lottery by first causing a transition to the normal zone.

In this case, simply because an AT counter C within a specific range is obtained does not immediately allow transition to the normal zone, but the transition is made possible when a fall replay is won and a second replay win is established, which increases the difficulty of the game and makes it more interesting.

However, as described above, by using the second replay winning at the time of winning the fall replay as a trigger for the normal zone, even if the AT counter C within the specific range has not been obtained, there is a possibility that a transition to the normal zone will occur. In this respect, in this embodiment, if the player is in the AT mode, it is possible to avoid the second replay winning by using a push order notification effect or the like. This makes it difficult for an event to occur in which the AT mode not only falls from the RT state due to the second replay winning, but also ends the advantageous zone and the AT mode ends. In contrast, if the player is not in the AT mode and the AT counter C within the specific range has not been obtained, if the operation sequence at the time of winning the fall replay matches the second replay winning, the advantageous zone ends, and if it does not match, the advantageous zone continues, so that the continuation of the advantageous zone is random. This is based on the assumption that the lottery for moving to the advantageous zone during the normal zone is held for all minor symbols and that the probability of winning is high (100%). Because of this configuration, even if the advantageous zone ends unintentionally, the player will immediately move to the advantageous zone again, so the disadvantage suffered by the player will be minimal (not at all).

Furthermore, in this embodiment, even if a fall replay is won in a situation where an AT counter C within a specific range is acquired, if the specific range counter TC is greater than 3, a specific notification is not generated. This is because, although it is possible to reduce the disadvantage of falling into the normal zone once by increasing the transition lottery to the advantageous zone as described above, if a transition to the advantageous zone occurs before the AT counter C within the specific range becomes the target of the AT mode transition lottery despite the transition to the normal zone, the action may become meaningless. The specific range counter TC = 3 as the boundary takes into consideration the probability of winning the AT mode transition when the advantageous zone is maintained and the probability that the AT mode transition lottery can be taken with the first specific role without returning to the advantageous zone when transitioning to the normal zone. If it is a situation where it is better to maintain the advantageous zone, a specific notification is not generated even if a fall replay is won in a situation where an AT counter C within a specific range is acquired. In this way, it is possible to suitably increase the expectation of winning the AT mode transition when transitioning to the normal zone according to the specific notification.

In the normal section, multiple lottery results are set as the first specific role that will result in an AT mode transition winning when an AT mode transition lottery is held with an AT counter C within a specific range, so that it is possible to increase the number of cases where an AT mode transition winning is held when an AT mode transition lottery is held using an AT counter C within the specific range.

In particular, the first specific role is configured to be easily won as a game lottery result, and the specific range is narrowed (the number of corresponding AT counters C is reduced), so that when an AT counter C within the specific range is obtained, it is possible to increase the probability that the AT counter C will be provided for the AT mode transition lottery, while lowering the probability of winning the AT mode transition lottery when the first specific role is won.

In addition, because the first specific role is set to a result whose winning probability does not change depending on the game state, the winning probability of the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C within the specific range can be made common regardless of the state when transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone. This avoids the need for a complicated configuration, such as a specific notification that takes into account the state at the time of transition, and also improves the ease of understanding of the game.

Moreover, with the first specific role, whether it is a high probability result such as a normal replay or a push order bell, or a low probability result such as a strong cherry or a weak cherry, the player can win the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C within a specific range, which makes the game easier to understand and ideally realizes the gameplay that allows for the above-mentioned high probability of winning the AT mode transition.

<Modification 1>
In this modified example, the existence of an AT counter C that becomes an AT mode transition winning when the second specific role is won during the advantageous period is considered. Figure 98 is a flowchart showing the pending display process in this modified example.

If an AT command is received in step S4301, the value of the AT counter C is grasped in step S4302, and information corresponding to the value of the AT counter C is stored in the corresponding memory area (tenth memory area) in step S4303. Then, in step S4304, it is determined whether the information of the AT counter C acquired this time is within the range of values that will be won if the AT mode transition lottery is triggered by the second specific role during the favorable period. That is, as described above, if the AT counter C is "0" to "4098" ("0" to "8264" in the CZ mode) during the favorable period, if the AT mode transition lottery is held with the second specific role, the AT mode transition will be won, and in step S4304, the above "0" to "4098" is set as the second specific range, and it is determined whether the AT counter C acquired this time is within the second specific range. If it is within the second specific range, in step S4305, a process is performed in which the number (10) corresponding to the memory area in which the AT counter C is stored is input to the second specific range counter TC2 provided in the various counter area 183b. The second specific range counter TC2 corresponds to the above specific range counter TC, and is a counter that allows the CPU 181 to grasp the position of the memory area in which the AT counter C that will result in an AT mode transition win is stored if it is the second specific role. In this modified example, the specific range counter TC for the first specific role is referred to as the first specific range counter TC1 in relation to the above second specific range counter TC2.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4304 or after the process of step S4305 is executed, in step S4306, it is judged whether or not the currently acquired AT counter C is within the first specific range ("0" to "56"), and if it is within the first specific range, in step S4307, a process of inputting 10 into the first specific range counter TC1 is executed, and then this hold display process is terminated. The processes of steps S4306 and S4307 are the same as the processes of steps S4004 and S4005 described above. If an AT command is not received in step S4301, or if it is determined in step S4302 that it is not within the first specific range, the hold display process is terminated.

In the pending shift processing in this modified example, as shown in FIG. 99, if a shift command is received in step S4401, it is determined in step S4402 whether the first specific range counter TC1 is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the first specific range counter TC1 is decremented by 1 in step S4403. The processing in steps S4402 and S4403 is the same as the processing in steps S4102 and S4103 described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4402 or after the processing of step S4403 is executed, the process proceeds to step S4404, where it is judged whether the second specific range counter TC2 is greater than 0. If it is greater than 0, the process of decrementing the second specific range counter TC2 by 1 is performed in step S4405. The processes of steps S4404 and S4405 correspond to the processes of steps S4402 and S4403 described above.

If a negative judgment is made in step S4404 or after the processing of step S4405 is executed, processing is performed in steps S4406 to S4408 to shift the reserved information (information of AT counter C). These processing are the same as the processing of steps S4104 to S4106, etc., described above.

In the next step S4409, it is determined whether the first specific range counter TC1 is greater than 3. If it is less than or equal to 3, it is determined in step S4411 whether the AT mode is in progress, provided that the first specific range counter TC1 is not 0 in step S4410. If the AT mode is not in progress, a process of setting the first specific notification flag is executed in step S4412. The first specific notification flag corresponds to the above-mentioned specific notification flag. If the first specific range counter TC1 is greater than 3 in step S4409, if the first specific range counter TC1 is 0 in step S4410, or if the AT mode is in progress in step S4411, a process of clearing the first specific notification flag is executed in step S4413. Note that if the first specific notification flag is not set in step S4413, the state is maintained.

After executing the process of step S4412 or step S4413, proceed to step S4414. In step S4414, it is determined whether the second specific range counter TC2 is smaller than the first specific range counter TC1 and larger than 0. That is, in step S4414, it is determined whether there is an AT counter C included in the second specific range that is the target of the AT mode transition lottery before the AT counter C included in the first specific range among the AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f (FIG. 101 (b)). If the determination is affirmative in step S4414, it is determined in step S4415 whether the AT mode is in progress, and if the AT mode is not in progress, a process is executed in step S4416 to set the second specific notification flag in the various flag storage area 183a, and then this reservation shift process is terminated. If the second specific range counter TC2 is 0 in step S4414, if the second specific range counter TC2 is greater than 0 but greater than the first specific range counter TC1, or if the AT mode is in step S4415, the process clears the second specific notification flag in step S4417, and then ends the pending shift process. If the second specific notification flag is not set in step S4417, the state is maintained.

In the push order notification process in this modified example, if it is determined in step S4504 that a fall replay has been won, it is determined in step S4505 whether or not a push order notification command has been received. If a push order notification command has been received, a push order notification performance for the first replay is performed in step S4506, and then the push order notification process is terminated. These processes are the same as those in the second embodiment described above.

If it is determined in step S4505 that the push order notification command has not been received, it is determined in step S4507 whether the first specific notification flag is set. If the first specific notification flag is not set, the main push order notification process is terminated. If the first specific notification flag is set, it is determined in step S4508 whether the second specific notification flag is set. If the second specific notification flag is not set, the process of executing the first specific notification is performed in step S4509, and then the push order notification for the second replay is performed in step S4510, and the push order notification for the first replay is performed in step S4506, and then the main push order notification process is terminated. Note that the first specific notification corresponds to the specific notification in the second embodiment. In this case, a notification is performed that allows the second replay winning to be established and the advantageous zone to be terminated, and a notification is performed that allows the first replay winning to be established and the advantageous zone to be maintained. In addition, if the second replay win is achieved, the advantageous zone ends, and the first specific combination is used to receive the AT mode transition lottery, a notification is issued indicating that the AT mode transition is likely to be won.

If the second specific notification flag is set in step S4508, processing is executed in step S4511 to cause the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to display a second specific notification, suggesting that if the player can receive the AT mode transition lottery with the second specific role during the advantageous zone, it is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery. For example, as shown in FIG. 101(a), the second specific notification may be displayed in a position corresponding to the operation sequence for establishing the first replay winning, where "Rare role mode" would be displayed in the case of the first specific notification, with a predetermined character, displaying "You've got a better chance than usual with a rare role win!", suggesting that if the second specific role is won, it is more likely to win the AT mode transition lottery than usual during the advantageous zone.

After executing the processing for the second specific notification in step S4511, processing for the first specific notification is performed in step S4509. In this case, the content of the first specific notification is adjusted so that the second specific notification takes priority for any overlapping parts with the second specific notification as described above. Then, in steps S4510 and S4506, processing is performed to perform the push order notification effects for the first replay and second replay, and then the main push order notification processing is terminated. The processing in steps S4501 to S4503 and steps S4512 to S4525 is the same as the processing in steps S4201 to S4203 and steps S4210 to S4223 described above.

As described above, in this modified example, when a specific notification is made, a second specific notification may be made in consideration of cases where it is better to maintain the advantageous zone, thereby broadening the range of choices available to the player and making the game more interesting.

In particular, by limiting the situations in which the second specific notification is made to games in which a specific notification is made as described above, and further configuring the second specific notification to be made when the AT counter C is within the second specific range, it is possible to avoid the second specific notification being perceived as a nuisance. In other words, if the player is in a favorable zone, he or she can basically receive a more favorable AT mode transition lottery than in the normal zone. As described above, in situations where the player is forced to choose whether or not to transition from the favorable zone to the normal zone, the second specific notification is made only when there is a high possibility of winning the AT mode transition lottery based on the current state of the AT counter C, making it possible to further increase the effectiveness of the second specific notification.

<Modification 2>
In this modified example, the end condition of the advantageous zone is changed. Fig. 102 is a flowchart showing the second zone display process in this modified example.

In this modified example, the processing after determining in step S4612 that the second replay win has been achieved is different, and in step S4613, it is determined whether the second replay win has been achieved by the ending symbol.

As shown in FIG. 103(b), in this modified example, the stopping patterns associated with the second replay winning are the "black BAR" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" pattern or the "second replay" pattern on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" pattern on the right reel 32R, which are the first stopping patterns that stop on the active line, and the "young man" pattern or the "watermelon" pattern on the left reel 32L, and the "second replay" pattern on the center reel 32M. A second stop pattern is set in which the "first replay" or "second replay" pattern and the "black BAR" pattern on the right reel 32R stop on an active line, and a third stop pattern is set in which the "young man" or "watermelon" pattern on the left reel 32L, the "first replay" or "second replay" pattern on the center reel 32M, and the "watermelon" pattern on the right reel 32R stop on an active line. Of these, when the second replay win is established with the first stop pattern and the second stop pattern, a transition to the first RT state occurs but the advantageous zone does not end, and when the second replay win is established with the third stop pattern, a transition to the first RT state and the advantageous zone end occur.

When a fall replay is won, even if the stop switches 42 to 44 are operated in the operation sequence associated with the second replay win, if none of the first to third stop symbols can be stopped, the first replay win is set to be established.

In other words, in the above step S4613, if the second replay winning is established with the third stop pattern among the first to third stop patterns, a positive judgment is made that the second replay winning is established with the end pattern. If a positive judgment is made in step S4613, proceed to step S4607 and perform processing for the end of the advantageous zone. In contrast, if a negative judgment is made in step S4613, the second zone display processing is terminated as is. In this case, even if the second replay winning is established, the advantageous zone continues (maintains). Therefore, when a fall replay is won and the second replay winning is established, if the above-mentioned third stop pattern can be stopped, the advantageous zone ends, and if the third stop pattern cannot be stopped (if the first stop pattern or the second stop pattern can be stopped), the advantageous zone continues (maintains).

The processing for effects when a fall replay is won in this modified example will be described with reference to the flowchart in FIG. 103(a). FIG. 103(a) is a flowchart showing the first stop OFF effect setting processing, which is part of the processing for effects when a fall replay is won. This first stop OFF effect setting processing is processing carried out when a stop OFF effect based on the first stop OFF operation when a fall replay is won is performed, among the processing for setting effects at each stop operation in the display control device 81 (FIG. 51) (step S2108).

In step S4701, it is determined whether the stopped symbol on the first stopped reel that has been stopped this time corresponds to the second replay win. Here, if the first stopped reel is the left reel 32L, as described above, the "black BAR" symbol constituting the first stopped symbol, and the "young man" symbol and "watermelon" symbol constituting the second and third stopped symbols are symbols that correspond to the second replay win. In contrast, the "red bell" symbol and the "white bell" symbol are symbols that correspond to the first replay win. In other words, if the first stopped reel is the left reel 32L, it is possible to clearly distinguish whether the symbol in the fall replay corresponds to the first replay win or the second replay win. Also, when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, the "watermelon" symbol constituting the first and third stop symbols and the "black BAR" symbol constituting the second stop symbol are symbols corresponding to the second replay win. In contrast, the "red bell" symbol, the "white bell" symbol and the "young man" symbol are symbols corresponding to the first replay win. In other words, even when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, it is possible to clearly distinguish between the symbols corresponding to the first replay win and the second replay win among the fall replays.

On the other hand, when the first stop reel is the middle reel 32M, the "first replay" and "second replay" symbols that make up the first to third stop symbols are symbols that correspond to the second replay win, and these "first replay" and "second replay" symbols are also symbols that correspond to the first replay win. In other words, when the first stop reel is the middle reel 32M, it is not possible to clearly distinguish whether the fall replay symbol corresponds to the first replay win or the second replay win.

Therefore, in step S4701, when determining whether the stopped symbol on the first stopped reel that has been stopped this time corresponds to the second replay win, if the first stopped reel is the left reel 32L or the right reel 32R, a positive determination is made if it corresponds to the second replay win, whereas a negative determination is made if it corresponds to the first replay win. If a negative determination is made in step S4701, the first stop OFF performance setting process is terminated. In contrast, if the first stopped reel that has been stopped this time is the middle reel 32M, a positive determination is made without distinguishing between the first replay win and the second replay win.

If a positive judgment is made in step S4701, a judgment is made in step S4702 as to whether or not a specific notification (first specific notification) is being executed. In other words, when a fall replay is won, a judgment is made as to whether or not a notification has been made that the advantageous zone can be ended by establishing a second replay winning, and that an AT mode transition lottery can be entered at the AT counter C in a specific range (first specific range). If a negative judgment is made in step S4702, a judgment is made in step S4703 as to whether or not a push order notification command has been received. In other words, a judgment is made as to whether or not a push order notification presentation is being performed. The push order notification presentation in this case is a push order notification presentation for the first replay.

When a symbol corresponding to the second replay win stops on the first reel in step S4701, and further, no specific notification is made in step S4702, and a push order notification display is made in step S4703, it is highly likely that the player has mistaken the operation sequence during AT mode, etc., and operated the symbol corresponding to the second replay win. Therefore, if a positive judgment is made in step S4703, a process is executed in step S4704 to cause a notification for avoiding the ending symbol to be made on the auxiliary display unit 65, and then this first stop OFF display setting process is terminated.

Here, if the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, when the "black BAR" symbol is stopped, the second replay win is made with the first stop symbol, but the second replay win is not made with the second or third stop symbol. Also, if the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, even if the "youth" symbol or "watermelon" symbol is stopped, the second replay win is not made with the third stop symbol unless the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the right reel 32R, but it is possible to make the second replay win with the second stop symbol by stopping the "black BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R.

Also, when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, if the "black BAR" symbol is stopped, the second replay win is made with the second stop symbol, but the second replay win is not made with the first or third stop symbol. Also, when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, even if the "watermelon" symbol is stopped, the second replay win is not made with the third stop symbol unless the "youth" symbol or the "watermelon" symbol is stopped on the left reel 32L, and it is possible to make the second replay win with the first stop symbol by stopping the "black BAR" symbol on the left reel 32L.

If the first stop reel is the center reel 32M, stopping the "black BAR" symbol on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R will result in a second replay win with the first or second stop symbol, rather than the third stop symbol.

In other words, when the first reel is stopped, it is not clear which of the first to third stopping symbols will result in the second replay win.

Therefore, in the notification to avoid the ending pattern in step S4704 above, for example, as shown in FIG. 104(a), a notification is made based on the first stopped reel to prevent the second re-play winning from being achieved with the third stopped pattern on the remaining reels, that is, a notification is made of the pattern that should be stopped (targeted) so that a winning is achieved with the first or second stopped pattern. FIG. 104(a) shows a notification to avoid the end symbol when the center reel 32M is stopped as the first reel. In this case, by aiming for the 16-18 "black BAR" symbols and the cluster of "white BAR" and "black BAR" symbols on the left reel 32L, and the 7-9 "black BAR" symbols and the cluster of "red 7" and "black BAR" symbols on the right reel 32R and performing the stopping operation, it is possible to stop the "black BAR" symbol corresponding to the first or second stopping symbol on an active line, and if it does not stop, a notification is made suggesting that the current AT mode will end.

If the player succeeds in stopping the "black BAR" symbol on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R in accordance with the notification for avoiding the ending symbol, the second replay win is established with the first or second stopping symbol, as shown in Figure 104 (b1) or Figure 104 (b2). In this case, the advantageous zone does not end. However, the RT state transitions to the first RT state based on the second replay win. Therefore, the player transitions to the first RT state during the AT mode, and then returns to the third RT state due to the push order notification when the first promotion replay or second promotion replay is won.

Although detailed explanation with figures will be omitted, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, a notification to the effect that the "black BAR" symbol should be stopped on the right reel 32R in FIG. 104(a) is given as a notification to avoid the end symbol, and when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, a notification to the effect that the "black BAR" symbol should be stopped on the left reel 32L in FIG. 104(a) is given as a notification to avoid the end symbol.

If a specific notification (first specific notification) is being executed in step S4702, processing is executed in step S4705 to cause a notification for the end pattern stop to be issued on the auxiliary display unit 65, and then the first stop OFF performance setting processing is terminated.

In the notification for stopping the ending pattern in step S4705, for example, as shown in FIG. 105(a), a notification is made based on the first stopped reel to ensure that the second replay winning is achieved with the third stopped pattern on the remaining reels, that is, a notification is made of the pattern that should be stopped (targeted) so that a winning is not achieved with the first or second stopped pattern. FIG. 105(a) shows a notification for stopping the end symbol when the center reel 32M is stopped as the first reel. In this case, by performing a stopping operation aiming for the "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "WHITE BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, it is possible to stop the symbol corresponding to the third stop symbol (the "Youth" symbol or the "Watermelon" symbol on the left reel 32L, and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R) on the active line. If it is possible to stop it, a notification is given suggesting that the current advantageous period will end and the transition to the normal period will occur, that is, it is possible to take part in the AT mode transition lottery at the AT counter C within a specific range in the normal period.

If the player succeeds in stopping the symbol corresponding to the third stop symbol on the left and right reels 32L and 32R in response to the notification for stopping the end symbol, the second replay win is achieved with the third stop symbol, as shown in FIG. 105(b). In this case, the advantageous period ends, and the RT state transitions to the first RT state.

Although detailed explanation with figures is omitted, when the first stop reel is the left reel 32L, a notification for stopping the end pattern is given to the right reel 32R in FIG. 105(a) to aim for the "WHITE BAR" symbol and perform a stopping operation, and when the first stop reel is the right reel 32R, a notification for stopping the end pattern is given to the left reel 32L in FIG. 105(a) to aim for the "LUCKY" symbol and perform a stopping operation.

In this way, in a configuration in which the advantageous zone can be ended by the second replay winning, if the second replay winning is achieved with the first stopping pattern or the second stopping pattern, the advantageous zone is not ended, and if the second replay winning is achieved with the third stopping pattern, the advantageous zone is ended. This makes it possible to prevent the player from accidentally ending the advantageous zone, and to preferably prevent the configuration in which the player can receive an advantageous AT mode transition lottery by transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone when the AT counter C is within a specific range from encouraging the occurrence of a disadvantage to the player.

In addition, by doing as described above, in order to enter the advantageous AT mode transition lottery by transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone when the AT counter C is within a specific range, it is necessary to establish the second replay winning with the third stopping pattern among the first to third stopping patterns, which increases the difficulty of the game and makes it possible to increase the fun of the game.

Here, among the first to third stop symbols, the first and second stop symbols that do not end the advantageous zone are associated with the "black BAR" symbol on the left and right reels 32L, 32R, and the third stop symbol that ends the advantageous zone is not associated with the "black BAR" symbol on the left and right reels 32L, 32R. Therefore, if the "black BAR" symbol is successfully stopped on an effective line on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R, the advantageous zone can be prevented from ending, and if the "black BAR" symbol is successfully prevented from stopping on an effective line on either the left or right reel 32L, 32R, the advantageous zone can be prevented from ending. In this case, two "black BAR" symbols are arranged on each of the left and right reels 32L, 32R, and are arranged as a block with one symbol between them. Therefore, the "black BAR" symbol is easily visible as a block on the left and right reels 32L and 32R, making it relatively easy to operate the reels aiming for the "black BAR" symbol.

In contrast, of the first to third stop symbols, the third stop symbol, which ends the advantageous zone, is associated with the "Youth" and "Watermelon" symbols on the left reel 32L and the "Watermelon" symbol on the right reel 32R. In this case, players who cannot directly see the "Youth" or "Watermelon" symbols are expected to aim for the corresponding symbols using the relatively large symbols, the "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "White BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R, as a guide. However, even these relatively large symbols are less visible than the clusters of "Black BAR" symbols on the left and right, and the difficulty of operating to aim for the "LUCKY" symbol on the left reel 32L and the "White BAR" symbol on the right reel 32R is relatively high.

This will prevent players from accidentally ending the advantageous zone, and will ideally increase the excitement of the game when players choose to end the advantageous zone.

<Modification 3>
In this modification, the specific notification is made when a predetermined notification lottery is won. Fig. 106 is a flow chart showing the reserved shift process in this modification.

In this modified example, the processing is different when the specific range counter TC is 3 or less and an AT mode transition lottery based on the AT counter C within the specific range is to be held within the next 3 games. That is, if it is determined in step S4807 that the specific range counter TC is 3 or less, it is determined in step S4809 that the AT mode is not in progress, provided that the specific range counter TC is not 0 in step S4808. If the AT mode is not in progress, in this modified example, a specific notification lottery process is executed in step S4810.

In the specific notification lottery process, the specific notification lottery table is obtained from the various table memory area 182a, and the number of games in the advantageous zone (the number of games corresponding to the advantageous zone game number AG on the main control device 101 side) and the setting value set by the winning probability setting process are grasped, and a lottery is performed using a lottery counter or the like to determine whether or not to execute a specific notification. As shown in Figure 107, the specific notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the specific notification lottery differs depending on the number of games in the advantageous zone and the setting value. Specifically, the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the special notification lottery. In the odd-number settings of settings 1, 3, and 5, the odd-numbered setting is more likely to win the special notification lottery when the number of games in the advantageous zone is 100, 300, 500, 700, or 900. In settings 2 and 4, the odd-numbered setting is more likely to win the special notification lottery when the number of games in the advantageous zone is 200, 400, 600, or 800. In setting 6, the odds of winning the special notification lottery increase as the number of games in the advantageous zone increases. Also, when the number of games in the advantageous zone is less than 100, the odds of winning the special notification lottery are set to 4 to 6, but not 1 to 3. When the number of games in the advantageous zone exceeds 1000, the odds of winning the special notification lottery increase, and in this modified example, the odds of winning are always set to 1 to 3.

After the special notification lottery is performed in step S4810, it is determined in step S4811 whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If the lottery has been won, the process of setting the special notification flag is executed in step S4812, and the process for reserved shift is then terminated. If the lottery has not been won, the process for reserved shift is terminated without setting the special notification flag.

The processing in steps S4801 to S4809 and steps S4812 to S4813 is similar to the processing in steps S4101 to S4111 above.

In this way, by utilizing the specific notification that may increase the probability of winning the lottery for transitioning to the AT mode by transitioning to the normal zone, it is possible to set it as a chance zone where it is easier to win the lottery for transitioning to the AT mode after transitioning to the advantageous zone. And since it is set so that the more games there are in the advantageous zone, the easier it is to win the specific notification lottery, it is possible to use the chance zone to provide relief for those players who are having difficulty transitioning to the AT mode.

In this case, even if the special notification lottery is won and the special notification flag is set as described above, the special notification will not be made unless a fall replay is won before the special notification flag is cleared, so the advantageous zone can continue. In other words, when a special notification is made, a transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone occurs and the number of games in the advantageous zone is reset. By doing this, if a transition to the normal zone occurs in accordance with a special notification, the player will play in the hope of winning the first special role at all costs so as to win the AT mode transition lottery, and the interest of ending the advantageous zone based on the AT counter C is significantly increased.

In addition, because the winning probability of the special notification lottery is set according to a set value, it is possible to indirectly adjust the winning rate of the AT mode transition lottery by the execution rate of the special notification that enables transition from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, even if there is no set difference in the winning rate of the AT mode transition lottery in the normal zone. Therefore, even if there are circumstances in which it is not possible to set a setting difference in the configuration related to the instruction function of the AT mode, etc. in the normal zone, it is possible to make an adjustment well within the scope of those circumstances.

<Modification 4>
In this modified example, the specific notification is configured to be executed during the AT mode, and when the increase in the number of medals in the advantageous zone approaches the upper limit increase number (2400 medals), the specific notification can be performed. Figure 108 is a flowchart showing the reserved shift process in this modified example.

The processing in steps S4901 to S4906 is similar to the processing in steps S4101 to S4106 described above, and based on the reception of a shift command, the data in each memory area is shifted and the position information of the AT counter C within the specific range (specific range counter TC) is updated.

In step S4107, a specific notification lottery process is executed. FIG. 109(a) is a flowchart showing the specific notification lottery process in this modified example.

In step S5001, a process is performed to grasp the value corresponding to the advantageous zone increase/decrease number MY (MY counter) managed by the main control device 101. For example, each time the MY update process is performed on the main control device 101 side, a MY command indicating the current value of the MY counter is output to the display control device 81, and the display control device 81 can also grasp the latest information of the MY counter.

In the next step S5002, based on the information obtained in step S5001, it is determined whether the MY counter is 2350 or more, i.e., whether there are only a few coins remaining until the upper limit increase of 2400 coins (below a specific number, 50 coins or less). If there are fewer than 2350 coins, the specific notification lottery process ends. In this case, the specific notification lottery is not executed, and therefore no specific notification is issued. If there are only a few coins remaining until the upper limit increase, it is determined in step S5003 whether a lottery-done flag has been set in the various flags storage area 183a. The lottery-done flag is a flag that allows the CPU 181 to determine that a specific notification lottery has already been executed in the current favorable zone. If the lottery-done flag is set, the specific notification lottery process ends.

If the lottery completed flag has not been set, in step S5004, a process is executed to grasp information corresponding to the presence or absence of an excess flag managed by the main control unit 101. As already explained, the excess flag is a flag that is set in the remaining game number management process (step S1504) or remaining number management process (step S1506) in the second interval display process (Figure 44), and is a flag that indicates that a forced termination condition has already been determined to be met based on the current advantageous interval game number AG, advantageous interval increase/decrease coin number MY, and the remaining AT mode game number. More specifically, if the sum of the current number of games in the favorable zone AG and the number of remaining games in the AT mode (including the later added number) exceeds the upper limit number of games (1500 games), the first excess flag is set in the remaining number of games management process, and if the sum of the current number of increases or decreases in the favorable zone MY, the number of remaining games in the AT mode (including the later added number) and the planned payout number calculated from the average net increase in each game exceeds the upper limit increase number (2400), the second excess flag is set in the remaining number management process. That is, in step S5004, it is determined whether the first excess flag or the second excess flag has already been set on the main control device 101 side. Note that when the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set on the main control device 101 side, a command including corresponding information is output to the display control device 81, and the above determination is made by identifying the command.

Then, in step S5005, a process of acquiring a specific notification lottery table from the various table storage area 182a is executed, and in step S5006, a specific notification lottery is executed. As shown in FIG. 109(b), the specific notification lottery table is set so that the winning probability of the specific notification lottery differs between when any excess flag is set and when none of the excess flags are set, and also differs depending on the setting value. More specifically, when any excess flag is set, the specific notification lottery is set to be won with a higher probability than when the excess flag is set, regardless of the high or low setting value, and in this modified example, the winning probability is set to 100%. When none of the excess flags are set, the lower the setting, the less likely it is to win the specific notification lottery, and the higher the setting, the easier it is to win the specific notification lottery. For example, the winning probability is set to 50% with setting 1, and 100% with setting 6.

After the special notification lottery is performed in step S5006, a determination is made in step S5007 as to whether or not the notification lottery has been won. If a win has been made, a process is performed in step S5008 to set a special notification win flag in the various flag storage area 183a. If a non-win is determined in step S5007 or after the special notification win flag has been set in step S5008, a process is performed in step S5009 to set a lottery-done flag, and then the special notification lottery process is terminated.

In the reserved shift processing, after executing the specific notification lottery processing in step S4907, it is determined in step S4908 whether the specific range counter TC is 3 or less. If it is greater than 3, the reserved shift processing is terminated as it is, and if it is 3 or less, it is determined in step S4909 whether the specific range counter TC is 0 or not. If the specific range counter TC is not 0 but is 1 to 3, it is determined in step S4910 whether the AT mode is in effect. In this modified example, since the specific notification is performed during the AT mode, if the AT mode is not in effect, the reserved shift processing is terminated as it is. If the AT mode is in effect, it is determined in step S4911 whether the above-mentioned specific notification winning flag is set. If the specific notification winning flag is set, the process of setting the specific notification flag is executed in step S4912, and then the reserved shift processing is terminated. If the specific notification winning flag is not set, the reserved shift processing is terminated as it is without setting the specific notification flag. Also, if the specific range counter TC is 0 in step S4909, the presence or absence of the specific notification flag is checked in step S4913, and if it is set, it is cleared, and if it is not set, the state is maintained. After that, the process for the reserved shift is terminated.

Figure 110 is a flowchart showing the process for notifying the push order in this modified example. In this modified example, the process when a fall replay is won is different from the process when a push order bell is won.

In other words, if it is determined in step S5104 that a fall replay has been won, it is determined in step S5105 whether or not the specific notification flag has been set. If the specific notification flag has not been set, it is determined in step S5106 whether or not a push order notification command has been received, and if it has been received, a push order notification performance for the first replay is performed in step S5107, and then the push order notification process is terminated. If a push order notification command has not been received in step S5106, the push order notification process is terminated as is.

If the special notification flag is set in step S5105, processing is performed in step S5108 to execute a special notification, and processing is performed in step S5109 to notify the push order for the second replay and in step S5107 to notify the push order for the first replay, before terminating this push order notification processing. In this case, the auxiliary display unit 65 notifies the push order corresponding to the second replay and notifies the user that the advantageous zone can be ended, and also notifies the push order corresponding to the first replay and notifies the user that the advantageous zone can be continued.

If it is determined in step S5122 that the push order bell has been won, it is determined in step S5123 whether or not a push order notification command has been received, and if it has been received, it is determined in step S5123 whether or not a specific notification win flag has been set. If it has not been set, in step S5124, processing for the push order notification effect corresponding to the first small win (small win with 9 coins paid out) is performed, and then the main push order notification processing is terminated. In contrast, if the specific notification win flag is set in step S5123, processing for the push order notification effect corresponding to the second to 26th small wins (small win with 3 coins paid out) is performed in step S5124, and then the main push order notification processing is terminated.

In other words, by setting the special notification winning flag, when the push order bell is won, a push order notification for the 2nd to 26th minor roles, which have a small number of medals paid out, will be made. Furthermore, when the AT counter C is obtained within a specific range, the special notification flag is set, and when a fall replay is won during the AT mode, a special notification will be made. Note that in the push order notification process, other processes than those described above are the same as those in Figure 100, so their explanation will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 111(c), for example, even if an AT counter C within a specific range is obtained at timing t1 when the MY counter in the AT mode is not near the upper limit (less than 2350), a specific notification lottery is not performed, so the specific notification winning flag is not set. In that case, since the specific notification flag is not set, even if the specific range counter TC becomes 1 to 3 and a fall replay is won, a specific notification is not performed. In this case, a push order notification effect for the first replay win occurs, and the advantageous zone and AT mode can continue. In addition, since the specific notification winning flag is not set when the MY counter is not near the upper limit, as shown in FIG. 111(a), the push order notification effect when the push order bell is won corresponds to the first minor role, and by operating the stop switches 42 to 44 according to the push order notification effect, nine medals can be paid out (an increase of six medals), and it is possible to increase the number of medals held.

When the MY counter reaches near its upper limit at time t2, a special notification lottery is held. If the special notification lottery is won, a special notification winning flag is set. As a result, for example, if the push order bell is won at time t3, a push order notification effect corresponding to the second to twenty-sixth minor prizes, rather than the first minor prize, will be played, as shown in FIG. 111(b). As a result, when stop switches 42-44 are operated in accordance with the push order notification effect, three medals will be paid out (an increase of zero medals), and the medal increase speed will slow down, and in this modified example, medals will not increase. In other words, when the MY counter reaches near its upper limit, a push order notification will be generated to prevent the upper limit from being reached when the push order bell is won.

Then, when an AT counter C within the specific range is obtained slightly before the timing of t4 and the AT counter C is stored in the area below the third memory area RE3 at the timing of t4, a specific notification occurs when a fall replay is won. By operating according to the notification that establishes the second replay win among the specific notifications, the advantageous zone ends and the AT mode also ends. In this case, in the process for ending the advantageous zone, the initialization process of the advantageous zone game number AG and the MY counter is performed. After that, when the AT counter C within the specific range is used for the AT mode transition lottery at the timing of t5 during the normal zone, if the first specific role is won, the AT mode transition lottery will be won and the game will transition again to the advantageous zone.

As described above, by issuing a specific notification near the upper limit of the advantageous zone, it is possible to provide a chance to reset the advantageous zone, realizing the consecutive win nature of the AT mode. Furthermore, when the upper limit of the advantageous zone is reached and the AT mode is forcibly terminated, the player is likely to expect that the AT mode will continue for some time to come, which may cause a decrease in motivation to play. However, by making it possible to reset the AT mode near the upper limit as described above, it is possible to prevent this decrease in motivation to play.

In particular, when the number of remaining games exceeds the upper limit of the number of games in the advantageous zone or is likely to exceed the upper limit increase, it is made easier to win the special notification lottery, which makes it possible to more effectively prevent the decline in motivation to play as described above.

In this case, there are many conditions for consecutive wins in the AT mode to occur, such as obtaining an AT counter C within a specific range even when the upper limit of the advantageous zone is reached, winning a fall replay while the AT counter C is obtained, and even if the zone is transitioned to the normal zone, the AT counter C must not transition to the advantageous zone before the game used for the AT mode transition lottery, and the AT counter C must win the first specific role in the game used for the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, since the consecutive wins occur only when these conditions are met, it is possible to properly adjust the AT mode so that the consecutive wins do not occur too frequently, and it is possible to provide the fun of playing by getting through each of these conditions, and it is possible to appropriately increase interest.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, the present invention is not limited to the description of each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, and may be implemented, for example, as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be applied individually to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples, or may be applied to each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples in a combined form or in part or in whole. In addition, it is also possible to arbitrarily combine all or a part of the various configurations shown in each of the above-mentioned embodiments and each of the modified examples. In this case, it is preferable that the technical significance (effects exerted) of each of the configurations to be combined is guaranteed. Each of the following configurations may be applied individually to a new configuration consisting of a combination of the embodiments and the modified examples, or may be applied in a combined form or in part or in whole.

(1) Based on the establishment of the termination condition of the RB state, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by the AT counter C acquired in advance. However, in a state that ends when a predetermined termination condition is established, the AT mode transition lottery is performed by the AT counter C acquired in advance based on the establishment of the predetermined termination condition. For example, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the establishment of the termination condition of the BB state, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the establishment of the termination condition of the CB state or the RT state, or the AT mode transition lottery may be performed based on the establishment of the termination condition of the internal state in which the BB win or the RB win is carried over (based on the establishment of the BB win or the RB win). In addition, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed in a game in which a predetermined termination condition is established, and the timing of the AT mode transition lottery is not limited to the end of the game in which the predetermined termination condition is established. For example, if the upper payout limit is reached in the current game and a predetermined end condition is met regardless of the operation mode of the current game, or if a predetermined end role (a punk role) is won and a predetermined end condition is met in the game in which the predetermined end role is won, it may be determined that the predetermined end condition is met in the game without waiting for the end of the game. Therefore, in such a configuration, the AT mode transition lottery may be held at any point in the game in which the predetermined end condition is met.

(2) The termination condition for the RB state is set as 110 medals being paid out, but it may be a smaller or larger number. The termination condition is not limited to this, and may be established, for example, when the number of medals increased in the RB state reaches a specific number (110), or when the number of medals decreased reaches a specific number. The termination condition may also be established when a small prize or other prize is won a specified number of times. Furthermore, even if the above termination conditions are not established, the RB state may be terminated when the RB state is played for a predetermined maximum number of games. In these cases, the game for which the termination condition is established may be configured to vary based on the game results (lottery results, operation of the stop switches 42 to 44, winning results, etc.) of each game in the RB state.

(3) The conditions for ending the RB state may be different between the first RB state and the second RB state. In addition, the conditions for ending the RB state may be different depending on the game state at the time of winning the RB or winning a prize, the game state at the time of ending (normal game state, first RT state to third RT state), or the display mode (normal mode, CZ mode, AT mode).

(4) In the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB, the value of the AT counter C associated with winning the AT mode transition may be different between the first RB state and the second RB state, and the number of AT counters C associated with winning the AT mode transition may be different, such that it is easier or harder to win in the second RB state than in the first RB state. In addition, the value of the AT counter C associated with winning the AT mode transition in the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB may be different depending on the game state and display mode at the time of RB winning, winning, and ending. In addition, the value of the AT counter C associated with winning the AT mode transition may be different depending on the setting value. In these cases, the AT counters C may be set so that although the associated AT counter C values are different, the winning probability is the same or similar.

(5) Depending on the content of the game until the end condition of the RB state is established, the value of the AT counter C associated with the winning of the AT mode transition lottery at the end may be different. For example, the value of the AT counter C that results in the winning of the AT mode transition may be different depending on the number of times that a strong cherry is won during the RB state. In this case, the value of the AT counter C may be set so that the more times it is won, the more likely it is that the AT mode transition will be won. Although the value of the AT counter C that results in the winning of the AT mode transition differs depending on the number of times it is won, the probability of winning the AT mode transition may be the same or the same.

(6) The RB state has been described under the assumption that it is more likely that medals will be paid out than in the state before the transition, which is advantageous to the player. However, for example, it may be a state in which it is less likely that medals will be paid out than in the state before the transition, which is disadvantageous to the player. Also, the AT mode has been described under the assumption that it is more advantageous to the player than in the previous mode because push order notifications are made, which allows the player to expect an increase in the number of medals held. However, it may be a mode in which push order notifications are made less likely to occur than in the previous mode, or because unfavorable push order notifications are made more likely to occur, which is disadvantageous to the player.

(7) The lottery information storage area 106f is configured to be capable of storing reserved information (AT counter C information) for a number of games less than the number of games required to establish the RB state termination condition, but it may be configured to be capable of storing reserved information for a number of games more than the number of games required to establish the RB state termination condition. In this configuration, the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB can be performed using the AT counter C acquired before the RB state transition. In this case, it is preferable to configure the RB win to be established or not established (RB misses may occur) so that the transition game to the RB state can be adjusted by the player. In this way, it is also possible to realize a game in which the content of the AT mode transition lottery at the end of RB can be adjusted based on the AT counter C acquired in advance and the transition game to the RB state.

(8) At the end of RB, a lottery for transition to AT mode is performed using the AT counter C acquired in advance. However, at the end of RB, a lottery for whether or not to grant a bonus may be performed using random number information acquired in advance. For example, a lottery for whether or not to generate a setting suggestion effect may be performed at the end of RB using random number information acquired in advance, a lottery for whether or not to display a rare image may be performed at the end of RB, or a lottery for adding the number of games in AT mode or a lottery for transition to a specialized zone where the probability of winning the additional lottery is higher may be performed at the end of RB.

Furthermore, the configuration is not limited to performing only one of these lotteries, and multiple lotteries may be performed at the end of RB. In this case, for example, if the RB state is ended in a first game (e.g., the eighth game after the start of RB), it is easy to win the first lottery (e.g., the lottery for transition to AT mode), but it is difficult to win a second lottery different from the first lottery (e.g., the lottery for the occurrence of a setting suggestion effect), and if the RB state is ended in a game different from the first game (e.g., the ninth game after the start of RB), it is difficult to win the first lottery, but it is easy to win the second lottery. In this way, the configuration may be such that the results obtained differ if the ending game is changed depending on the counter value stored for each game and the content of the lottery.

(9) Although the first special image P1 to the third special image P3 have been described as the pending display corresponding to the AT counter C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f, the form of the pending display is not limited to this and may be other forms, and the type is not limited to the above. Furthermore, instead of a configuration in which the AT counter C and the pending display to be displayed correspond one-to-one, a configuration in which multiple pending displays are associated with one AT counter C and the pending display to be displayed is determined through a lottery or the like so that one pending display can be selected and displayed from the multiple pending displays may be configured.

(10) Although the configuration is such that the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in each game during the second RB state, for example, the configuration may be such that the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted or permitted depending on the lottery results of each game during the second RB state. For example, if the lottery results of each game during the second RB state are a strong cherry during RB or a first role during RB, which have a difference in winning probability depending on a set value, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery may be restricted, whereas if the lottery results are a second role during RB or a third role during RB, which have no difference in winning probability depending on a set value, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery may be permitted.

(11) The AT mode transition lottery is conducted in the ending game of the second RB state, while execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the games prior to that. However, any configuration may be adopted as long as it includes games prior to the ending game in which execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted. For example, the AT mode transition lottery may be restricted in the carryover state from the second RB winning game to the winning game, while execution of the AT mode transition lottery is permitted in each game during the second RB state.

(12) The RB end game is moved forward or backward depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in each game in the second RB state, and the game to be executed in the AT mode transition lottery is different, but it is sufficient that the game to be executed in the AT mode transition lottery is different depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the game in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, and the situation in which the AT mode transition lottery is restricted is not limited to the second RB state. For example, it may be a carryover state of the second RB. In addition, the end game is moved forward or backward on the premise that the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the end game of the second RB state, but while the AT mode transition lottery is performed in the game after the end of the second RB state, the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted in the game during the second RB state, and the end game is moved forward or backward depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 of the game during the second RB state, and the game to be executed in the AT mode transition lottery after the end of the second RB state may also be different.

(13) In the second RB state, in which the execution of the AT mode transition lottery is restricted, the end game is configured to be earlier or later depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game in which a strong cherry is won during the RB. However, for example, the end game may be configured to be earlier or later depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in a predetermined replay winning game during the second RB state.

(14) The lottery table during the second RB state is not limited to the above. For example, it may be possible to win a missed role with no set difference in the winning probability, or to win a predetermined replay, or to win multiple minor roles with different payout numbers. In addition, it may be possible to win a predetermined ending role, and the second RB state may or may not end depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the predetermined ending role is won, or it may be possible to end the second RB state regardless of the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the predetermined ending role is won. In a configuration in which the second RB state is ended regardless of the operation mode when the predetermined ending role is won, it is preferable to set a different ending condition and make it possible to make the success or failure of the different ending condition different depending on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44.

(15) In a configuration in which the end game of the second RB state differs depending on the result of the game during the second RB state, an AT mode transition lottery is performed regardless of the result of the end game. However, in a configuration in which the game in which the AT mode transition lottery is performed changes depending on the result of the game, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed regardless of the result of the game. For example, the AT mode transition lottery may be performed when a specific number of times a specific small role is won (number of times the push order bell is won) or a specific number of times a specific small role is won (number of times the first small role is won) during the normal game state reaches a specific number, and the game result may not be referenced when the specific number is reached and the AT mode transition lottery is performed.

(16) The configuration of the first JAC state and the second JAC state is not limited to the above. For example, in the first JAC state, only the first JAC small win is won, and in the second JAC state, only the second JAC small win is won. However, in the first JAC state, the first JAC small win and the second JAC small win can be won, and the first JAC small win is easier to win than the second JAC small win. In the second JAC state, the first JAC small win and the second JAC small win can be won, and the second JAC small win is easier to win than the first JAC small win. In addition, the JAC state is configured to end when the number of times the JAC minor feature has been won (number of times a prize) reaches a specified number (three times), but the JAC state may also be configured to end when the number of games in the JAC state reaches a predetermined number (for example, five times). In this case, when the number of games in the JAC state reaches the specified number, the JAC state may also be configured to end even if the number of times the JAC minor feature has been won (number of times a prize) has not reached the specified number.

(17) In a configuration in which a JAC can be won during an RB state, the condition for ending the RB state may be met when the number of JAC wins or the number of JAC states reaches a specified number (e.g., two times). In this case, if the RB state ends based on the end of the JAC state when the specified number is reached, a lottery for transition to the AT mode may be held in the ending game.

(18) Although the strong cherry in RB is set as the trigger role for the execution lottery of the reserved display during the RB state, other results such as the first role in RB, the second role in RB, the third role in RB, a miss result, the push order bell, etc. may be the trigger role for the execution lottery, and the number of trigger roles may not be one or more. In this case, the trigger role may be a result with a set difference in the winning probability, or a result with no set difference. Furthermore, the trigger role may be a result that may cause a miss, or a result that may not cause a miss. In these cases, not only the presence or absence of the execution lottery, but also the winning probability of the execution lottery may be different. For example, a strong cherry in RB is more likely to win the execution lottery, and a first role in RB is less likely to win the execution lottery, or when a strong cherry in RB is won, it is easier to win the execution lottery if it is missed than if a strong cherry in RB is won, or vice versa. Also, the configuration may be such that an execution lottery for the reserved display is performed for each game regardless of the lottery result of the game. Furthermore, the probability of winning the execution lottery for the reserved display may be varied depending on the number of games played during the RB state, and may be set so that the more games played, the easier it is to win. Although a setting difference is set for the probability of winning the execution lottery, there may be no setting difference.

(19) Although the advantageous zone is terminated and transitioned to the normal zone based on the second replay winning, the game result that triggers the end of the advantageous zone is not limited to the second replay winning, and may be another result. For example, a predetermined end result may be set as a lottery result for each game, and the advantageous zone may be terminated and transitioned to the normal zone based on the winning of the predetermined end result, or based on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 in the game in which the predetermined end result is won (whether or not the predetermined end result is won, or the stopped pattern at the time of winning). In a configuration in which the end of the advantageous zone depends on the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the predetermined end result is won, it is preferable to configure the auxiliary display unit 65 or the like to notify the operation mode that enables the advantageous zone to be terminated as a specific notification. Furthermore, the game that ends the advantageous zone is not limited to a winning game with a predetermined end result. For example, if the predetermined end result is a result that can be carried over if no winning is achieved in the winning game, such as the first RB or the second RB, the advantageous zone may be ended by achieving the winning of the predetermined end result in a situation in which the predetermined end result is won. In other words, in a configuration in which the predetermined end result winning game and the predetermined end result winning game are different, the advantageous zone may not be ended in the predetermined end result winning game, but may be ended in the predetermined end result winning game.

(20) The condition for ending the advantageous zone may be, for example, a condition that can be met by the operation mode of the stop switches 42 to 44 when the advantageous zone game count AG reaches a predetermined number (100, 200, 300, etc.). In this case, if there is an AT counter C within a specific range as the stored AT counter C before the predetermined number is reached, a notification of the operation mode that allows the advantageous zone to end when the predetermined number is reached may be made, whereas if there is no AT counter C within the specific range, a notification of the operation mode may not be made even when the predetermined number is reached.

(21) Although it is possible to win a fall replay that triggers the end of the advantageous zone in each game state, the configuration may include game states in which a fall replay is not won. In addition, the probability of winning a fall replay in each game state is not limited to the above, and for example, it may be configured such that it is easier to win a fall replay in game states that do not correspond to the AT mode, such as the normal game state or the first RT state, than in game states that correspond to the AT mode, such as the second RT state or the third RT state.

(22) Although the advantageous zone is ended when the second replay win is achieved or when the second replay win is achieved by the third stopped symbol, the advantageous zone may be ended in a manner that includes a specific notification as a condition for ending the advantageous zone. For example, the advantageous zone may not be ended if the second replay win is achieved but a specific notification is not made, and the advantageous zone may be ended if the second replay win is achieved in a situation where a specific notification is made.

(23) When a specific notification is made that allows the second replay winning to be achieved and the advantageous zone to end, a notification is also made that allows the first replay winning to be achieved and the advantageous zone to not end. However, it is sufficient that the notification is capable of identifying the operation mode that allows the advantageous zone to end. Even in this case, a player who does not want the advantageous zone to end can operate in a different operation mode, and can prevent the advantageous zone from ending.

(24) Although a specific notification is made to enable the end of the advantageous zone on the condition that the AT counter C is within a specific range that is likely to be won if it is provided in the AT mode transition lottery during the normal zone, a specific notification may be made to enable the end of the advantageous zone regardless of the AT counter C. In this case, for example, if the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches a predetermined number of games without winning the AT mode transition lottery, a penalty game that causes an unfavorable event to the player may be generated, and a specific notification may be made to enable the end of the advantageous zone before the number of games in the advantageous zone reaches the predetermined number of games.

(25) Although the specific notification is performed when the forced termination condition of the favorable zone is about to be established, the specific notification may be performed when the AT mode reaches a predetermined number of games during the AT mode. For example, if the specific notification winning flag is set through a specific notification lottery when the number of games executed in the AT mode reaches 50 games or more as a first predetermined number of games, and the specific notification is performed when a fall replay is won in a situation where an AT counter C within a specific range is present in a predetermined area, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which it becomes easier to win consecutive games when the AT mode reaches the first predetermined number of games or more. In this case, by ending the AT mode when the second predetermined number of games, which is greater than the first predetermined number of games, reaches 60 games, and limiting the period in which the specific notification can be performed, gameplay such as how to obtain an AT counter C within a specific range within that period and gameplay such as whether a fall replay is won in a situation where an AT counter C within that specific range is stored is added, and it is possible to realize an unprecedented and innovative gameplay.

In addition, the execution of the special notification may be determined not by the number of games executed in the AT mode, but by the number of medals paid out or the number of medals increased during the AT mode. For example, when the number of medals paid out or the number of medals increased reaches or exceeds a first predetermined number (100 medals), a special notification winning flag is set through a special notification lottery, and the special notification is executed when a fall replay is won in a situation where an AT counter C within a specific range is present in a predetermined area. In this case, too, the AT mode is terminated when the second predetermined number, which is greater than the first predetermined number, reaches 120 medals, and the period during which the special notification can be issued is limited, thereby adding gameplay such as how to obtain an AT counter C within a specific range within that period and whether a fall replay is won in a situation where an AT counter C within that specific range is stored, making it possible to realize unprecedented and innovative gameplay.

(26) When the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, it is easier to win the specific notification lottery than when neither excess flag is set. However, the ease of winning the specific notification lottery may differ depending on whether the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set. In addition, the probability of winning the specific notification lottery may differ depending on the number of times the game result that triggers the additional lottery is won after the first excess flag or the second excess flag is set, or the number of games that are added if an additional lottery is played even after the excess flag is set. The probability of winning the specific notification lottery may be higher the more times the game result that triggers the additional lottery is won or the more games that are added.

(27) As the first specific role, in addition to the normal replay and push order bell, which are easy to win, so-called rare roles such as strong cherries and weak cherries, which are difficult to win, are set. However, if the configuration includes at least the normal replay and push order bell, which are easy to win in the normal section, it is possible to expect the effect of increasing the probability of the first specific role becoming a winning opportunity in the AT mode transition lottery using the AT counter C within the specific range.

(28) When the AT mode transition lottery is performed with the first specific role, if the AT counter C is within the specific range, it will be a win regardless of the type of the first specific role. However, the AT counter C value that will be the AT mode transition win may be different depending on the type of the first specific role. In this case, for example, in a normal replay, the AT mode transition win is when the AT counter C is "0" to "80", in a push order bell, the AT mode transition win is when the AT counter C is "11" to "70", and in a no-question bell, the AT counter C is "15" to "91". In this way, it is preferable to have a common part of the AT counter C (in the above example, "15" to "70") corresponding to each result included in the first specific role, and to set the common part as the specific range. The same applies to the second specific role, and the AT counter C value that will be the AT mode win may be different depending on the type of the second specific role.

(29) When the AT mode transition lottery is won due to the first or second specific role, a common process (a process for setting the common AT mode benefit) is performed regardless of the type of the first or second specific role. However, the subsequent process may be different depending on the type of the first or second specific role when the AT mode transition lottery is won. More specifically, the type of AT mode to be transitioned to and the benefit may be different. For example, a more advantageous AT mode may be set for a player when the AT mode transition lottery is won by a strong cherry or weak cherry as the first specific role than when the AT mode transition lottery is won by a normal replay or push order bell as the first specific role (for example, the number of initial games is greater for a strong cherry, etc.).

(30) Results whose winning probability does not change depending on the game state are set as the first specific role and the second specific role, but results whose winning probability changes depending on the game state may be configured to include, for example, a push order replay as the first specific role, or, for example, a specific replay that may result in a cherry replay or a watermelon replay as the second specific role.

(31) In a configuration in which the first specific role is won before returning to the advantageous zone when the game is moved from the advantageous zone to the normal zone, and the AT mode transition is won by winning the first specific role, the first specific role may be configured to include all results as the lottery results of each game. In this case, by preventing the lottery results of each game from being a miss, it is possible to perform the AT mode transition lottery with the first specific role regardless of the lottery results of the game in the normal zone. As a configuration in which a miss does not occur, for example, a specific result is provided in which a predetermined number (1 coin) of medals is paid out when the prize is won, which is less than other payout results, and the point value PV of the miss result in each of the above embodiments is allocated to the specific result, so that it is possible to prevent a miss while reducing the impact on the medal increase/decrease number per game. In this case, the AT counter C corresponding to the first specific role is not limited to the above, and for example, a specific range may be determined such that a predetermined percentage of the value of the AT counter C, approximately 20%, corresponds to the first specific role. Then, if all of the above results are set as the first specific role, and if the first specific role is set, there is a high probability (100%) of winning the advantageous zone transition lottery, then in the normal zone, about 20% of the games that result in the first specific role will win the AT mode transition lottery and transition to the advantageous zone, and the rest will transition to the advantageous zone without winning the AT mode transition lottery. In other words, it is possible to realize a gameplay in which the normal zone is limited to one game, and a certain percentage of that one game will win the AT mode transition lottery.

(32) In a configuration in which, when a transition from an advantageous zone to a normal zone occurs, the first specific role is won before returning to the advantageous zone, resulting in a win for transition to the AT mode, the probability of returning to the advantageous zone per game (probability of not resulting in a loss) may be configured to vary depending on a set value, and the probability of returning to the advantageous zone per game may be configured to vary depending on the game state when transitioning from the advantageous zone to the normal zone.

(33) In a configuration in which, when a transition from an advantageous zone to a normal zone occurs, the first specific role is won before a return to the advantageous zone, resulting in a transition to the AT mode being won, the presence or absence of a specific notification may differ depending on the number of AT counters C stored in the lottery information storage area 106f within a specific range that would result in a transition to the AT mode being won if it were the first specific role. For example, a specific notification may be issued when a fall replay is won when a specific number (three) or more AT counters C are stored within the specific range, whereas a specific notification may not be issued if the number is less than the specific number, even if a fall replay is won.

(34) The ball output rate is changed depending on each setting value, and setting 1 has the lowest ball output rate and setting 6 has the highest ball output rate. However, any configuration may be used as long as the rate of increase or decrease or the manner of increase or decrease of the ball output (game media) changes depending on the setting value. For example, the ball output rates of some setting values may be the same, such as setting 1 and setting 2 having the same ball output rate, and the ball output rates of other setting values may be different. Also, settings 1, 3, and 5 may have a high rate of increase or decrease in ball output, and settings 2, 4, and 6 may have a low rate of increase or decrease in ball output. Also, settings 1 and 5 may increase the ball output by a predetermined amount in a short time and decrease the ball output by a predetermined amount in a long time, settings 2, 3, and 4 take a longer time to increase the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5 and take a shorter time to decrease the predetermined amount than settings 1 and 5, and setting 6 hardly increases or decreases the ball output. In these cases, the ball output rates of each setting value may be the same.

(35) Although a slot machine having three reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration and may be, for example, a slot machine having five reels and corresponding stop switches arranged in parallel. From the viewpoint of preventing erroneous operations when stopping the reels, at least two reels and corresponding stop switches are sufficient. Also, although a slot machine in which the number of active lines is set to one when the number of bets is three has been described, the present invention is not limited to this configuration and may be, for example, five active lines.

(36) Although a specific example of a slot machine 10 has been shown, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine that combines a slot machine and a pachinko machine. In other words, instead of the medal insertion and medal payout functions of a slot machine, the present invention may be a gaming machine that has a ball insertion and ball payout function like a pachinko machine (a so-called ball-using reel gaming machine). If such a gaming machine is used in place of a slot machine, the gaming hall can handle only balls as gaming value, which can eliminate problems seen in current gaming halls where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed, such as the burden on facilities due to the separate handling of medals and balls as gaming value, and restrictions on the location of gaming machines.

For example, in a pachinko machine or a reel-type game machine using balls, the setting values that change the payout rate and the like may be configured to have multiple stages, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied as suggestions or instructional effects for these setting values. In this case, in a pachinko machine that has a high probability state and a low probability state where the probability of a jackpot is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high probability state, and in a pachinko machine that has a high ball entry state and a low ball entry state where the rate of balls entering a predetermined ball entry section is high and low, the advantageous zone in the slot machine 10 may be applied as the high ball entry state, and the above-mentioned inventions may be applied.

<Inventions extracted from the above embodiments>
The following describes characteristic configurations extracted from each of the above-mentioned embodiments, while indicating effects, etc., as necessary. Note that in the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configurations in the above-mentioned embodiments are appropriately indicated in parentheses, etc., but the present invention is not limited to the specific configurations indicated in parentheses, etc.

The inventions shown in the following feature groups have been made with a problem to be solved by the invention, which is based on the background technology that "Pachinko machines, slot machines, etc. are known as a type of gaming machine. In these gaming machines, an internal lottery is held when a predetermined lottery condition is met, and a bonus is awarded to the player depending on the result of the internal lottery. Specifically, in a slot machine, when a start lever is operated with medals as a gaming medium betted, an internal lottery is held and the reels start to spin. If a stop switch is operated while the reels are spinning, the reels stop spinning. If the reels stop corresponding to the result of the internal lottery, a bonus corresponding to the result is awarded (see, for example, JP 2008-295707 A)." The problem to be solved by the invention is that "In the gaming machines exemplified above, it is necessary to improve the entertainment value of the game, and there is still room for improvement in this regard."

<Features Group A>
Feature A1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine including a gaming state transition means (a function of executing a bonus state process by a main control device 101) for transitioning a gaming state to a specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined transition condition, and terminating the specific state based on the establishment of a predetermined termination condition,
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing an AT selection process by the main control device 101) that can use the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to select whether or not a predetermined specific event (transition to an AT mode) will occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery being a specific result (a win for transitioning to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific lottery means is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing for an end-time AT lottery by the main control unit 101) that can execute the specific lottery when the termination condition of the specific state is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game and the rotation of the circling body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means is used to determine whether or not a specific event will occur, and the specific information is acquired in advance in the specific lottery using the specific information, and a completely different gameplay is realized from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the circling body.

In addition, when the game state is a specific state, a specific lottery is also performed when the end condition for the specific state to end is satisfied. Therefore, the specific lottery performed at the end of the specific state is configured to be performed using specific information acquired in the game before the game in which the specific state ends, i.e., during the specific state. In this way, after the acquisition condition is satisfied during the game in the specific state, the fun of whether or not the end condition is satisfied is added. In other words, if the specific event is favorable for the player, the player will try to satisfy the end condition while hoping that the specific event will occur, and if the specific event is unfavorable, the player will try to satisfy the end condition while hoping that the specific event will not occur. On the other hand, if the specific state is favorable for the player, the player will not like the end condition to be satisfied, and if it is unfavorable, the player will feel the opposite. In other words, the relationship between the advantages and disadvantages of the specific state and the advantages and disadvantages of the specific event makes it possible to draw great interest in whether the end condition is satisfied, thereby improving the game.

The "specific information storage means capable of storing the specific information" may be expressed as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information" or as "specific information storage means capable of storing a predetermined number of the specific information, which is a predetermined plurality." Such changes in expression may also be applied to other features and other groups of features.

Feature A2. The specific information acquisition means is configured to acquire the specific information for each game as the game progresses,
a deletion means (a function of executing a process for a reserved shift by the main control device 101) capable of sequentially deleting the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses;
The gaming machine described in feature A1, wherein the erasing means is configured to be capable of erasing the specific information regardless of whether the specific information is used in the specific lottery by the specific lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the specific information acquisition means acquires specific information in each game, and the acquired specific information is sequentially erased regardless of whether it is the subject of a specific lottery by the specific lottery means. In other words, a specific lottery is held using specific information associated with a game in which a termination condition is met and a specific lottery is held, among the specific information sequentially erased in each game in the specific state. In this way, in a game in which a specific lottery is held by using specific information from among the acquired specific information, the selection of the specific information is closely related to the timing of whether the termination condition is met in the specific state, and it is possible to appropriately increase attention to the progress of the game in the specific state and to increase the interest of the game in the specific state.

Note that "deletion means capable of sequentially deleting the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses" may also be expressed as "shifting means capable of sequentially shifting the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses." When using this expression, the corresponding "deletion means" may be appropriately changed to "shifting means," etc. Also, it may be expressed as "deletion means capable of sequentially deleting the specific information acquired most recently by the specific information acquisition means, from among the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, as the game progresses."

Feature A3. The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or Feature A2, characterized in that it is equipped with a specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for displaying pending by the display control device 81) capable of executing a specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific lottery when the specific information stored in the specific information storage means becomes the subject of the specific lottery, by a predetermined notification means, before the specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery.

According to the above configuration, the player can play the specific state while knowing whether or not the specific lottery will be won by satisfying the conditions for ending the specific state from the content of the specific notification. In this way, it is possible to play the game in an optimal manner by utilizing the relationship between the advantages and disadvantages due to the end of the specific state and the advantages and disadvantages due to the specific event.

Feature A4. The gaming machine according to Feature A3, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification corresponding to the result of the specific lottery in a game prior to the game in which the end condition of the specific state is satisfied.

According to the above configuration, for example, in a configuration in which the player can be involved in whether or not the end condition of a specific state is met, it becomes possible for the player to determine whether or not the end condition is met while watching the specific notification. Even in a configuration in which the end condition is met is determined solely by a lottery on the gaming machine side, it becomes possible to draw great interest in the lottery result in relation to the specific notification.

Feature A5. The execution lottery means (a function of executing a reserve display lottery process by the display control device 81) is provided for executing an execution lottery on whether or not the specific notification is to be performed by the specific notification execution means;
A gaming machine described in feature A3 or feature A4, characterized in that the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification based on the result of the execution lottery by the execution lottery means being a result corresponding to the execution of the specific notification.

According to the above configuration, since the specific notification is made through an execution lottery by the execution lottery means, it is possible to create randomness in the feasibility of the specific notification. As a result, even if a specific notification is not made as an advance notification for specific information acquired in advance, it is difficult to know whether the specific notification is not made because the specific information acquired in advance is not the desired specific information, or because the specific notification is not made because the specific notification was not won in the execution lottery. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration for making a specific notification for the specific information acquired in advance from contributing to the inconvenience of reducing attention in advance.

Feature A6. The execution lottery means includes a number lottery means (a function of executing a reserve display lottery process by the display control device 81) for lottery-selecting the number of specific information to be the target of the specific notification when the specific notification is performed by the specific notification execution means;
The gaming machine according to feature A5, wherein the specific notification execution means executes the specific notification corresponding to the specific information of a number based on a lottery result by the number lottery means.

In a game in which the end game is adjusted while predicting a specific lottery at the end of a specific state using specific information obtained in advance, the number of specific information items that are the subject of a specific notification regarding the content of the specific lottery at the end is very useful for the game, and the more specific information items that are the subject of the specific notification, the better the end game can be adjusted. In the above configuration, the number is determined by lottery, so it is not enough to simply make a specific notification, but it is also possible to draw interest in the number and the lottery for that number, which can ideally increase the level of attention to the game.

Feature A7: A plurality of set values are provided that can cause changes in the increase/decrease mode or increase/decrease rate of the game media, and a setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the plurality of set values;
The gaming machine according to Feature A5 or Feature A6, wherein the probability of winning a predetermined lottery by the execution lottery means can vary depending on a setting value set by the setting means.

As configured above, by providing setting differences in the ease of executing specific notifications, etc., it becomes possible to adjust the increase rate of game media, etc., through the ease of adjusting the end game, and it is possible to more appropriately diversify games based on setting differences than by providing direct setting differences in specific lotteries.

Note that "a predetermined lottery by the execution lottery means" refers to, for example, an "execution lottery" or a "lottery for the number of specific information items to be the subject of a specific notification."

Feature A8: When a plurality of pieces of specific information are stored in the specific information storage means, the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification for each piece of specific information;
A gaming machine described in any one of features A3 to A7, characterized in that the number of specific notifications executed by the specific notification execution means is set to a number less than the minimum number of games from the transition to the specific state until the termination condition is met.

According to the above configuration, the specific notification is performed during the specific state, and while assuming the playability of playing the specific state while knowing in advance the content of the specific lottery when the end condition of the specific state is met, the number of specific notifications is set to be less than the minimum number of games for the specific state. Therefore, even if the specific notification is performed immediately after the start of the specific state, the content of the specific notification will be unrelated to the specific lottery at the end of the specific state for a while after the start of the specific state. Also, even if the specific notification is performed some time after the start of the specific state, the function of notifying the acquired specific information in advance by the specific notification in a game before the end condition of the specific state is met is guaranteed. In this way, by limiting the timing to draw attention to the specific lottery at the end of the specific state to the time close to the end of the specific state, it is possible to avoid an incident where the enjoyment of the specific state itself is diminished because the player is too concerned about the specific lottery at the end of the specific state.

Feature A9. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A8, characterized in that if the game result of a predetermined game in the specific state is a first result (a game result in which a 15-coin payout minor win is achieved in a game with 15 or fewer remaining payouts), the end condition is met in the predetermined game or a subsequent game, whereas if the game result of the predetermined game is a second result different from the first result (a game result in which a 15-coin payout minor win is not achieved in a game with 15 or fewer remaining payouts), the end condition is not met in the predetermined game or a subsequent game, or is less likely to be met than in the case of the first result.

According to the above configuration, the end condition is met or not met based on the game results of the specified game during the specific state. Therefore, the specific lottery is held or not depending on the game results of the specified game. In this way, a game feature is realized in which the execution and timing of the specific lottery are varied depending on the game results of the specified game during the specific state, and the game feature during the specific state can be favorably improved.

Feature A10. A predetermined first end result (for example, RB medium strong cherry) is set as a lottery result by the lottery means;
When the lottery result by the lottery means in the predetermined game is the first end result, and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode (the operation mode for establishing the 15 coin payout minor win), the game result of the predetermined game becomes the first result,
A gaming machine as described in feature A9, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the specified game is the first end result, and the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode (an operation mode that does not result in a 15-coin payout small win) different from the first operation mode, the game result of the specified game becomes the second result.

According to the above configuration, whether or not the end condition is met depends on the manner in which the player operates the stop operation means. This gives the player some room to decide whether or not to enter a specific lottery, encouraging active participation in the game and increasing the player's interest in the game.

Feature A11. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a predetermined second end result (for example, a first role for RB, a second role for RB, a third role for RB) different from the first end result is set,
A gaming machine as described in feature A10, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means in the specified game is the second end result, the game result of the specified game becomes the first result regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, if the lottery result of a given game is the second end result, the end condition is met without any room for player intervention, which can also heighten interest in the lottery results of each game. In particular, as in feature A9, if the lottery result is the first end result, the success or failure of the end condition can be controlled by the player's operation, so there are cases where the success or failure of the end condition can be controlled and cases where it cannot. For example, even if the player wants to extend the execution game of a specific lottery in relation to specific information, this may not always go as the player wishes, which increases the excitement of the game.

Feature A12. A plurality of set values are provided that can cause changes in the increase/decrease mode or increase/decrease rate of the game media, and a setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the plurality of set values.
The gaming machine according to any one of features A9 to A11, wherein the probability that the game result of the predetermined game will be the second result varies depending on a setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, the manner in which the game media is increased or decreased and the rate of increase or decrease can be changed depending on whether or not the execution timing of the specific lottery can be adjusted. This also makes it possible to vary the occurrence rate of a specific event depending on the set value.

Feature A13. The gaming machine described in Feature A12, characterized in that the probability that the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means will result in a result that corresponds to the occurrence of the specific event is a common probability regardless of the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, while the winning probability of the specific lottery itself is not set according to the setting value, it is possible to vary the occurrence rate of a specific event according to the setting value by adjusting or not adjusting the execution timing of the specific lottery.

Feature A14: A plurality of set values are provided that can cause changes in the increase/decrease mode or increase/decrease rate of the gaming media, and a setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the plurality of set values;
As the specific state, a first specific state (second RB state) in which there is a difference in winning probability due to a setting value set by the setting means in at least the transition lottery to the specific state, and a second specific state (first RB state) in which there is no difference in winning probability are set,
the probability of the end condition being satisfied in the first specific state and the probability of the end condition being satisfied in the second specific state are set so as not to have a difference due to a set value set by the setting means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A13, characterized in that the specific lottery means is capable of executing the specific lottery based on the termination condition of the first specific state being fulfilled, and is capable of executing the specific lottery based on the termination condition of the second specific state being fulfilled.

According to the above configuration, it is possible to execute a specific lottery based on the establishment of the end condition in both the first specific state and the second specific state, which have a setting difference in the transition probability, on the premise that there is no setting difference in the probability of the establishment of the end condition in either the first specific state or the second specific state. In this way, even if a configuration is configured in which a setting difference cannot be set as a trigger for the execution of a specific lottery, a setting difference can be set in the execution of the specific lottery.

Feature A15. The specific selection means is configured to execute the specific selection in each game in the specific state,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A14, characterized in that if the result of the specific lottery in each game in the specific state is a result that corresponds to causing the specific event, the gaming machine is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S916, S920, and S921 by the main control unit 101) capable of executing notification of the result of the specific lottery based on the establishment of the termination condition of the specific state.

According to the above configuration, the result of a specific lottery in a game during a specific state may be notified as a result of a specific lottery based on the satisfaction of an end condition. By doing this, for example, even if a player does not win a specific lottery based on the satisfaction of an end condition, if the player won a previous specific lottery, the player can be notified of this when the result of the specific lottery based on the satisfaction of an end condition is notified, making it possible to make the probability of winning the specific lottery based on the satisfaction of an end condition seem higher than the actual probability.

By applying the above configuration to the configuration of feature A14, it is possible to reduce the difference in presentation between a specific state in which a specific lottery may be held when the conditions for transitioning to the specific state are met and a specific state in which a specific lottery may not be held.

Feature A16. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A15, characterized in that when the specific lottery means performs the specific lottery using predetermined specific information based on the establishment of the end condition of the specific state, the result of the specific lottery is the same regardless of the result of the lottery by the lottery means in the game in which the specific lottery is performed.

According to the above configuration, when a specific lottery is conducted at the end of a specific state using the same specific information, the lottery result of the game at that end is not affected by the specific lottery. Therefore, the gameplay is such that the result of the specific lottery is determined by the game that satisfies the end condition and the specific information acquired in advance, and the entertainment value of the game is concentrated in how to adjust the game that satisfies the end condition. In other words, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the result of the specific lottery is overturned by the lottery result of the end game, even if the end game has been well adjusted, and it is possible to suitably improve the entertainment value of adjusting the end game.

Feature A17. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, the first operation result (first small win) is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and the second operation result (second small win to 26th small win) that may be awarded a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell).
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
A gaming machine described in any one of features A1 to A16, characterized in that the specific lottery means performs, as the specific lottery, a lottery for transitioning to an announcement state (AT mode) in which the mode announcement execution means is more likely to execute the mode announcement.

According to the above configuration, a mode result is provided in which different benefits are awarded when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode and when it is operated in the second operation mode as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, and when the mode result is won, a mode notification for the operation mode may be made in a specific state, so that a gameplay in which the benefits awarded to the player differ depending on whether or not a mode notification is made can be realized. Moreover, a specific lottery to determine whether or not to cause a transition to a notification state in which such a mode notification is made is performed based on the establishment of the end condition of the specific state, using specific information acquired in advance by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means. Therefore, a novel gameplay not seen in the past can be realized in which whether or not to transition to a notification state is determined by how the end game of the specific state is adjusted with the specific information.

Feature A18. A gaming machine according to any one of Features A1 to A17, characterized in that the condition for terminating the specific state is met when the number of gaming media paid out as the bonus by the bonus granting means, or the increase in the number of gaming media in the specific state, reaches a predetermined upper limit.

According to the above configuration, when the number of game media paid out or the increase in the number of game media in a specific state reaches the upper limit, the condition for terminating the specific state is met and a specific lottery is held, so that at least the upper limit number of game media will have been paid out when the specific lottery is played. In other words, by making it difficult to end a specific state midway before the upper limit is reached in an attempt to play a specific lottery at the end of the specific state, it is possible to make it difficult to create inconveniences such as, for example, not being able to effectively use a configuration that uses the number of game media paid out during a specific state to manage the transition and end of a specific state using a hall computer in an amusement hall (not being able to effectively grasp the transition and end of a specific state).

<Characteristics Group B>
Feature B1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific lottery means (a function for executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) capable of executing a specific lottery in a specific game to determine whether or not a predetermined specific event (transition to an AT mode) occurs;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that causes the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (a win for transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
When the stop operation means is operated in a first operation manner in a predetermined game in a specific state (second RB state) in which the execution of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means is restricted, the specific game becomes a first specific game,
A gaming machine characterized in that, when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode during the specified game in the specific state, the specific game becomes a second specific game which is a game that comes after the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, in a specific game in a specific state in which the execution of a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event occurs is restricted, when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the specific lottery is performed in the first specific game, while when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the specific game, the specific lottery is performed in the second specific game after the first specific game. In this case, if one wants to perform the specific lottery earlier, one would operate in the first operation mode, and if one wants to perform the specific lottery later, one would operate in the second operation mode, but the execution of the specific lottery is restricted in the game in which the operation mode is performed. In other words, by adopting such a configuration, it is possible to play a game without losing interest in the specific lottery, even in a situation (specific state) in which the execution of the specific lottery is restricted. Moreover, not only does the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed change depending on the lottery result of the game in that situation, but the specific game changes depending on the operation mode of the stop operation means in that situation, so that there is room for the player to intervene in the specific lottery, and interest in the game can be increased. This will increase the enjoyment of the game.

Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the bonus awarding means awards a first bonus in the predetermined game when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the predetermined game, and awards a second bonus different from the first bonus in the predetermined game when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, if an attempt is made to change the specific game in which a specific lottery is held, the bonus for that game will be different. In this way, the player can decide whether or not to play the game with feature B1, even from the perspective of whether it is worth changing the specific game in which a specific lottery is held to the point of changing the bonus for that game, which further increases the interest in that game.

Feature B3. The second benefit is less advantageous to the player than the first benefit;
A gaming machine as described in feature B2, characterized in that when the specific lottery is held in the first specific game, a first specific situation may occur in which the result of the specific lottery is more likely to be the specific result than when the specific lottery is held in the second specific game, and when the specific lottery is held in the first specific game, a second specific situation may occur in which the result of the specific lottery is less likely to be the specific result than when the specific lottery is held in the second specific game.

According to the above configuration, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode to postpone the game in which the specific lottery is held, a second benefit that is less beneficial to the player is awarded in the specified game. In this case, a first specific situation may occur in which the result of the specific lottery is more likely to be a specific result corresponding to the occurrence of a specific event, and a second specific situation may occur in which the result of the specific lottery is less likely to be. In this way, even if the second operation mode that is unfavorable to the benefit in the specified game is selected, it does not necessarily mean that it is easier to win the postponed specific lottery, and conversely, it may be easier to win the specific lottery by selecting the first operation mode that is favorable to the benefit in the specified game. Therefore, it is possible to make a more careful selection between the first operation mode and the second operation mode.

Feature B4. A gaming machine according to any one of Features B1 to B3, characterized in that in the predetermined game, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result (first combination in RB, second combination in RB, third combination in RB), the specific game does not change regardless of the operation mode of the stop operation means.

According to the above configuration, if the lottery result of the specified game is a special result, the specific game becomes the same game without any room for player intervention, and in a game where the specific game can be changed depending on the operation mode, the game may not go as the player wishes, which increases the excitement of the game.

Feature B5. In the predetermined game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (RB medium strong cherry), the specific game becomes the first specific game by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the specific game becomes the second specific game by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode,
The gaming machine described in feature B4 is characterized in that the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means when the first result is a winning combination and the bonus awarded by the bonus awarding means when the second result is a winning combination are the same.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which whether or not the specific lottery can be postponed depends on the lottery result by the lottery means, the bonus awarded upon winning is the same regardless of the lottery result. In this way, it is possible to vary the games in which the specific lottery is held while preventing any difference in the degree of advantage of the game.

Feature B6: A plurality of set values are provided that can cause changes in the increase/decrease mode or increase/decrease rate of the game media, and a setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the plurality of set values;
The gaming machine described in feature B5 is characterized in that when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means, the rate at which the lottery result by the lottery means in the specified game will be the first result and the rate at which the lottery result will be the second result are different, while the probability of either the first result or the second result being the same.

According to the above configuration, whether or not a specific game can be postponed depends on the operation mode, and the setting value determines the probability of either a postponeable result or an unpostponable result. In this way, it is possible to make the setting value the same for the probability of changing the game in which the specific lottery is performed, while making the setting value the same for the degree of advantage in the specified game that allows the change.

Feature B7: In the predetermined game, when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result (RB medium strong cherry), the specific game becomes the first specific game by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the specific game becomes the second specific game by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode,
The reward granting means includes:
when a result of the selection by the selection means is the second result and the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode, a first benefit is awarded as a benefit in the predetermined game;
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B6, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is the second result and the stop operation means is operated in the second operation manner, a second bonus that is more disadvantageous to the player than the first bonus is awarded as a bonus for the specified game, or no bonus is awarded.

According to the above configuration, when a specific game in which a specific lottery is held is postponed, the bonus for the postponed game becomes less favorable for the player than the bonus that would have been given if the game had not been postponed, or no bonus is awarded. This allows the player to choose whether or not to postpone even if it means reducing the bonus awarded, making the game more interesting.

Feature B8: The specific state is a state in which the privilege is more likely to be granted by the privilege granting means;
the specific game is a game in which the specific state ends,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B7, characterized in that in the specified game, when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode, fewer bonuses are awarded in the specific state than when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

The above configuration allows the player to choose whether to postpone the specific lottery by varying the game that ends the specific state, even if it means reducing the bonus awarded during the specific state.

Feature B9. The bonus awarding means is configured to pay out a number of game media corresponding to the result of the winning as the bonus,
The specific state is a state that ends when the number of the game media paid out after the transition reaches a predetermined upper limit number,
the specific game is a game in which the specific state ends,
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first transition result (strong JAC) is set which, if a prize is won, causes a transition to a first state (first JAC state) in which the average increase or decrease in the number of game media of each game is a first number, and a second transition result (weak JAC) is set which, if a prize is won, causes a transition to a second state (second JAC state) in which the average increase or decrease in the number of game media of each game is a second number smaller than the first number,
A gaming machine described in any one of features B1 to B8, characterized in that, in the specified game, the first transition result is achieved by operating the stop operation means in the first operation mode, and the second transition result is achieved by operating the stop operation means in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, the average increase or decrease per game is smaller in the second state compared to the first state, so the number of games played until the upper limit in the specific state is reached is greater. In this case, the number of gaming media paid out during the specific state is about the same as the upper limit increase, but when the gaming media (number of bets) used in each game are taken into account, the number of gaming media that actually increases in the specific state is smaller when transitioning to the second state. In this case, there may be cases where increasing the increase in the number during the specific state is more beneficial than postponing the specific lottery. This makes it possible to realize novel gameplay that utilizes the relationship between the specific lottery and the specific state.

Feature B10. The gaming machine described in Feature B9, characterized in that a duplicate result that is a winning combination of the first transition result and the second transition result is set as the lottery result by the lottery means.

With the above configuration, in a specific state, the overlapping result winning game becomes the specified game, and the choice of whether to achieve the first transition result winning or the second transition result winning can be made in the same game, making it possible to further highlight the game that is the core of the game.

Feature B11. The first state ends when a specific number of games have been played or a predetermined number of winnings have been achieved;
The gaming machine described in feature B10, wherein the second state ends when the specific number of games have been played or when the predetermined number of winnings have been achieved.

According to the above configuration, the number of games in the specific state does not change when transitioning to either the first state or the second state. However, as mentioned above, the number of games until the upper limit of the specific state is reached changes due to differences in the average increase/decrease. In other words, the number of games in the first state or the second state does not affect the ending games of the specific state, and the effect of feature B10 can be expected without forcibly changing the specifications in the specific state.

<Characteristics Group C>
Feature C1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) in each game based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific lottery means (a function of executing a process for lottery for the end time AT by the main control device 101) that can execute a specific lottery for determining whether or not a predetermined specific event (AT mode transition) will occur using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a specific game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
An erasing means (a function of executing a process for shifting reserved information by the main control device 101) capable of sequentially erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses, regardless of whether the specific information has been used in the specific lottery;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for causing the main control device 101 to transition to the AT mode) that causes the specific event based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (a win for transition to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
A limiting means for limiting the execution of the specific lottery in at least the game before the specific game (a function for executing a process for limiting the AT mode transition lottery during the second RB state by the main control device 101);
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game and the rotation of the circling body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, the specific information acquired in each game by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means is used to perform a specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur in a specific game after the game in which the specific information was acquired. This results in a configuration in which the specific information is acquired in advance in the specific lottery using the specific information, and a completely different gameplay is realized from conventional slot machines, which simply match the lottery result by the lottery means with the stopping result of the circling body.

Moreover, in the game preceding the specific game in which the specific lottery is held, the execution of the specific lottery is restricted, so that among the specific information acquired in each game, the specific information that matches the specific game is used in the specific lottery, but the specific information acquired in the previous game is erased without being used in the specific lottery. In this way, the specific information stored in the specific information storage means includes specific information that is subject to the specific lottery and specific information that is not, and it becomes possible to appropriately increase interest not only in the specific game but also in the game preceding the specific game, in addition to determining whether the acquired specific information is subject to the specific lottery.

Feature C2. The gaming machine described in Feature C1, characterized in that the restriction means is capable of restricting the specific lottery from being held in a game in which the specific information that is the subject of the specific lottery in the specific game is acquired by the specific information acquisition means.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature C1. With this configuration, not only is the specific lottery restricted in a game prior to the specific game, but the specific lottery is also restricted in a game in which specific information provided for the specific lottery held in the specific game is obtained, making it possible to favorably increase interest in the game prior to the specific game in which the specific information is obtained.

Feature C3. A plurality of set values are provided that can cause changes in the increase/decrease mode or increase/decrease rate of the game media, and a setting means (a function of executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the plurality of set values;
A gaming machine described in feature C1 or feature C2, characterized in that when the specific lottery means conducts the specific lottery using the common specific information, the probability that the result of the specific lottery will be the specific result is the same when a first setting value is set by the setting means and when a second setting value different from the first setting value is set by the setting means.

The above configuration eliminates setting differences, making it possible to prevent advantages and disadvantages between players depending on which gaming machine they play on in an amusement hall where multiple gaming machines are installed. This makes it possible for players to enjoy games that use specific lotteries equally.

In addition, there is no difference in the probability of winning the specific lottery, and the influence of the specific information on the result of the specific lottery is increased, making it possible to appropriately increase interest in a game in which the key point is which of the specific information stored in the specific information storage means will be used in the specific lottery.

Feature C4. The gaming machine described in Feature C3, characterized in that the outcome of the game prior to the specific game can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, while it is assumed that there is no setting difference for the specific lottery performed in the specific game, setting differences are allowed in previous games. In this way, it is possible to create a game that utilizes setting differences to the extent that it does not affect the specific lottery, and if the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed is configured to be moved forward or backward in the previous game, even if a setting difference is not set for the specific lottery, by moving the specific game forward or backward in the previous game with a setting difference, the specific information provided to the specific lottery will also be moved forward or backward, so it is also possible to indirectly affect the specific lottery with setting values through the previous game with a setting difference. In this way, it is possible to significantly improve the freedom of game design while assuming a specific lottery without setting differences.

Feature C5. As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a special result (RB medium strong cherry) whose winning probability may vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means is set;
A gaming machine as described in feature C4, characterized in that the number of games from a specified game to the specific game can change depending on whether the lottery result drawn by the lottery means in a specified game in a specific situation (RB state) prior to the specific game is the special result or not.

According to the above configuration, the specific game can be moved forward or backward depending on whether or not the lottery result with the setting difference is a winning result, and in relation to the configuration in which the specific information is sequentially erased as the game progresses, whether or not the lottery result with the setting difference is a winning result affects the specific lottery. In this way, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the specific lottery while assuming a specific lottery without setting differences.

Feature C6. The game state is transitioned to a specific state when a predetermined transition condition is satisfied, and the specific state is terminated when a predetermined termination condition is satisfied (a function of executing bonus state processing by the main control device 101).
the specific game is set as a game in which the end condition of the specific state is satisfied;
The gaming machine according to feature C4 or feature C5, wherein the transition condition is set so that the probability of it being established can vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, when the end condition of a specific state in which there is a setting difference in the probability of the transition condition being established is established, a specific lottery without a setting difference is held. In this way, a specific lottery is held in conjunction with a specific state while causing changes in the increase/decrease mode and rate of increase/decrease of gaming media depending on the transition rate to the specific state, which increases the entertainment value of the specific state with a setting difference.

Feature C7: As the specific state, a first specific state (second RB) in which the probability of the transition condition being satisfied may vary depending on the setting value set by the setting means, and a second specific state (first RB) in which the probability of the transition condition being satisfied is common regardless of the setting value set by the setting means are set;
The gaming machine described in feature C6, characterized in that the specific game is set as a game in which the end condition of the first specific state is met, and is also set as a game in which the end condition of the second specific state is met.

According to the above configuration, in either the first specific state with a setting difference or the second specific state without a setting difference, a specific lottery will be held when the end condition is met. In this way, when transitioning to a specific state or winning, there is no need to worry about whether there is a setting difference in the specific lottery, and the specific state set with the specific lottery can be enjoyed more.

Feature C8. The specific selection means is configured to execute the specific selection in a predetermined game in the specific state,
The gaming machine described in feature C7 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing the processing of steps S915, S919 and S920 by the main control unit 101) capable of executing, if the result of the specific lottery in a specified game in the specific state is a result corresponding to causing the specific event, a notification of the result of the specific lottery in the specific game based on the establishment of the termination condition of the specific state.

According to the above configuration, when a player wins a lottery to transition to a specific state, the result of the specific lottery is notified as a result of a specific lottery in a specific game based on the satisfaction of the end condition of the specific state. In this way, even if a player does not win a specific lottery in a specific game, if the player won a specific lottery earlier than that, the player can be notified of this fact when the result of the specific lottery based on the satisfaction of the end condition is notified, making it possible to make the probability of winning a specific lottery in a specific game seem higher than the actual probability.

Feature C9. The lottery results by the lottery means include a first result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result in which a prize is won when each of the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode,
A mode notification means (a function of executing a push order role process by the main control device 101) capable of executing mode notification (push order notification) regarding operation modes including the first operation mode and the second operation mode on a predetermined notification means (the first display segment N1 to the seventh display segment N7 on the indication monitor 68) based on the lottery result by the lottery means,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the specific event causes a transition to an alarm state in which a mode notification can be executed by the mode notification means.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery based on the specific information acquired in advance is a lottery for a specific event that causes a transition to a notification state that can generate navigation of the operation mode. In this way, it is possible to create a novel gameplay in which the specific information for the lottery is acquired in advance for a game using navigation of the operation mode, the specific information acquired in advance is erased sequentially as the game progresses, and further, the specific lottery is restricted in games prior to the specific game in which the specific lottery using the specific information is executed.

Feature C10. A favorable zone in which the transition to the notification state is possible and a normal zone in which the transition to the notification state does not occur or is less likely to occur than the favorable zone are set,
A gaming machine as described in feature C9, characterized in that the specific game can occur in either the advantageous zone or the normal zone.

According to the above configuration, a specific lottery is conducted in a specific game not only in an advantageous zone but also in a normal zone, and the specific lottery is restricted in games prior to the specific game. In other words, in a normal zone, a specific lottery is conducted in a specific game that follows a game in which the execution of a specific lottery is restricted, using specific information acquired in the restricted game. In this way, it is possible to increase the number of occasions in which a specific lottery is conducted in a normal zone, and to increase the enjoyment of the specific lottery.

<Feature D group>
Feature D1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing an AT selection process by the main control device 101) that can use the specific information stored in the specific information storage means to select whether or not a predetermined specific event (transition to an AT mode) will occur in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
An erasing means (a function of executing a process for shifting reserved information by the main control device 101) capable of sequentially erasing the specific information stored in the specific information storage means as the game progresses, regardless of whether the specific information has been used in the specific lottery;
A specific execution means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) that causes the specific event to occur based on the result of the specific lottery being a specific result (a win for transitioning to the AT mode) corresponding to the occurrence of the specific event;
Equipped with
The specific lottery means includes a means for executing the specific lottery in a predetermined specific game without using a lottery result by the lottery means when the specific lottery is performed using the specific information (a function for executing a process for an end time AT lottery by the main control device 101);
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a first result (for example, a strong RB cherry), the specific game becomes a first specific game;
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a second result (for example, the first combination in RB), the specific game becomes a second specific game that is later than the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, the specific lottery to determine whether or not a specific event will occur is performed by the specific information acquired in advance by the specific game, without using the lottery results of each game. In contrast, the specific game becomes the first specific game if the lottery result of the game is the first result, and becomes the second specific game after the first specific game if the lottery result of the game is the second result. In other words, in a configuration in which the specific lottery is performed without using the lottery result of the game, the lottery result of the game is indirectly involved in the game in which the specific lottery is performed (specific game). In this way, while the specific lottery is associated with the lottery results of each game, each lottery is for a different game, so that the areas to concentrate on in each game can be set separately. Furthermore, rather than a configuration in which a specific lottery is performed using the lottery results and specific information of one game, information from multiple games is involved in one specific lottery, and in a game other than the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed, interest is drawn to the lottery results by the lottery means, and in a specific game in which the specific lottery is performed, interest is drawn to the specific lottery, making it possible to set the entertainment value of each game by using one specific lottery.

Furthermore, since the specific information used in the specific lottery is specific information obtained in a game prior to the specific game, when associating multiple games with one specific lottery as described above, the game from which the specific information is obtained is also associated. This makes it possible to realize an interesting gameplay that is completely different from conventional gameplay, in which a specific lottery is performed in each game using the lottery results and specific information from one game.

Feature D2. The gaming machine described in Feature D1, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first result, if the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the specific game becomes the first specific game, and if the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the specific game becomes a game different from the first specific game.

According to the above configuration, the specific game in which the specific lottery is performed can be the first specific game or a game different from the first specific game depending on the operation mode when the lottery result of the game is the first result. Therefore, it is possible to associate not only the specific lottery with the lottery result of each game, but also the operation mode of the game, making it possible to dramatically increase interest in the game, including player intervention.

Feature D3. The gaming machine described in Feature D2, characterized in that when the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the first result, the specific game becomes the second specific game when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, depending on the operation mode in the case of the first result, the game may be the same as the specific game in the case of the second result, which is a different lottery result. In other words, even if the result is the first result, unless the player operates in the first operation mode, the lottery result by the lottery means will have no effect on which specific game will be. In this way, by specifying the degree of influence of player intervention on the specific game, it is possible to prevent the difference between players who are able to perform that operation and those who are not from becoming too large.

Feature D4. The gaming machine described in any one of Features D1 to D3, characterized in that the specific information acquisition means is configured to acquire the specific information regardless of the lottery result by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, the lottery result by the lottery means does not affect the acquisition of the specific information acquired in advance, so the lottery result by the lottery means does not result in the acquisition of specific information that is likely to win the specific lottery, or specific information that is not likely to win. Therefore, in a configuration in which a specific lottery is held using specific information acquired in advance, it is possible to prevent an event from occurring in which the lottery result of the previous game causes players to lose hope for the specific lottery. In other words, it is possible to prevent the level of attention to the specific lottery held in the specific game from decreasing in advance.

Feature D5. A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the first result or the second result includes a losing result that does not win any role in the lottery by the lottery means.

According to the above configuration, even a losing result can be configured to affect the specific lottery. In other words, even a losing result can have an impact on which specific game will be the one for which the specific lottery will be held, and this can attract great interest in the lottery results of each game.

Feature D6. A plurality of set values are provided that can cause changes in the increase/decrease mode or increase/decrease rate of the game media, and a setting means (a function for executing a process for setting the winning probability by the main control device 101) is provided to set one of the plurality of set values;
A gaming machine described in feature D5, characterized in that the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be a losing result can vary depending on a setting value set by the setting means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a losing result affects a specific lottery, a set difference is set in the probability of that losing result. With such a configuration, it is possible to adjust the increase/decrease rate of gaming media based on the winning rate of a losing result and associate it with a specific lottery. Therefore, with a relatively simple configuration, a set difference can be set in the winning probability of a specific lottery.

Feature D7: When the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, if the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, the specific game becomes the first specific game, and if the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, the specific game becomes the second specific game,
A gaming machine according to feature D5 or D6, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means is a losing result, the specific game becomes the second specific game.

According to the above configuration, the specific game in which the specific lottery is held becomes the same second specific game in the case of a losing result and in the case of the first result and operation in the second operation mode. In this case, the degree of influence that a losing result has on the specific lottery is the same as the degree of influence that a losing result has in the case of the first result and operation in the second operation mode. In other words, even if the player intervenes in the operation using the stop operation means, it will only produce an effect equivalent to that of a losing result, and fairness can be ensured by determining the scope of the player's technical intervention. Conversely, as long as a losing result is obtained, it is possible to have the same degree of influence on the specific lottery without any room for intervention, making it possible to increase anticipation for a losing result.

<Features Group E>
Feature E1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result (first small win) is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a second operation result (second small win to twenty-sixth small win) that may provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell).
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is not executable, are set;
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing a process for AT selection by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific selection as to whether or not to transition to the specific state using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific state based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the transition to the specific state;
a pre-recognition means (a function of executing a process for displaying reserved information by a display control device 81) capable of recognizing information in a game prior to the game in which the specific information stored in the specific information storage means becomes the subject of the specific lottery by the specific lottery selection means when the specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for issuing a specific notification by a display control device 81) capable of issuing a specific notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that enables a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state based on a result of the recognition by the advance recognition means in the advantageous state;
A gaming machine comprising:

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine in which, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means, a mode result is provided in which different bonuses are awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode and when it is operated in a second operation mode as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, and when the mode result is won, a mode notification about the operation mode may be made in a specific state, thereby realizing playability in which the bonus awarded to the player can be varied depending on whether or not a mode notification is made. Furthermore, the specific lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a specific state in which such a status notification is made is performed using specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means, in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information was acquired. This results in a configuration in which the specific information is acquired in advance in the specific lottery using the specific information, realizing a gameplay that is completely different from that of conventional slot machines, which simply associates the lottery results by the lottery means with the stopping results of the rotating body.

Moreover, in the above configuration, for the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means, before the specific information becomes the subject of a specific lottery, the advance grasping means grasps information about the case in which the specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery, and based on that, a specific notification may be made that enables a transition from an advantageous state, including a specific state, to a normal state. Therefore, while it is assumed that an advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state, if it would be advantageous to transition to the normal state once, it is possible to notify this in advance. This makes it possible to create new gameplay that breaks away from the simple gameplay of simply being advantageous if you are in an advantageous state, by utilizing the specific information acquired in advance, and to increase the interest of the game.

Feature E2. The gaming machine described in Feature E1, characterized in that the predetermined transition condition for transitioning from the advantageous state to the normal state is met using the results of the game.

According to the above configuration, even if the acquired specific information indicates that it would be preferable for the specific lottery to be the subject of a normal state, the state is not automatically changed to the normal state, but the change to the normal state is made possible when a change condition is met using the results of each game. In this way, it is possible to enjoy gameplay that uses the reversal of advantage and disadvantage caused by special information, without giving the player a sense of incongruity by using a conventional game in which the change from an advantageous state to the normal state occurs using the results of a game.

Feature E3. The gaming machine described in Feature E2, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification based on the game result being a special result that contributes to the establishment of the predetermined transition condition (a fall replay win that may result in a second replay win, a push order bell win that may reach the upper limit payout number, or other payout result win).

According to the above configuration, a specific notification is not issued just because the stored specific information would be better off being the subject of a specific lottery in the normal state, but is issued when the result is a special result that contributes to the establishment of a specified transition condition. By doing this, even in a situation where a transition to the normal state should be made, a notification to that effect is not issued until the situation is unavoidable, preventing the impression of the specific notification from being diluted and favorably increasing the level of attention when the specific notification is issued.

Feature E4. The gaming machine described in Feature E3, characterized in that the predetermined transition condition, which causes a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, can be established based on the game result being the special result, regardless of whether or not the specific notification is executed by the specific notification execution means.

According to the above configuration, regardless of the presence or absence of a special notification, the advantageous state transitions to the normal state based on the game result being a special result. In this way, when transitioning from an advantageous state to a normal state, there is no need to determine the presence or absence of a special notification, which simplifies processing and standardizes processing. For example, in a configuration in which the control device that manages the advantageous state and the normal state is different from the control device that issues the special notification, there is no need to communicate between the control devices whether or not a special notification has been issued when the game result is a special result.

Feature E5: The gaming machine according to feature E4, further comprising a second specific notification execution means (a function for executing a process for performing a push order notification effect for a first replay when a fall replay is won by the display control device 81) capable of executing a second specific notification that enables the predetermined transition condition to be prevented from being established when the game result in the special result in the specific state;
According to the above configuration, when a special result is obtained in a specific state, a second specific notification is made so as not to transition the advantageous state to the normal state. In this way, the advantageous state is not transitioned to the normal state just because of the special result, and the advantage of the specific state in the advantageous state can be preferably guaranteed.

Feature E6. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E5, characterized in that it is equipped with a third specific notification execution means (a function of executing processing for making a second specific notification by the display control device 81) capable of executing a third specific notification by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65) that enables the advantageous state to be maintained based on the results of the advance detection means when the advantageous state is reached.

According to the above configuration, if the result of the prior grasping means indicates that it is better to maintain the advantageous state, a third specific notification that allows the advantageous state to be maintained may be issued. In this way, it is possible to prevent a transition to the normal state even when it is better to maintain the advantageous state, and it is possible to avoid a situation in which the transition to the normal state would actually be detrimental to the player.

Feature E7. The gaming machine described in Feature E6, characterized in that the third specific notification execution means is configured to issue the third specific notification when the specific notification is issued.

According to the above configuration, since the advantageous state is fundamentally more advantageous than the normal state, by limiting the situations in which the third specific notification is made to situations in which a specific notification is made, it is possible to avoid the third specific notification becoming an annoyance.

Feature E8. The gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E7, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification when the result of the advance determination means indicates that the specific result is more likely to occur when the specific information is the subject of the specific lottery in the normal state than when the specific information is the subject of the specific lottery in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, if the state in which the pre-acquired specific information is the subject of a specific lottery is more likely to result in a specific result of transitioning to a specific state when the state is a normal state than when the state is an advantageous state, a specific notification is made that allows transition to the normal state. In this way, it is possible to realize novel gameplay in which a specific notification is used as a trigger to transition from an advantageous state to a normal state when the state is an advantageous state, and a specific lottery for the specific information that triggered the specific notification is taken in the normal state.

Feature E9. Equipped with a game number grasping means (a function of executing an addition process of the advantageous zone game number AG by the main control device 101) capable of grasping the number of games executed in a predetermined situation in the advantageous state,
The gaming machine described in feature E8, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification based on the results of the game number determination means.

According to the above configuration, a special notification is made or not made depending on the number of games played since the transition to the advantageous state. Therefore, if the ease of making a special notification is changed according to the number of games played during the advantageous state, it becomes possible to set advantages and disadvantages during the advantageous state according to the number of games played during the advantageous state. In this case, there is no practical need to change the probability of the special lottery. In other words, according to the above configuration, it becomes possible to set advantages and disadvantages during the advantageous state without changing the probability of winning the special lottery, which can greatly contribute to the creation of new gameplay.

Feature E10. The gaming machine described in Feature E9, characterized in that the specific notification execution means makes it possible or easier to execute the specific notification when the result of the game number determination means indicates that the number of games played is equal to or greater than a predetermined specific number of games.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature E9.

Feature E11. A forced termination means for terminating the specific state when a predetermined forced termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous state (a function for executing a process for termination based on the satisfaction of the forced termination condition in the section display second process by the main control device 101);
A pre-detection means (a function for executing the process of step S4901 by the main control device 101) capable of detecting in advance that the forced termination condition will be satisfied or there is a possibility that the forced termination condition will be satisfied in the game before the forced termination condition is satisfied;
Equipped with
A gaming machine described in any one of features E8 to E10, characterized in that the specific notification execution means makes it possible to execute the specific notification or makes it easier to execute than before based on the results of the advance grasping means.

According to the above configuration, if it is known in advance that the condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous state will be met or is likely to be met, a specific notification is more likely to be issued, and by transitioning the advantageous state to the normal state, it becomes easier to win the lottery for transitioning to the specific state. In this case, once the advantageous state transitions to the normal state, the condition for forcibly terminating the advantageous state that was known will no longer be met, so if the transition to the normal state is followed by winning the lottery for transitioning to the specific state, a new advantageous state will begin again, and the forced termination condition can be reset. In this way, the forced termination condition can essentially be avoided, and the interest in the advantageous state can be suitably increased.

In addition, "based on the result of the advance grasping means, the specific notification can be executed or becomes easier to execute than before" can also be expressed as "based on the result of the advance grasping means indicating that the forced termination condition is satisfied or is likely to be satisfied, the specific notification can be executed or becomes easier to execute than before."

The "forced termination condition" may also be expressed as "a specific condition that is met when the number of games played in the specific state reaches a predetermined upper limit, or when the number of gaming media that can be increased in the specific state reaches a predetermined upper limit."

Feature E12. The forced termination condition is satisfied when the number of game media that can be increased under a predetermined circumstance in the specific state reaches a predetermined upper limit of increase;
The advance grasping means is capable of grasping that the number of game media increased in a predetermined situation in the advantageous state has reached a specific number (2350) that is a number less than the upper limit increase number,
the specific notification execution means is configured to be able to execute the specific notification or to be able to execute the specific notification more easily than before when the advance grasping means grasps that the increased number of game media has reached the specific number;
The gaming machine described in feature E11 is characterized in that it is equipped with a means (a function of executing processing of step S5126 by a display control device 81) capable of executing a specific mode notification for an operation mode corresponding to the result of the first operation result and the second operation result which will be awarded less profit in the event of a win, in the mode notification by the mode notification execution means, at least during the period from when the advance grasping means grasps that the increased number of gaming media has reached the specific number to when the specific notification is made by the specific notification execution means.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the forced termination condition is established when the increase in the number of game media reaches the upper limit increase number, when the number of game media reaches a specific number that is less than the upper limit increase number, a specific notification is made, and the game transitions from the advantageous state to the normal state, resetting the forced termination condition. However, if the acquired specific information is not information that is likely to result in a specific result when transitioning to the normal state, there is no point in transitioning to the normal state. In that case, if the game transitions to the normal state immediately after the number of game media reaches the specific number, the player will suffer a great disadvantage. Therefore, after reaching the specific number, it is considered advisable to wait in the advantageous state until specific information that is likely to win a specific lottery in the normal state is acquired, and in a game in which such specific information is acquired, an operation mode that will give less profit when the mode result is won is announced. As a result, while assuming a gameplay in which many game media can be acquired based on the mode result win, when the forced termination condition is about to be established, the waiting game can be performed while skillfully adjusting the payout of game media to be reduced. This allows players to take full advantage of the advantages of an advantageous state while also allowing them to end that state and then transition back to it, creating a new level of gameplay.

Feature E13. A remaining number grasping means (AT mode continuation number counter) capable of grasping the remaining number of the advantageous states is provided;
The advance grasping means is capable of grasping that the forced termination condition is established based on the remaining number grasped by the remaining number grasping means,
The gaming machine described in feature E11 or feature E12, characterized in that the specific notification execution means makes it possible to execute the specific notification or makes it easier to execute than before based on the advance grasping means grasping that the forced termination condition will be met based on the remaining number.

When it is understood that the forced termination condition will be met based on the number of remaining advantageous states, it is conceivable that the forced termination condition will be met before the remaining number is consumed, and in this case, with the above configuration, a specific notification will be issued to compensate for the difference. This makes it possible to alleviate the sense of loss caused by not being able to consume the remaining number with a special benefit such as re-transitioning to a new advantageous state due to the specific notification.

Feature E14. A gaming machine according to any one of Features E1 to E13, characterized in that the specific notification execution means is configured to execute the specific notification based on the establishment of a predetermined notification condition in the specific state.

The above configuration specifies that a special notification can be executed in a special state within an advantageous state. With this configuration, for example, it is possible to realize consecutive wins across advantageous states, such as ending the special state together with the advantageous state with a special notification, and then transitioning to the special state again.

Feature E15. A favorable transition lottery means (a function of executing a favorable zone transition lottery process by the main control device 101) is provided that uses the lottery result by the lottery means to draw a lottery for a transition from the normal state to the favorable state;
A gaming machine described in any one of features E1 to E14, characterized in that the advantageous transition lottery means executes the transition lottery for all lottery results except when the lottery result by the lottery means is a losing result, and executes the transition lottery so that there is no non-winning result in the transition lottery.

The above configuration is based on a cycle of normal state → advantageous state → specific state → normal state, and all lottery results except for unsuccessful results will result in a 100% transition to the advantageous state. With this configuration, even if a transition from an advantageous state to the normal state is caused by a specific notification, the player will soon return to a new advantageous state. In other words, by lowering the hurdle for transitioning from the normal state to an advantageous state, it is also possible to lower the hurdle for transitioning from an advantageous state to the normal state, highlighting the benefits of transitioning to the normal state.

<Feature Group F>
Feature F1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result (first small win) is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a second operation result (second small win to twenty-sixth small win) that may provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell).
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is not executable, are set;
A gaming machine characterized in that it is equipped with a specification means (a function of executing processing to end the advantageous zone by winning a second replay by the main control unit 101, for example) that, when a predetermined specific result (specific role, specified ending result, second replay) is won in the advantageous state, ends the advantageous state and transitions to the normal state when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, but prevents the advantageous state from ending when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode.

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game and the rotation of the rotating body starts, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a mode result is provided in which different bonuses are awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode and when it is operated in a second operation mode as a lottery result by the lottery means, and when the mode result is won, a mode notification about the operation mode may be performed in a specific state, so that a gameplay in which the bonus awarded to the player differs depending on whether or not a mode notification is given can be realized. Moreover, such a specific state is included in an advantageous state, and a mode notification is not performed in a normal state, so that in a gameplay using a mode notification, an advantageous state can be said to be a state that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, there are also needs of players who do not wish to transition to or maintain an advantageous state. For example, in cases where some event (penalty, etc.) in an advantageous state causes status notifications to occur less frequently than expected, or where a transition to a specific state is awaited in a situation close to a forced termination condition in an advantageous state, it may be more beneficial to end the advantageous state. However, leaving the transition from an advantageous state to the player alone is not desirable in terms of game management or fraud prevention.

The above configuration makes it possible to end the advantageous state when a specific result has been won and the stop operation means has been operated in the first operation mode. This allows the player to decide whether to end the advantageous state, while the lottery held by the gaming machine is involved in this, making it possible to appropriately manage whether or not the advantageous state ends in a balanced manner.

Feature F2. The gaming machine described in Feature F1, characterized in that the second operation mode is easier to operate than the first operation mode.

By configuring it as described above, it is possible to prevent as much as possible the accidental ending of an advantageous state.

Feature F3. The specifying means is configured to end the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and a first specific pattern combination stops at the pay position, and to not end the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the pay position,
The gaming machine described in feature F2 is characterized in that the number of types of the second specific pattern combinations is set to be greater than the number of types of the first specific pattern combinations.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature F2. In particular, by varying the number of associated pattern combinations as in the above configuration, it is possible to provide a difference in the degree of difficulty of operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature F4. The specifying means is configured to end the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and a first specific pattern combination stops at the pay position, and to not end the advantageous state when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result and a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the pay position,
A gaming machine as described in feature F2 or feature F3, characterized in that a second specific pattern (e.g., a "black BAR" pattern corresponding to the second replay winning on the right reel 32R) constituting the second specific pattern combination on a predetermined specific one of the revolving bodies is set as a pattern that is easier for a player to see than a first specific pattern (e.g., a "watermelon" pattern corresponding to the second replay winning on the right reel 32R) constituting the first specific pattern combination on the specific revolving body.

By configuring as described above, the second operation mode is less difficult to operate than the first operation mode, also from the standpoint of the visibility of the image. In this way, it is possible to set a difference in the difficulty of operation between the first operation mode and the second operation mode with a simpler configuration.

More specifically, "the second specific pattern is easier for the player to see than the first specific pattern" can be expressed as "the display area in which the second specific pattern is displayed is larger than the display area in which the first specific pattern is displayed" or "the main color in the second specific pattern has a larger color difference from the surrounding colors than the main color in the first specific pattern."

Feature F5. A gaming machine according to any one of Features F1 to F4, characterized in that in the advantageous state, the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means performed in a situation where the specific state is met is the specific result, is likely to be higher than the probability that the lottery result obtained by the lottery means performed in a situation where the specific state is not met is the specific result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which it is possible to end an advantageous state depending on the operation mode at the time of winning a specific result, the probability of winning a specific result is likely to be higher in a specific state than in a non-specific advantageous state. Scenario in which it is desired to end an advantageous state that is likely to transition to a specific state includes a situation in which a transition to a specific state does not occur, as well as a situation in which the player is in a specific state but should end the specific state to transition to a normal state. In this case, since a mode notification is performed in the specific state, the number of games to be played is often limited, and a situation in which the player wishes to end the specific state is a situation in which the player wishes to end the specific state before the remaining number of games to be played is played, which can be said to be a relatively urgent situation. Therefore, by specifying the probability of winning a specific result as in the above configuration, it is possible to suitably perform an end operation during a specific state that requires urgency.

Feature F6: A first operation instruction notifying means capable of executing an operation instruction notifying operation to operate in the first operation mode by a predetermined notifying means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notification performance for the first replay winning when the fall replay is won by the display control device 81);
A second operation instruction notifying means capable of executing an operation instruction notifying to operate in the second operation mode by a predetermined notifying means when the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result (a function of executing a process for performing a push order notifying performance for a second replay winning when a fall replay is won by the display control device 81);
A determination means for determining whether a predetermined specific condition is satisfied in the specific state (a function for executing a process for determining whether a specific notification flag is set by the display control device 81);
a means for enabling the first operation instruction notifying means to notify an operation instruction when the determination result by the determination means indicates that the specific condition is not satisfied and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and for enabling the second operation instruction notifying means to notify an operation instruction when the determination result by the determination means indicates that the specific condition is satisfied and the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result (a function for executing a process for notifying the push order by the display control device 81);
A gaming machine according to any one of features F1 to F5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, an operation instruction is notified to operate in a first operation mode so as not to end the advantageous state until a specific condition is met in the specific state, and an operation instruction is notified to operate in a second operation mode so as to end the advantageous state when the specific condition is met. In this way, it is possible to avoid erroneously ending the advantageous state and the specific state even if a transition to the specific state has been made in an advantageous state.

Feature F7: A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing a process for AT selection by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific selection as to whether or not to transition to the specific state using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific state based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the transition to the specific state;
a pre-recognition means (a function of executing a process for displaying reserved information by a display control device 81) capable of recognizing information in a game prior to the game in which the specific information stored in the specific information storage means becomes the subject of the specific lottery by the specific lottery selection means when the specific information becomes the subject of the specific lottery;
Equipped with
The gaming machine described in feature F6, characterized in that one of the specific conditions is met when the result of the advance determination means indicates that the specific result is more likely to be obtained when the specific lottery using the specified specific information is conducted in the normal state than when it is conducted in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific lottery is performed using specific information acquired in advance to determine whether or not to cause a transition to a specific state, if a specific lottery using the predetermined specific information is more likely to result in a specific result when performed in a normal state than when performed in an advantageous state, the specific condition is met and the operation instruction notification during the specific state is changed to one for ending the advantageous state. In this way, when a specific condition is met in one specific state, it is possible to prompt the specific state to be reset, and it is possible to realize a series of specific states by transitioning to and resetting the specific state.

Feature F8. The gaming machine described in any one of Features F1 to F7, characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and the benefit that is awarded by the benefit awarding means when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode is the same as the lottery result by the lottery means is the specific result, and the benefit that is awarded by the benefit awarding means when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

According to the above configuration, although there is a difference in whether or not the advantageous state is ended, the bonus granted does not change depending on the operation mode at the time of winning the specific result. With this configuration, it is possible to make it possible for a notification of which operation mode should be used when a specific result is won to occur not only in an advantageous state but also in a normal state.

Feature F9. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result (first small win) is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a second operation result (second small win to twenty-sixth small win) that may provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell).
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is not executable, are set;
A gaming machine characterized in that the lottery result by the lottery means in the advantageous state is a predetermined specific result, and the advantageous state is terminated when a first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position, while the advantageous state is not terminated when a second specific pattern combination different from the first specific pattern combination stops at the valid position (a function of executing a process to terminate the advantageous zone based on the stopping of a pattern for ending when a second re-play is won by the main control unit 101).

According to the above configuration, when the start operation means is operated, the lottery means draws a game and the rotation of the rotating body starts, and when the stop operation means is operated, the rotating body stops during rotation, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means. In this so-called slot machine, a mode result is provided in which different bonuses are awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode and when it is operated in a second operation mode as a lottery result by the lottery means, and when the mode result is won, a mode notification about the operation mode may be performed in a specific state, so that a gameplay in which the bonus awarded to the player differs depending on whether or not a mode notification is given can be realized. Moreover, such a specific state is included in an advantageous state, and a mode notification is not performed in a normal state, so that in a gameplay using a mode notification, an advantageous state can be said to be a state that is advantageous to the player.

On the other hand, there are also needs of players who do not wish to transition to or maintain an advantageous state. For example, in cases where some event (penalty, etc.) in an advantageous state causes status notifications to occur less frequently than expected, or where a transition to a specific state is awaited in a situation close to a forced termination condition in an advantageous state, it may be more beneficial to end the advantageous state. However, leaving the transition from an advantageous state to the player alone is not desirable in terms of game management or fraud prevention.

In the above configuration, it is possible to end the advantageous state if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result and a first specific picture combination is stopped in a valid position, but the advantageous state is not ended if a second specific picture combination different from the first specific picture combination is stopped in a valid position even if the result of the lottery by the lottery means is a specific result. Therefore, while the player can decide to end the advantageous state by operating the stop operation means, the lottery by the gaming machine is involved in this, and it is possible to appropriately manage whether or not the advantageous state ends in a balanced manner.

Note that the configurations defined in features F1 to F8 may be applied individually or in combination to feature F9.

<Feature Group G>
Feature G1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result (first small win) is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a second operation result (second small win to twenty-sixth small win) that may provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell).
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) including a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is likely to be executed, and a normal state (normal section) in which the mode notification by the mode notification execution means is not executable, are set;
A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
A specific selection means (a function of executing an AT selection process by the main control device 101) capable of performing a specific selection as to whether or not to transition to the specific state using at least the specific information stored in the specific information storage means and the selection result by the selection means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
A specific transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific state based on the result of the specific lottery by the specific lottery means being a specific result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to the transition to the specific state;
Equipped with
The gaming machine is characterized in that the specific information is set to special information (AT counter corresponding to the first specific role = 0 to 56) that makes it more likely to result in the specific result when the specific lottery is performed in the normal state than when the specific lottery is performed in the advantageous state.

According to the above configuration, in a so-called slot machine in which, when the start operation means is operated, a lottery is conducted by the lottery means and the rotation of the circling body begins, and when the stop operation means is operated, the circling body stops, and if the stop result corresponds to the lottery result of the current game, a bonus is awarded by the bonus awarding means, a mode result is provided in which different bonuses are awarded when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode and when it is operated in a second operation mode as a result of the lottery by the lottery means, and when the mode result is won, a mode notification about the operation mode may be made in a specific state, thereby realizing playability in which the bonus awarded to the player can be varied depending on whether or not a mode notification is made. Furthermore, the specific lottery to determine whether or not to transition to a specific state in which such a status notification is made is performed using specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means and stored in the specific information storage means, in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information was acquired. This results in a configuration in which the specific information is acquired in advance in the specific lottery using the specific information, realizing a gameplay that is completely different from that of conventional slot machines, which simply associates the lottery results by the lottery means with the stopping results of the rotating body.

In addition, in the above configuration, such a specific state is included in the advantageous state, and in the normal state, a mode notification is not performed. In this way, while assuming that the advantageous state is a more advantageous state for the player in the gameplay using mode notification, if the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means is special information, the normal state is more likely to win the specific lottery in the specific lottery using the special information than the advantageous state. In this way, when the specific information is special information, an event occurs in which the normal state is more advantageous than the advantageous state only in the game in which the special information is used in the specific lottery, and while assuming that the advantageous state is more advantageous than the normal state, the advantages and disadvantages of each state can be reversed. In this case, for example, when the specific information acquired in advance is special information, it is possible to notify the player of this, or to transition from the advantageous state to the normal state. In this way, by using the above configuration, it is possible to create a new gameplay that breaks away from the simple gameplay of being advantageous if it is merely an advantageous state, and to improve the interest of the game.

Feature G2. The gaming machine described in Feature G1, characterized in that the specific selection means is set so that in the normal state, if the selection result by the selection means is a first result (e.g., a normal replay or a push order bell) and the specific information is the special information, the selection result of the specific selection becomes the specific result, and if the selection result by the selection means is a second result different from the first result (e.g., a rare combination such as a strong cherry) and the specific information is the special information, the selection result of the specific selection becomes the specific result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific lottery is performed using a set of the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information, the special information that makes it easier to win the specific lottery in the normal state is set to win both when the specific lottery is performed in a set with the first result and when the specific lottery is performed in a set with the second result. In other words, when a specific lottery is performed using special information, the specific lottery will be won regardless of whether the lottery result of the game is the first result or the second result. In this case, for example, in order to make it easier to win a specific lottery using special information, a configuration can be considered in which the appearance rate of the lottery result by the lottery means that is a win in a set with the special information is increased. However, in relation to the ball payout rate and the appearance rate of other results, there is an upper limit to how much the appearance rate of the lottery result can be increased. In this respect, by adopting the above configuration, it is possible to realize an event in which it is easier to win a specific lottery using special information without changing the lottery result by the lottery means.

Feature G3. The specific lottery means is set so that, in the advantageous state, when the lottery result by the lottery means is a third result (for example, a rare role such as a strong cherry) and the specific information is a predetermined second special information, the lottery result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result;
The gaming machine described in feature G2 is characterized in that the probability of winning the specific lottery in the advantageous state calculated by the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the third result and the probability that the specific information acquisition means will acquire the second special information is set to be higher than the probability of winning the specific lottery in the normal state calculated by the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first result or the second result and the probability that the specific information acquisition means will acquire the special information.

In the above configuration, in a configuration in which a specific result is obtained by being included in a specific lottery in a set with multiple lottery results as in feature G2, in an advantageous state, a specific result is obtained by being included in a specific lottery in a set with the third result and the second special information, and when the probabilities of obtaining the first, second, and third results in each game and the probabilities of obtaining the special information and the second special information are taken into consideration, the probabilities of the first to third results and the probabilities of obtaining the special information and the second special information are set so that an advantageous state is more likely to result in a specific result overall. In this way, it is possible to guarantee the superiority of the advantageous state in terms of the probability of winning the specific lottery, while using a configuration in which special information is included in a specific lottery in a set with multiple lottery results in the normal state.

Feature G4. The lottery result by the lottery means is set so that the probability of the lottery result being the first result is higher than the probability of the lottery result being the second result,
A gaming machine described in feature G3, characterized in that the third result is the second result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which the first result is more likely to be won than the second result, in the normal state, a set of the first or second result and the special information will win the specific lottery, and in the advantageous state, a set of the second result and the second special information will win the specific lottery. In other words, in the normal state and the advantageous state, the result of the specific lottery in the case of the second result, which is called a rare role and has a low probability of winning, differs depending on the acquired specific information. With this configuration, in order to make it easier for the advantageous state to result in a specific result overall, it is sufficient to widen the numerical range of the special information and the second special information associated with the second result on the advantageous state side, or to increase the number of types on the advantageous state side, and it becomes possible to set the probability of winning the specific lottery with a relatively simple configuration.

Feature G5. The gaming machine described in Feature G4, wherein the specific lottery means is configured such that, in the advantageous state, if the lottery result by the lottery means is the first result, the lottery result of the specific lottery is not the specific result.

According to the above configuration, since the first result, which has a high probability of winning, is not associated with specific information that results in a specific result in an advantageous state, it is possible to maximize the numerical range, etc., between the special information associated with the second result and the second special information, so that the overall advantageous state is more likely to result in a specific result. In other words, in an advantageous state, although the first result does not result in a win in the specific lottery, it is possible to maximize the probability of winning the specific lottery in the case of the second result. This can create a sense of contrast in the advantageous state and increase interest in the advantageous state.

Feature G6. The probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the first result or the second result is higher than the probability that the lottery result by the lottery means will be the third result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G3 to G5, characterized in that the probability that the specific information acquisition means acquires the special information is set to be lower than the probability that the specific information acquisition means acquires the second special information.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of features G3 to G5.

Feature G7. The specific lottery means is set so that when the lottery result by the lottery means is a special result (normal replay, no-question bell, push order bell, etc.) and the specific information is the special information, the lottery result of the specific lottery becomes the specific result;
A gaming machine described in any one of features G1 to G6, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the special result is the same when the gaming state is a first gaming state (e.g., a normal gaming state) and when the gaming state is a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (e.g., a third RT state).

By clearly distinguishing between the normal state and the advantageous state, there is an advantage that it becomes easier for the manager of the game hall to identify fraudulent acts such as making a mode notification even when a transition to a specific state has not occurred, or trying to illegally enjoy the benefits of that mode notification. In this regard, if a specific lottery is performed in the normal state with a result in which the winning probability differs depending on the game state, the winning probability of the specific lottery will differ depending on the game state, and the significance of the advantageous state will be diminished, making it difficult to identify the above-mentioned fraudulent acts. In contrast, in the above-mentioned configuration, in a configuration in which a specific lottery is performed using a set of the lottery result by the lottery means and the specific information, the winning probability of the special result, which is a win in the specific lottery in a set with the special information, will not change depending on the game state. In this way, even if a specific lottery is performed in the normal state, it is possible to clearly distinguish from the advantageous state, and to prevent the above-mentioned inconveniences from occurring.

<Feature H Group>
Feature H1. A plurality of rotating bodies (reels 32L, 32M, and 32R) on which a plurality of types of pictures are applied in the circumferential direction;
A display unit (display windows 26L, 26M, 26R) that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means (start lever 41) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when operated;
a stop operation means (stop switches 42 to 44) for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A drive control means (a function of executing a reel control process by the main control device 101) that starts rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and stops rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
A lottery means (a function of executing lottery processing by the main control device 101) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to grant a special benefit to a player based on the operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means (a function of executing a payout determination process by the main control device 101) capable of awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result by the lottery means is a predetermined result and a predetermined pattern combination corresponding to the predetermined result stops at an effective position set at a position where the patterns are visible via the display unit;
A gaming machine comprising:
As a result of the lottery by the lottery means, a first operation result (first small win) is won by operating the stop operation means in a first operation mode, and a second operation result (second small win to twenty-sixth small win) that may provide a benefit different from the first operation result is won by operating the stop operation means in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode (for example, a push order bell).
When the result of the lottery by the lottery means is the mode result, a mode notification execution means (a function of executing a push order notification process by the main control device 101) is provided that can execute a mode notification regarding an operation mode including the first operation mode or the second operation mode by a predetermined notification means,
An advantageous state (advantageous section) in which a transition to a specific state (AT mode) in which the mode notification execution means is more likely to execute the mode notification is set, and a normal state (normal section) in which a transition to the specific state is more difficult than in the advantageous state is set,
In the normal state, a favorable transition lottery means (a function of executing a favorable zone transition lottery process by the main control device 101) executes a favorable transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the favorable state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined first trigger result (all results excluding misses);
advantageous state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to an advantageous zone by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the advantageous state based on the result of the advantageous transition lottery by the advantageous transition lottery means being an advantageous transition result (advantageous state transition winning) corresponding to transitioning to the advantageous state;
A specific transition lottery means (a function of executing an AT lottery process by the main control device 101) that executes a specific transition lottery to determine whether or not to transition to the specific state based on the lottery result by the lottery means being a predetermined second trigger result (first specific role);
A specific state transition means (a function of executing a process for transitioning to the AT mode by the main control device 101) for transitioning to the specific state based on the result of the specific transition lottery by the specific transition lottery means being a specific transition result (AT mode transition winning) corresponding to transition to the specific state;
Equipped with
A gaming machine characterized in that, in a predetermined specific situation, it is set so that it is more advantageous for a player if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second trigger result before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result, rather than the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the second trigger result after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result.

According to the above configuration, in a configuration in which an advantageous state where a transition to a specific state where a mode notification is likely to be performed is set, and a normal state where a transition to a specific state is unlikely to occur, a lottery for transition to the advantageous state is held when the first trigger result is reached, and a lottery for transition to the specific state is held when the second transition result is reached, and in a specific situation, it is more advantageous for the player to have the second trigger result before the first trigger result than to have the second trigger result after the first trigger result is reached. In other words, normally, it is advantageous in terms of ease of transition to an advantageous state to have the first trigger result, a lottery for transition to an advantageous state, and then to have the second trigger result after transitioning to an advantageous state, but in a specific situation, this is reversed. By allowing such a specific situation to occur, while a gradual state transition such as normal state → advantageous state → specific state is specified, a situation occurs in which the degree of advantage, such as the ease of transition to a specific state, is reversed in the lowest level normal state, and the fun of the normal state can be improved.

In the above configuration, "It is set so that in a predetermined specific situation, it is more advantageous for the player if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second trigger result before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result, rather than the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the second trigger result after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result" may also be expressed as "It is set so that in a predetermined specific situation, it is more advantageous for the player if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second trigger result in a game before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result, rather than the lottery result by the lottery means becoming the second trigger result in a game after the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result."

Feature H2. The gaming machine described in Feature H1, characterized in that the specific situation is such that the result of the specific transition lottery by the specific transition lottery means based on the second trigger result is likely to be the specific transition result when the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second trigger result before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result and the lottery result by the advantageous transition lottery means becomes the advantageous transition result.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature H1. With this configuration, while it is assumed that advantageous states are easier to transition to specific states overall than normal states, in certain situations, a reversal phenomenon occurs in which it is easier to transition to specific states during normal states than advantageous states, making it possible to significantly improve the playability of the normal state.

Feature H3. A gaming machine according to Feature H1 or Feature H2, characterized in that the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the first trigger result is set to be higher than the probability that the result of the lottery by the lottery means will be the second trigger result.

According to the above configuration, since the probability of the first trigger result being the second trigger result is higher than the probability of the first trigger result being the second trigger result, the first specific result is more likely to occur before the second trigger result. Therefore, even in a situation where a normal state, such as a specific situation, is more advantageous than an advantageous state, this becomes more limited, and the situation where the advantage of the advantageous state is reversed becomes more limited, so that attention to the situation can be preferably increased.

Feature H4. The gaming machine described in Feature H3, characterized in that the second trigger result is included in the first trigger result.

According to the above configuration, although an event may occur in which the first trigger result is not the second trigger result, an event may not occur in which the second trigger result is not the first trigger result. In this way, by allowing overlap between both trigger results, the degree of freedom in selecting the trigger result is greatly improved.

Feature H5. The gaming machine described in Feature H4, characterized in that when the lottery result by the lottery means in the normal state becomes the second trigger result, the advantageous transition lottery is executed by the advantageous transition lottery means in the normal state, and the specific transition lottery is executed by the specific transition lottery means in the normal state.

The above configuration specifies the manner of the transition lottery when the results of both triggers overlap, and by adopting the above configuration, it is made clear that the specific transition lottery based on the second trigger result is conducted in the normal state. This makes it possible to ideally realize the reversal of the advantage degree during the normal state.

Feature H6: A pre-detection means (a function for executing a process for displaying pending information by the display control device 81) capable of detecting the possibility of the specific situation occurring before the specific situation occurs;
A specific notification execution means (a function of executing a process for issuing a specific notification by the display control device 81) capable of issuing a specific notification of a possibility of the specific situation occurring based on a result of the prediction by the advance detection means, before the specific situation occurs, by a predetermined notification means (auxiliary display unit 65);
A gaming machine according to any one of features H1 to H5, characterized in that it is equipped with:

According to the above configuration, a specific situation can be recognized by a specific notification before it occurs. In this way, if the specific notification occurs during a normal state, the player will likely play in anticipation of the notification, and if the specific notification occurs during an advantageous state, the player will likely play in anticipation of a transition to the normal state. In either case, the specific notification is likely to be a trigger for a significant change in the player's subsequent gaming attitude. This makes it possible to favorably increase the player's level of attention to the game.

Feature H7. The gaming machine according to Feature H6, wherein the specific notification execution means is capable of executing the specific notification in the advantageous state.

With the above configuration, during an advantageous state, a specific notification is given regarding a specific situation during the normal state. Therefore, even when in an advantageous state, the player will hope for a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state, evoking emotions completely opposite to those experienced in the past, providing a novel gameplay experience.

Feature H8. A gaming machine according to Feature H7, characterized in that even if the advance grasping means grasps that the specific situation may occur, if the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the second trigger result before the lottery result by the lottery means becomes the first trigger result in the advantageous state, the game machine is more disadvantageous than if the lottery result occurs in the normal state.

The above configuration makes it clear that when a specific notification is made during an advantageous state, it is meaningless unless a transition from the advantageous state to the normal state occurs. This makes it possible to make the player yearn for a transition to the normal state even more, realizing an exciting gameplay that has never been seen before.

Feature H9. A specific information acquisition means (a function for executing a random number acquisition process in the main control device 101) for acquiring specific information (AT counter C) based on the establishment of a predetermined acquisition condition;
A specific information storage means (a lottery information storage area 106f in the main control device 101) capable of storing the specific information acquired by the specific information acquisition means;
Equipped with
the specific transition lottery means is configured to execute the specific transition lottery by using the specific information stored in the specific information storage means in a game subsequent to the game in which the specific information is acquired;
The gaming machine described in any one of features H6 to H8, characterized in that the advance grasping means is configured to grasp that the specific situation may occur by grasping information about the case in which the specific information stored in the specific information storage means becomes the subject of the specific transition lottery in the normal state.

The above configuration is a specific configuration of feature H6, in which a lottery for transitioning to a specific state is conducted using specific information acquired in advance, and it is determined that a specific situation may occur based on information when the predetermined specific information acquired in advance becomes the subject of a specific transition lottery in a normal state, and a specific notification is issued based on the determination result. In this way, the specific situation can be easily determined, and gameplay using the specific notification can be optimally realized.

Feature H10. The advance grasping means is capable of grasping that, for the specific information stored in the specific information storage means, when the specific information is the subject of the specific transition lottery in the normal state, the specific transition lottery is conducted based on a specific second trigger result, resulting in the specific transition result;
The specific notification execution means includes:
A notification that enables the advantageous state to be transitioned to the normal state can be executed as the specific notification,
The gaming machine described in feature H9 is characterized in that the specific notification is capable of being made when the lottery result by the lottery means when the specified specific information becomes the subject of the specific transition lottery in the normal state is the specified second trigger result, and the probability that the specified specific information will not become the first trigger result in the normal state by the time it becomes the subject of the specific transition lottery is higher than the probability of the specified specific information becoming the specific transition result when the specified specific information becomes the subject of the specific transition lottery in the advantageous state.

If a transition to the normal state is made in a normal state when there is a high probability that the specified specific information will become the first trigger result before becoming the specified second trigger result in a game that is the subject of a specific transition lottery, there is a high possibility that the benefits of the specific situation will not be enjoyed in practice. In this regard, in the above configuration, a transition to the normal state is made taking into consideration the probability that the specified specific information will become the first trigger result before becoming the specified second trigger result in a game that is the subject of a specific transition lottery, and the probability of the specific transition result being obtained if a specific lottery using the specified specific information is received while still in an advantageous state, so that the benefits of the specific situation can be enjoyed more favorably.

Note that, to each of the configurations of Feature Group A through Feature Group H described above, it is possible to apply the technical ideas shown in the configurations of other Feature Groups A through H individually, or to apply each technical idea in combination. When applying each technical idea in combination, it is also possible to combine them across feature groups.

The basic configuration of a gaming machine to which the above-mentioned features can be applied is shown below.

Pachinko game machine: A game machine that has an operating means operated by the player, a game ball launching means that launches game balls based on the operation of the operating means, a ball passage that guides the launched game balls to a specified game area, and various game components arranged within the game area, and that awards a special prize to the player when the game ball passes through a specified passage section of each of the game components.

Slot machines and other reel-type gaming machines: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that changes and displays a series of symbols consisting of multiple symbols, and then displays the series of symbols at its final stop; the change in symbols is started by operating a start operating means, the change in symbols is stopped by operating a stop operating means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stopped symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol.

Ball-operated belt-type gaming machine: A gaming machine equipped with a variable display means that displays a variable pattern string consisting of multiple patterns and then displays the final stop of the pattern string, in which the pattern variation is started due to the operation of a start operation means, the pattern variation is stopped due to the operation of a stop operation means or after a predetermined time has passed, and a special gaming state (bonus game, etc.) advantageous to the player is generated on the condition that the final stop pattern at the time of the stop is a specific pattern, and further equipped with a ball receiving tray and an insertion device that performs an insertion process to take in game balls from the ball receiving tray, and a payout device that pays out game balls to the ball receiving tray, and configured so that the operation of the start operation means is valid when game balls are inserted by the insertion device.

10... slot machine as a gaming machine, 32... reels as a rotating body, 41... start lever as a start operation means, 42-44... stop switches as a stop operation means, 64... speaker constituting the auxiliary performance section, 65... auxiliary display section constituting the auxiliary performance section, 68... indication monitor, N8... eighth display segment as a section indicator, 81... display control device as a sub-control board, 101... main control device as a main control board, 102... CPU constituting various control means such as lottery means and main control means.

Claims (1)

A plurality of rotating bodies having a plurality of patterns applied thereto in a circumferential direction;
A display unit that allows some of the patterns on each of the rotating bodies to be viewed;
A start operation means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated;
A stop operation means for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a drive control means for starting rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the start operation means is operated and for stopping the rotation of each of the rotating bodies when the stop operation means is operated;
a lottery means for holding a lottery to determine whether or not to award a special benefit to a player based on an operation of the start operation means;
a bonus awarding means for awarding a bonus corresponding to a predetermined result when a lottery result in the lottery means is a predetermined result;
A gaming machine comprising:
a first result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a first operation mode, and a second result which allows a prize to be won when the stop operation means is operated in a second operation mode different from the first operation mode, as a lottery result by the lottery means;
a means for executing notification of an operation mode of the stop operation means,
The game state includes a first state and a second state in which the mode notification is more likely to be executed than in the first state,
a means for executing a specific determination for enabling a transition to the second state in a specific game in the first state ;
a means for transitioning to the second state based on a determination result of the specific determination being a result corresponding to enabling transition to the second state;
a means for making the specific game a later game when the stop operation means is operated in the second operation mode in a predetermined game among games in which the execution of the specific determination in the first state is restricted, compared with when the stop operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the predetermined game;
a means for enabling the bonus given by the bonus giving means to be greater when the player operates in the second operation mode in the predetermined game than when the player operates in the first operation mode;
A gaming machine comprising:

Images